Specs

2004 Specifications Atlanta, Corpus Christi, Paris, Pharr, Yoakum
Tyler, Fort Worth and San Antonio Districts

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION
5261
Geogrid Base Reinforcement

1. Description. Furnish and place geogrid base reinforcement in accordance with the lines and
grades shown on the plans or as directed.
2. Materials. Provide geogrid base reinforcement, of the type shown on the plans, meeting the
requirements of DMS-6240 Geogrid for Base/Embankment Reinforcement. Use roll
widths and lengths shown on the plans or as approved.
3. Construction. Prepare the subgrade as indicated on the plans or as directed. Set string lines
for alignment if directed. Install geogrid in accordance with the lines and grades as shown
on the plans. Place base material in lift thicknesses and compact as shown on the plans or
as directed. Do not operate tracked construction equipment on the geogrid until a minimum
fill cover of 6 in. is achieved. Rubber tire construction equipment may operate directly on
the geogrid at speeds of less than 5 mph if the underlying material will support the loads.
Where excessive substructure deformation is apparent, correct grid placement operations as
recommended by the manufacturer or as directed
A. Geogrid Placement. Orient the geogrid length as unrolled parallel to the direction of
roadway. Overlap geogrid sections as shown on the plans or as directed. Use plastic
ties at overlap joints or as directed. Placement of geogrid around corners may require
cutting and diagonal lapping. Pin geogrid at the beginning of the backfill section as
directed. Keep geogrid taut at the beginning of the backfilling section but not restrained
from stretching or flattening.
1 Longitudinal Joints. Overlap longitudinal joints by a minimum of 1 ft. Space
longitudinal ties 10 ft. to 20 ft. or as directed.
2. Transverse Joints. Overlap transverse joints by a minimum of 1 ft. Space
transverse ties 4 ft. to 5 ft. or as directed.
B. Damage Repair. As directed, remove and replace contractor damaged or excessively
deformed areas without additional compensation. Lap repair areas a minimum of 3 ft in
all directions. Tie each side of repair grid in at least 3 locations but do not exceed
normal construction spacing; tie spacing for odd shapes will be as directed. Repair
excessively deformed materials underlying the grid as directed
4. Measurement. Geogrid base reinforcement will be measured by the square yard of
roadway placement as shown in the plans with no allowance for overlapping at transverse
and longitudinal joints.
1-2 5261
01-09
2-2 5261
01-09
5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under Measurement are paid for at the unit bid price for Geogrid
Base Reinforcement of the type specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing,
preparing, hauling and placing materials including labor, materials, freight, tools, equipment
and incidentals.
1-2 6006
09-04
2004 Specifications
6006
Spread Spectrum Radios for Traffic Signals

1. Description. Furnish and install spread spectrum radios.
2. Materials. Supply complete manufacturer specifications for radio, antennas, cables,
connectors, power supply, mounting hardware, and lightning surge protector, including the
exact gain of the antenna.
3. Spread Spectrum Radio. Furnish spread spectrum radios with the following operating
minimum characteristics:

FREQUENCY 902 - 928 MHz
RANGE 15 Miles line of sight
REPEAT CAPABILITIES Store and Forward Repeater Capabilities
POWER 1.0 Watt Transmitting Power
ENVIRONMENT Temperature -22F to 140F
FCC APPROVAL No License Requirements
Type acceptance under FCC Part 15.247
DATA CHARACTERISTICS Half or Full Duplex Operation
RS232C interface
Selectable1,200 thru 19,200 bps
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY Voltage 12 DC
Amperage 3 Amp
Operating Temp -22F to 140F
Install the radios as shown on the plans or as directed.
Supply radios with diagnostic software capable of testing the link between the master radio
and the remote radios. Provide software capable of detecting channels which are not
adequate for the transmission of data and allow for the exclusion of these frequencies in the
selection of frequencies to be scanned.
4. Radio Antenna. Furnish radio antennas with the following minimum characteristics:

REMOTE SITE Unidirectional (Yagi), Minimum 9 dB gain
(dB reference to half wave dipole)
MASTER SITE Omni-directional, Minimum 6 dB gain
(dB reference to half wave dipole)
RANGE 15 Miles
IMPEDANCE 50 Ohm
WIND RATING 125 miles per hour
CONNECTORS Type N Female
Mount the antenna on a traffic signal pole, an illumination pole, or a separate steel pole as
directed. Ground the antenna to the metal support. Do not use a wood pole or support.
2-2 6006
09-04
5. Cable. Furnish low loss coaxial cable with the following minimum characteristics:

NOMINAL IMPEDANCE 50 Ohm
MAX ATTENUATION 4.2 dB/100 ft. at 900 MHz
Furnish heliax type cable for runs over 100 ft. in length. Furnish cable connectors with a
type N male connector. Install cable connectors in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Install cable as shown on the plans or as directed.
Furnish a coaxial protector (PolyPhaser IS-50NX-C2, Andrew APG-BNFNF- 090, Huber
Suhner 3400-41-0048, or equivalent). Mount coaxial protector adjacent to and bonded to the
cabinet ground bus.
6. Testing, Training, and Warranty. Provide a factory certified representative for installation
and testing of the equipment. Conduct a test site survey prior to the installation of the
equipment. The Department reserves the right to conduct their own site survey as needed.
When required, provide up to 2 days of training to personnel of the Department in the
operation, setup and maintenance of the spread spectrum radio system. Provide instruction
and materials for a maximum of 20 persons and at a location selected by the Department.
Provide instruction personnel certified by the manufacturer. The User's Guide is not an
adequate substitute for practical classroom training and formal certification.
Provide equipment with no less than 95% of the manufacturer's standard warranty remaining
when equipment invoices are submitted for payment. Any equipment with less than 95% of
its warranty remaining will not be accepted.
Provide updates of the spread spectrum radio software free of charge during the warranty
period, including the update to NTCIP compliancy.
7. Measurement. This Item will be measured by each spread spectrum radio, antenna and by
the linear foot of cable furnished and installed.
measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for Spread
Spectrum Radio, Antenna of the type specified, Coaxial Cable and Heliax Cable.
The price is full compensation for furnishing, assembling, and installing the spread spectrum
radios, antennas, and the cable; for mounting attachments; for testing, labor, tools,
equipment and incidentals.
2004 Specifications
6007
Removing Traffic Signals

1. Description. Remove, store, and salvage traffic signals.
2. Construction. Traffic signals must remain in operation during construction until their
removal as directed. The Contractor will not be responsible for maintenance of the signals
during this period of operation.
Remove existing electrical services, pedestal poles, strain poles, mast arm pole assemblies,
luminaires, signal heads, controllers, cables, and other accessories. Remove materials so that
damage does not occur. Remove and store items designated for reuse or salvage at locations
shown on the plans or as directed.
Remove abandoned concrete foundations to a point 2 ft. below final grade. Backfill hole
with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace surfacing
material with similar material to an equivalent condition.
Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with federal,
state, and local regulations.
3. Measurement. This Item will be measured as each signalized intersection salvaged. A
signalized intersection is a group of signals operated by a single controller.
measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for
Removing Traffic Signals. This price is full compensation for removing the various
traffic signal components; removing the foundations; disposal of unsalvageable material;
hauling; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals.
1-1 6007
09-04
2004 Specifications
6041
Internally Lighted Street Name Sign Assemblies

1. Description. Furnish and install internally lighted street name sign assemblies.
2. Materials. Provide new material that complies with the details shown on the plans, the
requirements of this Item, and the NEC. Provide 6 copies of material brochures, shop
drawing submittals, or both.
Provide internally lighted street sign panels that comply with DMS 8311, Internally
Illuminated Street Sign Panels. Provide single side message or double side message signs
as shown on the plans.
Use a clamp-on street name sign mast arms as shown on the plans. Form mast arm clamp
brackets and hanger bars with heat treated aluminum bar stock or galvanized steel.
Provide a mounting bracket as shown on the plans. Use a minimum 3/8 in. stainless steel
bar. Provide an adjustment bolt for each mounting bracket.
A. Housing. Construct sign fixture housing of extruded, cast, and fabricated aluminum
components. Construct top shell and bottom pan assembly with extruded aluminum
alloy 6063-T6 and join to end plates with continuous weld joints. Place a 0.050 in. thick
aluminum back side panel for single sided signs.
Provide drip rails on the top shell. Provide 4 screened weep holes at strategic points in
the bottom of the housing assembly. Design the housing for continuous gasketing
between housing and sign frame members. Use closed cell neoprene sponge rubber
gaskets.
Use stainless steel Type 302 or 305, brass, or aluminum fasteners and screws. Galvanize
steel nuts, bolts, and hardware in accordance with Item 445, Galvanizing.
Form reflectors using 0.040 in. thick aluminum. Finish the reflector surface with baked
white enamel or catalyzed polyurethane finish and a minimum reflectance value of
86%.
Provide a full length extruded aluminum hinge to mount the sign panel to the sign
housing. Provide at least 2 knurled knobs, thumb screws, or 1/4 turn wing-head
fasteners and at least two 1/4-20 captive nuts to secure the sign panel to the housing.
B. Fluorescent Lamps. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, furnish F36 T12 type lamps.
Operate each lamp from 1 lamp ballast. Use U.L. listed ballasts that conform to the
requirements of ANSI Standard C 82.1 and C 82.2. Provide instant start type ballast
capable of starting lamps at 0F and above. Use high power factor type ballast that
1-2 6041
09-04
2-2 6041
09-04
operates on 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Provide ballasts rated at 200 mA. for 6 ft. lamps and
425 mA. for 8 ft. lamps.
Use U.L. listed lamp holders. Provide spring compression type lamp holders with a
circular cross section of neoprene rubber. Removal of a lamp will de-energize the
primary system of the ballast.
Provide a miniature, slow blow type fuse in the primary circuit of the ballast. Provide
surface mounting type fuse holders with threaded bayonet knob.
Use U.L. listed conductors on loadside of power supply terminal block inside fixture.
Use 18 AWG stranded wire with 2/64 in. thermoplastic insulation rated at 1000 V.,
90C. Terminate wiring on a 2 pole phenolic barrier type terminal block rated at 30 A.,
600 V.
3. Construction. Fabricate and install internally lighted street name signs as shown on the
plans. Sampling of fixtures for testing will be done in accordance with Tex-1110-T, except
the minimum sample size is 1. Install signs level and plumb brackets. Attach internally
lighted street name signs to traffic signal poles as shown on the plans.
Use established industry and utility safety practices when erecting sings near overhead or
underground utilities. Consult with appropriate utility companies prior to beginning work.
Power the internally lighted street name sign from the traffic signal service pole. Install a
20 A. circuit breaker and a photocell for the internally lighted street name sign.
Ground the sign to a grounding conductor connected between the fixture and the grounding
conductor in the base of the pole.
4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by each unit installed.
measured as provided under "Measurement", will be paid for at the unit bid price for
"Internally Lighted Street Name Signs" of the sizes and types specified. This price is full
compensation for furnishing and installing the signs; support arm clamp assembly; liquid
tight flexible metal conduit; circuit breakers and photocells; and equipment, labor, tools, and
incidentals.
2004 Specifications
6266
Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System

1. Description. Install a Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System (VIVDS) that monitors
vehicles on a roadway via processing of video images and provides detector outputs to a
traffic controller or similar device.
A VIVDS configuration for a single intersection will consist of 4 variable focal length
cameras, VIVDS card rack processor system, and all associated equipment required to setup
and operate in a field environment including a video monitor and/or laptop (if required),
connectors and camera mounting hardware.
The system is composed of these principal items: the camera(s), the field communications
link between the camera and the VIVDS processor unit, and the VIVDS processor unit along
with a PC, video monitor or associated equipment required to setup the VIVDS and central
control software to communicate to the VIVDS processor.
The VIVDS Card Rack Processor must be either NEMA TS 2 TYPE 1 or TYPE 2. TYPE 2
must have RS 485 SDLC.
2. Definitions.
A. VIVDS Processor Unit. The electronic unit that converts the video image provided by
the cameras, generates vehicle detections for defined zones and collects vehicular data
as specified.
B. VIVDS Processor System. One or more VIVDS processor modular units required to
handle the number of camera inputs.
C. Central Control. A remotely located control center, which communicates with the
VIVDS. The VIVDS operator at the central control has the ability to monitor the
operation and modify detector placement and configuration parameters. The equipment
that constitutes central control is comprised of a workstation microcomputer along with
the associated peripherals as described in this special specification.
D. Field Setup Computer. A portable microcomputer used to set up and monitor the
operation of the VIVDS processor unit. If required to interface with the VIVDS
processor unit, the field setup computer with the associated peripherals described in this
special specification and a video monitor, also described in this special specification,
must be supplied as part of the VIVDS.
E. Field Communications Link. The communications connection between the camera and
the VIVDS processor unit. The primary communications link media may be coaxial
cable or fiber optic cable.
1-10 6266
09-05
F. Remote Communications Link. The communications connection between the VIVDS
processor unit and the central control.
G. Camera Assembly. The complete camera or optical device assembly used to collect the
visual image. The camera assembly consists of a charged coupled device (CCD)
camera, environmental enclosure, sun shield, temperature control mechanism, and all
necessary mounting hardware.
H. Occlusion. The phenomenon when a vehicle passes through the detection zone but the
view from the sensor is obstructed by another vehicle. This type of occlusion results in
the vehicle not being detected by the sensor.
Or
When a vehicle in one lane passes through the detection zone of an adjacent lane. This
type of occlusion can result in the same vehicle being counted in more than one lane.
I. Detection Zone. The detection zone is a line or area selected through the VIVDS
processor unit that when occupied by a vehicle, sends a vehicle detection to the traffic
controller or freeway management system.
J. Detection Accuracy. The measure of the basic operation of a detection system (shows
detection when a vehicle is in the detection zone and shows no detection when there is
not a vehicle in the detection zone).
K. Live Video. Video being viewed or processed at 30 frames per second.
L. Lux. The measure of light intensity at which a camera may operate. A unit of
illumination equal to one lumen per square meter or to the illumination of a surface
uniformly one meter distant from a point source of one candle.
M. Video Monitor. As a minimum must be a 9-in. black and white monitor with BNC
connectors for video in and out.
3. Functional Capabilities.
The system software must be able to detect either approaching or departing vehicles in
multiple traffic lanes. A minimum of 4 detector outputs per video processor module card
and each card must have a minimum of 24 detection zones. Each zone and output must be
user definable through interactive graphics by placing lines and/or boxes in an image on a
video or VGA monitor. The user must be able to redefine previously defined detection
zones.
The VIVDS must provide real time vehicle detection (within 112 milliseconds (ms) of
vehicle arrival).
The VIVDS processor unit must be capable of simultaneously processing information from
various video sources, including CCTV video image sensors and video tape players. The
video sources may be, but are not required to be, synchronized or line-locked. The video
must be processed at a rate of 30 times per second by the VIVDS processor unit.
2-10 6266
09-05
The system must be able to detect the presence of vehicles in a minimum of 12 detection
zones within the combined field of view of all cameras (a minimum of 12 detection zones
per camera input to the VIVDS processor unit).
Detection zones must be provided that are sensitive to the direction of vehicle travel. The
direction to be detected by each detection zone must be user programmable.
The VIVDS processor unit must compensate for minor camera movement (up to 2% of the
field of view at 400 ft.) without falsely detecting vehicles. The camera movement must be
measured on the unprocessed video input to the VIVDS processor unit.
The camera must operate while directly connected to VIVDS Processor Unit.
Once the detector configuration has been downloaded or saved into the VIVDS processor
unit, the video detection system must operate with the monitoring equipment (monitor
and/or laptop) disconnected or on-line.
When the monitoring equipment is directly connected to the VIVDS processor unit, it must
be possible to view vehicle detections in real time as they occur on the field setup
computer's color VGA display or the video monitor.
4. Vehicle Detection.
A. Detection Zone Placement. The video detection system must provide flexible detection
zone placement anywhere within the combined field of view of the image sensors.
Preferred presence detector configurations must be lines or boxes placed across lanes of
traffic or lines placed in line with lanes of traffic. A single detector must be able to
replace one or more conventional detector loops. Detection zones must be able to be
fully overlapped. In addition, detection zones must have the capability of implementing
AND and OR logical functions including presence, extension and delay timing.
These logical functions may be excluded if provisions are made to bring each detector
separately into the controller and the controller can provide these functions.
B. Detection Zone Programming. Placement of detection zones must be by means of a
graphical interface using the video image of the roadway. The monitor must show
images of the detection zones superimposed on the video image of traffic while the
VIVDS processor is running.
The detection zones must be created by using the mouse or keypad to draw detection
zones on the monitor. The detection zones must be capable of being sized, shaped and
overlapped to provide optimal road coverage and detection. It must be possible to
upload detector configurations to the VIVDS processor unit and to retrieve the detector
configuration that is currently running in the VIVDS processor unit.
The mouse or keypad must be used to edit previously defined detector configurations so
as to fine tune the detection zone placement size and shape. Once a detection
configuration has been created, the system must provide a graphic display of the new
configuration on its monitor. While this fine-tuning is being done, the detection must
continue to operate from the detector configuration that is currently called.
3-10 6266
09-05
When a vehicle occupies a detection zone, the detection zone on the live video must
indicate the presence of a vehicle, thereby verifying proper operation of the detection
system. With the absence of video, the card must have an LED that will indicate proper
operation of the detection zones.
Detection zones must be provided that is sensitive to the direction of vehicle travel. The
direction to be detected by each detection zone must be user programmable. The vehicle
detection zone should not activate if a vehicle traveling any direction other than the one
specified for detection occupies the detection zone. Cross-street and wrong way traffic
should not cause a detection.
C. Design Field of View. The video detection system must reliably detect vehicle presence
in the design field of view. The design field of view must be defined as the sensor view
when the image sensor is mounted 24 ft. or higher above the roadway, when the camera
is adjacent (within 15 ft.) to the edge of the nearest vehicle travel lane, and when the
length of the detection area is not greater than 10 times the mounting height of the
image sensor. Within this design field of view, the VIVDS processor unit must be
capable of setting up a single detection zone for point detection (equivalent to the
operation of a 6 ft. by 6 ft. inductive loop). A single camera, placed at the proper
mounting height with the proper lens, must be able to monitor up to and including 5
traffic lanes simultaneously.
D. Detection Performance. Detection accuracy of the video detection system must be
comparable to properly operating inductive loops. Detection accuracy must include the
presence of any vehicle in the defined detection zone regardless of the lane, which the
vehicle is occupying. Occlusion produced by vehicles in the same or adjacent lanes
must not be considered a failure of the VIVDS processor unit, but a limitation of the
camera placement. Detection accuracy (a minimum of 95%) must be enforced for the
entire design field of view on a lane by lane and on a time period basis. When specified
in the plans, furnish up to 24 continuous hours of recorded video of all installed
intersection cameras within the 30 day test period for verification of proper camera
placement, field of view, focus, detection zone placement, processor setup and
operation. The video from each camera must show vehicle detections for all zones.
E. Equipment failure, either camera or VIVDS processor unit, must result in constant
vehicle detection on affected detection zones.
5. VIVDS Processor Unit.
A. Cabinet Mounting- The VIVDS processor unit must be rack mountable.
B. Environmental Requirements - The VIVDS processor unit must be designed to operate
reliably in the adverse environment found in the typical roadside traffic cabinet. It must
meet the environmental requirements set forth by the latest NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association) TS1 and TS2 standards as well as the environmental
requirements for Type 170, Type 179 and 2070 controllers. Operating temperature must
be from -30F to +165F at 0% to 95% relative humidity, non condensing.
C. Electrical - The VIVDS must have a modular electrical design.
4-10 6266
09-05
The VIVDS must operate within a range of 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz single phase. Power
to the VIVDS must be from the transient protected side of the AC power distribution
system in the traffic control cabinet in which the VIVDS is installed.
Serial communications to the field setup computer must be through an RS 232, USB or
Ethernet port. This port must be able to download the real time detection information
needed to show detector actuations. A connector on the front of the VIVDS processor
unit must be used for serial communications.
The unit must be equipped with RS 170 (monochrome) or RS170A (color) composite
video inputs video inputs, so that signals from image sensors or other synchronous or
asynchronous video sources can be processed in real time. BNC connectors on the front
of the VIVDS processor unit or video patch panel must be used for all video inputs.
The unit must be equipped with a single RS 170 composite video output. This output
must be capable of corresponding to any one of the video inputs, as selected remotely
via the field setup computer or front panel switch. Multiple video outputs requiring
external cable connections to create a combined single video output must not be
acceptable. A BNC or RCA connector must be used for video output on the front of the
processor unit. Any other video formats used must prior approval by TxDOT TRF
Signal Operation Engineer.
Software upgrades and/or changes MUST be presented to and approved by TXDOT
TRF-TM division, before being used. Failure to do so will be grounds for termination
of contract and probation for responsible party(s).
The unit software and the supervisor software must include diagnostic software to allow
testing the VIVDS functions. This must include the capability to set and clear
individual detector outputs and display the status of inputs to enable setup and
troubleshooting in the field.
6. Camera Assembly.
A. Camera. The video detection system must use medium resolution, monochrome image
sensors as the video source for real time vehicle detection. The cameras must be
approved for use with the VIVDS processor unit by the supplier of the VIVDS. As a
minimum, each camera must provide the following capabilities:
1. Images must be produced with a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) sensing element
with horizontal resolution of at least 480 lines for black and white or 470 lines for
color and vertical resolution of at least 350 lines for black and white or color.
Images must be output as a video signal conforming to RS170.
2. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image must be produced when
those features have luminance levels as low as 0.1 lux for black and white, and as
low as 1.0 lux for color, for night use.
3. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image must be produced when
those features have luminance levels as high as 10,000 lux during the day.
5-10 6266
09-05
4. The camera must include an electronic shutter or auto-iris control based upon
average scene luminance and must be equipped with an electronic shutter or auto-
iris lens with variable focal length and variable focus that can be adjusted without
opening up the camera housing to suit the site geometry. The variable focal length
must be adjustable from 6 mm to 34 mm.
B. Camera and Lens Assembly. The camera and lens assembly must be housed in an
environmental enclosure that provides the following capabilities:
1. The enclosure must be waterproof and dust tight to the latest NEMA 4
specifications.
2. The enclosure must allow the camera to operate satisfactorily over an ambient
temperature range from -30F to +165F while exposed to precipitation as well as
direct sunlight.
3. The enclosure must allow the camera horizon to be rotated in the field during
installation.
4. The enclosure must include a provision at the rear of the enclosure for connection
of power and video signal cables fabricated at the factory. Input power to the
environmental enclosure must be nominally 115 VAC 60 Hz.
5. A thermostatically controlled heater must be at the front of the enclosure to prevent
the formation of ice and condensation, as well as to assure proper operation of the
lens's iris mechanism. The heater must not interfere with the operation of the
camera electronics, and it must not cause interference with the video signal.
6. The enclosure must be light colored or unfinished and must include a sun shield to
minimize solar heating. The front edge of the sunshield must protrude beyond the
front edge of the environmental enclosure and must include provision to divert
water flow to the sides of the sunshield. The amount of overhang of the sun shield
must be adjustable to block the view of the horizon to prevent direct sunlight from
entering the lens. Any plastics used in the enclosure must include ultra violet
inhibitors.
7. The total weight of the image sensor in the environmental enclosure with sunshield
must be less than 10 lb.
8. When operating in the environmental enclosure with power and video signal cables
connected, the image sensor must meet FCC class B requirements for
electromagnetic interference emissions.
The video output of the cameras must be isolated from earth ground. All video connections
for the cameras to the video interface panel must also be isolated from earth ground.
Use waterproof, quick disconnect connectors to the image sensor for both video and power.
A camera interface panel capable of being mounted to sidewalls of a controller cabinet must
be provided for protection of the VIVDS processor unit, camera video and power
inputs/outputs. The panel must consist of, as a minimum, 4 Edco CX06 coax protectors, a
6-10 6266
09-05
Edco ACP-340 for the cameras and VIVDS processor unit power, a 10 amp breaker, a
convenience outlet protected the ACP-340 and a terminal strip with a minimum of sixteen 8-
32 binder head screws. The terminal strip must be protected by a piece of 1/8 in. Plexiglas.
When the connection between the image sensor and the VIVDS processor unit is coaxial
cable, the coaxial cable used must be a low loss, 75 ohm, precision video cable suited for
outdoor installation, such as Belden 8281 or TxDOT approved equal.
Camera mounting hardware must allow for vertical or horizontal mounting to the camera
enclosure. Pelco AS-0166-4-62 or equivalent is acceptable.
7. Field Communication Link. The field communications link must be a one way
communications connection from the camera to the equipment cabinet. The primary
communications link media may be coaxial cable or fiber optic cable accompanied by a 3
conductor minimum 18 AWG, 24 VDC or 115 VAC camera power cable, or appropriate
cable as approved.
The following requirements must govern for the various types of field communications link
media described on the plans:
A. Coaxial Cable. In locations where the plans indicate coaxial cable is required as the
primary communications link, this cable must be of the RG 59 type with a nominal
impedance of 75 ohms. All cable must have a polyethylene dielectric with copper braid
shield having a minimum of 98 percent shield coverage and not greater than 0.78 dB
attenuation per 100 ft. at 10 MHz with a minimum 18 AWG external 3 conductor power
cable or approved equivalent as directed by the Engineer.
B. Fiber Optic Cable. If specified by the plans, furnish fiber optic cable in accordance
with the special specification for fiber optic cable.
C. Twisted Wire Pairs. Must be Belden 9556 or equivalent 18 AWG TWP control cable.
All connection cables must be continuous from the equipment cabinet to the camera. No
splices of any type will be permitted.
Install lightning and transient surge suppression devices on the processor side of the field
communications link to protect the peripheral devices. The suppression devices must be all
solid state. Lightning protection is not required for fiber optic communication lines. The
devices must present high impedance to, and must not interfere with, the communications
lines during normal operation. The suppression devices must not allow the peak voltage on
any line to exceed 300% of the normal operating peak voltage at any time. The response
time of the devices must not exceed 5 nanoseconds.
8. VIVDS Set-Up System. The minimum VIVDS set-up system, as needed for detector setup
and viewing of vehicle detections, must consist of a field setup computer and Windows
based interface software (if required) or a video monitor with interface software built-in to
the VIVDS processor unit. Live video (30 frames per second) must be available on the field
setup computer to determine proper operation of detectors. The field set-up computer as a
minimum, must have an NTSC video input port or equivalent.
7-10 6266
09-05
If a field setup computer is required for system set-up, it must be supplied by the supplier of
the VIVDS.
The field setup computer must include all necessary cabling and a Windows based program
to interface with the VIVDS processor unit. This software must provide an easy to use
graphical user interface and support all models/versions of the supplied VIVDS.
Live video with the detection overlaid is required for field verification of the system.
9. Temporary Use and Retesting.
A. Temporary Use. When shown on the plans, the VIVDS equipment must be used to
provide vehicle detection on a temporary basis. When the permanent vehicle detection
system and related equipment are installed and made operational, the VIVDS equipment
must be carefully removed and delivered to the location shown on the plans.
B. State Retesting and Acceptance. Prior to acceptance, all VIVDS equipment may be
retested by the State, even if the system was operating properly before removal. Repair
or replace any equipment damaged during removal or transport and any equipment that
does not meet the various test requirements.
10. Operation from Central Control. The central control must transmit and receive all
information needed for detector setup, monitor the vehicle detection, view the vehicle traffic
flow at a rate of 2 frames per second or greater for telephone, or 5 frames a second or greater
for ISDN lines (as specified by the plans), and interrogate all required stored data. The
remote communications link between the VIVDS processor unit and central control may be
dial-up (telephone or ISDN lines) or dedicated twisted wire pair communications cable
which may be accompanied with coaxial cable or fiber-optic cable, as shown on the plans.
Communications with the central control must not interfere with the on-street detection of
the VIVDS processor. Quality of the video at 2 frames per second rate must be such that the
view with the traffic flow is clear and in focus.
11. Installation and Training. The supplier of the video detection system must supervise the
installation and testing of the video and computer equipment. A factory certified
representative from the supplier must be on site during installation.
In the event that the field setup computer is furnished by TxDOT, such installation and
testing must be done at the time that training is conducted.
Provide up to 2 days of training to personnel of TxDOT in the operation, setup and
maintenance of the video detection system. Provide instruction and materials for a maximum
of 20 persons and conduct at a location selected by TxDOT. TxDOT will be responsible for
any travel and room and board expenses for its own personnel.
Instruction personnel are required to be certified by the equipment manufacturer. The User's
Guide is not an adequate substitute for practical, classroom training and formal certification
by an approved agency.
Formal levels of factory authorized training are required for installers, contractors and
system operators. All training must be certified by the manufacturer.
8-10 6266
09-05
12. Warranty, Maintenance and Support. The video detection system must be warranted to
be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years from date of shipment
from the suppliers facility. During the warranty period, the supplier must repair with new or
refurbished materials, or replace at no charge, any product containing a warranty defect
provided the product is returned FOB to the suppliers factory or authorized repair site.
Return product repair or replaced under warranty by the supplier with transportation prepaid.
This warranty does not apply to products damaged by accident, improperly operated,
abused, serviced by unauthorized personnel or unauthorized modification.
During the warranty period, technical support must be available from the supplier via
telephone within 4 hours of the time a call is made by a user, and this support must be
available from factory certified personnel or factory certified installers.
Ongoing software support by the supplier must include updates of the VIVDS processor unit
and supervisor software (if a field setup computer is required for set up). Provide these
updates free of charge during the warranty period. The update of the VIVDS software to be
NTCIP compliant must be included.
The supplier must maintain a program for technical support and software updates following
expiration of the warranty period. Make this program available to TxDOT in the form of a
separate agreement for continuing support.
The supplier must maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the wireless camera
system. This technical support must be available via telephone or personnel sent to the
installation site.
The supplier must maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance and repair
of the camera system.
13. Measurement. The VIVDS will be measured as each major system component furnished,
installed, made fully operational, and tested in accordance with this special specification or
as directed by the Engineer.
The VIVDS communication cable will be measured by the linear foot of the appropriate
media type furnished, installed, made fully operational, and tested in accordance with this
specification, other referenced Special Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
When the VIVDS is used on a temporary basis, the VIVDS must be measured as each
system furnished, installed, made fully operational, including reconfiguration and removal if
required by the plans, and tested in accordance with this special specification or as directed
by the Engineer.
This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in
the proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, Plans Quantity Measurement. Additional
measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required.
When recorded video is required by the plans it will be paid for by each camera recorded.
measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for
"VIVDS Processor System", "VIVDS Camera Assembly", "VIVDS Central Control",
9-10 6266
09-05
"VIVDS Set-up System", "VIVDS Temporary", "VIVDS Communication Cable (Coaxial),"
"VIVDS Communication Cable (Fiber Optic)", VIVDS Video Recording, and all
accompanying software. These prices are full compensation for furnishing, placing, and
testing all materials and equipment, and for all tools, labor, equipment, hardware,
operational software package(s), supplies, support, personnel training, shop drawings,
documentation, and incidentals. A 3-conductor power cable must be included with the
communication cable.
These prices also include any and all interfaces required for the field and remote
communications links along with any associated peripheral equipment, including cables; all
associated mounting hardware and associated field equipment; required for a complete and
fully functional visual image vehicle detection system component.
10-10 6266
09-05
1-2 6834
06-07
2004 Specifications
6834
Portable Changeable Message Sign

1. Description. Furnish, operate, and maintain portable trailer mounted changeable message
sign (PCMS) units.
2. Materials. Furnish new or used material in accordance with the requirements of this Item
and the details shown on the plans. Provide a self-contained PCMS unit with the following:
Sign controller
Changeable Message Sign
Trailer
Power source
Paint the exterior surfaces of the power supply housing, supports, trailer, and sign with
Federal Orange No. 22246 or Federal Yellow No. 13538 of Federal Standard 595b, except
paint the sign face assembly flat black.
A. Minimum Luminance Requirements. All PCMS units shall meet the following
luminance requirements measured at the character level in candela as is published in
Report 4940-2, Photometric Requirements for Portable Changeable Message Signs,
conducted by the Texas Transportation Institute. Luminance will be tested in
accordance with Tex-880.
Minimum Daytime Character Luminance of 4000cd/m2 with a contrast ratio of 5.
Minimum Nighttime Character Luminance of 30/cd/m2.
B. Sign Controller. Provide a controller with permanent storage of a minimum of 75 pre-
programmed messages. Provide an external input device for random programming and
storage of a minimum of 75 additional messages. Provide a controller capable of
displaying up to 3 messages sequentially. Provide a controller with adjustable display
rates. Enclose sign controller equipment in a lockable enclosure.
C. Changeable Message Sign. Provide a sign capable of being elevated to at least 7 ft.
above the roadway surface from the bottom of the sign. Provide a sign capable of being
rotated 360 and secured against movement in any position.
Provide a sign with 3 separate lines of text and 8 characters per line minimum. Provide
a minimum 78 in. high x 126 in. wide sign housing. Provide a minimum 18 in. character
height. Provide a 5 x 7 character pixel matrix. Provide a message visibility distance of
750 ft. Provide for manual and automatic dimming light sources.
The following are descriptions for 3 screen types of PCMS:
2-2 6834
06-07
Character Modular Matrix. This screen type comprises of character blocks.
Continuous Line Matrix. This screen type uses proportionally spaced fonts for
each line of text.
Full Matrix. This screen type uses proportionally spaced fonts, varies the height of
characters, and displays simple graphics on the entire sign.
D. Trailer. Provide a 2 wheel trailer with square top fenders, 4 leveling jacks, and trailer
lights. Do not exceed an overall trailer width of 96 in. Shock mount the electronics and
sign assembly.
E. Power Source. Provide a diesel generator, solar powered power source, or both.
Provide a backup power source as necessary.
F. Cellular Telephone. When shown on the plans, provide a cellular telephone connection
to communicate with the PCMS unit remotely.
3. Construction. Place or relocate PCMS units as shown on the plans or as directed. The plans
will show the number of PCMS units needed, for how many days, and for which
construction phases.
Maintain the PCMS units in good working condition. Repair damaged or malfunctioning
PCMS units as soon as possible. PCMS units will remain the property of the Contractor.
4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by each PCMS or by the day used. All PCMS
units shall be set up on a work area and operational before a calendar day can be considered
measurable. When measurement by the day is specified, a day shall be measured for each
PCMS set up and operational on the worksite.
Portable Changeable Message Sign. This price is full compensation for PCMS units; set
up; relocating; removing; replacement parts; batteries (when required); fuel, oil, and oil
filters (when required); cellular telephone charges (when required); software; and
equipment, materials, tools, labor, and incidentals.
1-3 8120
06-08
2004 Specifications
8120
Timing for Temporary Traffic Signals

1. Description. This Item governs the implementation and maintenance of traffic signal
timing for temporary traffic signals, including data collection and traffic signal timing
generation, as shown on the plans, for efficient traffic flow in construction zones.
2. General. Develop, install and maintain the approved timing plans in the signal controllers.
Perform all work using qualified engineering personnel under the supervision of a
Professional Engineer who is 1) licensed by the State of Texas and 2) pre-certified by
TxDOT in work category 7.3.1. Traffic Signal Timing.
Identify in writing to the Engineer the individual(s) proposed to perform signal timing for
the temporary traffic signals. Provide the individuals Texas P.E. license number, TxDOT
certification number, signal timing projects performed by the individual, and the names,
telephone numbers and e-mail addresses of references for those timing projects.
Prepare and furnish a signal timing report in a timely manner and obtain approval before the
beginning of the associated work. Include in the report traffic volumes, proposed cycle
lengths, splits, offsets and offset reference phases, time-of-day schedules, time-space
diagrams and levels-of-service (LOS), delays and v/c ratios for each movement. Do not
activate temporary traffic signals until this report has been approved by the Engineer.
Ensure that the signal timing plans, revised signal timing plans, proposed time-of-day
schedules, time-space diagrams, revised phasing sequences, final reports, as well as any
other engineering documents submitted within this Special Specification, will bear the seal
and signature of the Responsible Engineer.
3. Scope of Work.
A. Coordination of Traffic Signal System. Perform some or all of the following as shown
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1. Data Collection. Collect turning movement volumes for all current or proposed
signalized intersections shown on the plans. Submit turning movement data in
tabular and map formats.
If shown on the plans, collect recording machine count data. Perform machine
counts for 96 continuous hours from midnight Thursday/Friday through midnight
Monday/Tuesday. Place count tubes at each inbound approach to the
intersection(s) listed on the plans.
2-3 8120
06-08
2. Timing Plan Generation. Perform optimization analysis using the existing
volumes to determine the best cycle lengths for the temporary traffic signals. Use
PASSER, Synchro, TRANSYT or other similar signal optimization program
approved by the Engineer. Summarize these results in tabular and graphical
formats.
Generate time-space diagrams for all periods for each arterial on the project.
Submit the generated timing plans, proposed time-of-day schedule and time-space
diagrams to the Engineer for review. Incorporate the appropriate revisions into the
timing plans and submit the revised timing plans and time-space diagrams for
review.
3. Timing Plan Implementation and In-Field Fine Tuning. During the initial
implementation of new timing plans, provide for on-site fine tuning, observe the
actual operation of the timing plans, and make field adjustments to improve traffic
operations. Provide a written report to the Engineer documenting all changes to the
timing plans as a result of fine tuning activities. For the course of the project,
provide and maintain a log book in each controller cabinet documenting activities
associated with signal operation. Include a printout of the most recent signal timing
database in each controller cabinet.
4. Re-Timing of a Signal System. If shown on the plans, generate new timing plans
during the project for a change in road capacity or traffic flows. Recalculate new
cycle lengths, phase sequences, and phase splits. Provide in-field fine tuning of the
entire signal system for all new plans. Prepare and furnish a signal timing report,
meeting the requirements of Section 3.A.2., in a timely manner and obtain approval
before the beginning of the associated work. During the initial implementation of
the new timing plans, provide on-site fine tuning of the new timings. Provide a
written report to the Engineer documenting all changes to the timing plans as a
result of fine tuning activities.
B. Routine Monitoring of Timing Plans. As shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer, observe the actual operation of all of the timing plans at each traffic signal and
make signal timing adjustments to improve traffic operations. Ensure that plans are
monitored and maintained throughout the course of the project, with a minimum of bi-
weekly visits to each intersection for each timing plan period. Maintain the time clocks
in the signal controllers to ensure proper operation of the timing plans. Reset time clocks
bi-weekly or as directed. This work is subsidiary to this item. Repair or replace all
broken equipment as needed or directed by the Engineer. Provide written documentation
of all routine monitoring activities to the Engineer on a monthly basis.
C. Special Adjustment of Timing Plans. When notified by the Engineer, observe the
actual operation of the timing plans and, make any necessary signal timing adjustments
to improve traffic operations. Submit final reports to the Engineer upon completion of
any of the following work categories. Include in these reports a summary of changes
made and an updated set of timing plans.
3-3 8120
06-08
1. Trouble Calls. Respond to and diagnose all trouble calls for signal timing within
24 hours unless shown elsewhere in the plans. Adjust signal timings as necessary to
improve traffic operations.
2. New Construction Phase Sequences. When new construction phase sequences are
implemented that increase or decrease travel lanes or turn storage or significantly
change vehicle capacity at one or more signalized intersections, perform on-site fine
tuning. Adjust signal timings as necessary to improve traffic operations.
4. Measurement. This Item will be measured as follows:
A. Coordination of Traffic Signal System as described will be measured as each
complete signal system coordinated with new timing plans for all timing plan periods
listed in the plans, and fine tuned by a qualified engineer.
B. Routine Monitoring of Timing Plans as described herein shall be measured as each
month that the signal system is reviewed and fine tuned by a qualified engineer.
C. Special adjustment of Timing Plans as described herein shall be measured as each
event requiring response by a qualified engineer regardless of the number of timing
plans or intersections.
Coordination of Traffic Signal System or Routine Monitoring of Timing Plans or
Special Adjustment of Timing Plans. These prices are full compensation for all data
collection, generation, implementation and maintenance and adjustment of traffic signal
timing and for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary. Any work
having been performed without the direct supervision of the previously approved
Professional Engineer, pre-certified by TxDOT in work category 7.3.1. Traffic Signal
Timing, will be rejected with payment not being made for that work.
1-1 100---002
10-07
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
100---002
Preparing Right of Way

For this project, Item 100, Preparing Right of Way, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this
Item are waived or changed hereby.
Article 100.4. Payment. The second paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

Total payment of this Item will not exceed 10% of the original contract amount until final
acceptance. The remainder will be paid on the estimate after the final acceptance under Article
5.8, Final Acceptance.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
247---033
Flexible Base

For this project, Item 247, Flexible Base, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended
with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are
waived or changed hereby.
Article 247.2. Materials, Section A. Aggregate, Table 1. Material Requirements is replaced
by the following:
Table 1
Material Requirements
Property
Test
Method
Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 5
Master gradation
sieve size
(cumulative %
retained)

2-1/2 in. 0 0 0
1-3/4 in. 0 010 010 0-5
7/8 in. 1035 1035
3/8 in. 3050 3565
No. 4 4565 4575 4575 4575
No. 40
Tex-110-E
7085 6085 5085
As shown on
the plans
7090
Liquid Limit,
% max.
1

Tex-104-E 35 40 40
As shown on
the plans
35
Plasticity Index,
max.
1

10 12 12
As shown on
the plans
10
Plasticity index, min.
1

Tex-106-E
As shown on the plans
Wet ball mill,
% max.
2

40 45
As shown on
the plans
40
Wet ball mill, % max.
increase passing the
No. 40 sieve
Tex-116-E
20 20
As shown on
the plans
20
Classification, max.
3
Tex-117-E
When
shown on
the plans
When
shown on
the plans

As shown on
the plans
-
Min. compressive
strength, psi

lateral pressure 0 psi 45 35
lateral pressure 3 psi 90
lateral pressure 15 psi
Tex-117-E
175 175
As shown on
the plans
175
1. Determine the plastic index in accordance with Tex-107-E (linear shrinkage) when liquid limit is unattainable as
defined in Tex-104-E.
2. When a soundness value is required by the plans, test material in accordance with Tex-411-A.
3. When Classification is required by the plans, a triaxial Classification of 1.0 or less for Grades 1 and 2.3 or less for
Grade 2 is required. The Classification requirement for Grade 4 will be as shown on the plans.
1-2 247-033
03-09
2-2 247-033
03-09

Article 247.2. Materials, Section A. Aggregate, Section 3. Recycled Material, Section b.
Recycled Material (Including Crushed Concrete) Requirements, Section (1), Contractor
Furnished Recycled Materials is supplemented by the following:
Provide recycled materials that have a maximum sulfate content of 3000 ppm when tested in
accordance with Tex-145-E.
Article 247.4. Construction, Section C. Compaction is supplemented by the following:
Before final acceptance, the Engineer will select the locations of tests and measure the flexible
base depth in accordance with Tex-140-E when Complete in Place measurement is specified.
Correct areas deficient by more than 1/2 in. in thickness by scarifying, adding material as
required, reshaping, recompacting, and refinishing at the Contractors expense.
Article 247.4. Construction, Section C. Compaction, Section 2. Density Control first
paragraph is replaced by the following:
Compact to at least 100% of the maximum dry density determined by Tex-113-E, unless
otherwise shown on the plans. Maintain moisture during compaction at not less than 1
percentage point below the optimum moisture content determined by Tex-113-E. Determine the
moisture content of the material in accordance with Tex-115-E or Tex-103-E during compaction
daily and report the results the same day to the Engineer, unless otherwise shown on the plans or
directed.

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
260---002
Lime Treatment (Road-Mixed)

For this project, Item 260, Lime Treatment (Road-Mixed), of the Standard Specifications, is
hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of
this Item are waived or changed hereby.
Article 260.2. Materials, Section A. Lime. The first two sentences are voided and replaced by
the following:
A. Lime. Furnish lime that meets the requirements of DMS-6350 "Lime and Lime Slurry," and
DMS-6330, "Prequalification of Lime Sources." Use hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry,
quicklime, or carbide lime slurry as shown on the plans.
Article 260.3. Equipment, Section B. Slurry Equipment. The last sentence of the second
paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
Equip the distributor truck with a sampling device in accordance with Tex-600-J , Part I, when
using commercial lime slurry or carbide lime slurry.
Article 260.4. Construction, Section C. Application of Lime, Section 2. Slurry Placement.
The first paragraph is voided and replaced with the following:
Provide slurry free of objectionable materials, at or above the minimum dry solids content, and
with a uniform consistency that will allow ease of handling and uniform application. Deliver
commercial lime slurry or carbide lime slurry to the jobsite, or use hydrated lime or quicklime to
prepare lime slurry at the jobsite or other approved location, as specified. When dry quicklime is
applied as a slurry, use 80 percent of the amount shown on the plans.
Article 260.5. Measurement, Section A. Lime is supplemented by the following:
4. Carbide Lime Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) as calculated
from the minimum percent dry solids content of the slurry, multiplied by the weight of the slurry
in tons delivered.
Article 260.6. Payment. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as
provided under Measurement will be paid in accordance with Section 260.6.A, Lime, and
Section 260.6.B, Lime Treatment.

1-2 260---002
12-09
2-2 260---002
12-09

Article 260.6. Payment, Section A. Lime. The first sentence is voided and replaced by the
following:
A. Lime. Lime will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Lime" of one of the following types:
Hydrated Lime (Dry),
Hydrated Lime (Slurry),
Commercial Lime Slurry,
Quicklime (Dry),
Quicklime (Slurry), or
Carbide Lime Slurry.

Article 260.6. Payment, Section B. Lime Treatment is voided and replaced by the following:

B. Lime Treatment. Lime treatment will be paid for at the unit price bid for Lime Treatment
(Existing Material), Lime Treatment (New Base), or Lime Treatment (Mixing Existing
Material and New Base), for the depth specified. No payment will be made for thickness or
width exceeding that shown on the plans. This price is full compensation for shaping existing
material, loosening, mixing, pulverizing, spreading, applying lime, compacting, finishing, curing,
curing materials, blading, shaping and maintaining shape, replacing mixture, disposing of
loosened materials, processing, hauling, preparing secondary subgrade, water, equipment, labor,
tools, and incidentals.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
275---002
Cement Treatment (Road-Mixed)

For this project, Item 275, Cement Treatment (Road-Mixed), of the Standard Specifications, is
Article 275.4. Construction, Section E. Compaction. The first paragraph is voided and
replaced by the following:
Compact the mixture in one lift using density control unless otherwise shown on the plans.
Complete compaction within 2 hours after the application of water to the mixture of material and
cement.
Article 275.6 Payment. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
provided under Measurement will be paid in accordance with Section 275.5.A, Cement, and
Section 275.5.B, Cement Treatment.
Article 275.6 Payment, Section B. Cement Treatment is voided and replaced by the following:
B. Cement Treatment. Cement treatment will be paid for at the unit price bid for Cement
Treatment (Existing Material), Cement Treatment (New Base), or Cement Treatment
(Mixing Existing Material and New Base), for the depth specified. No payment will be made
for thickness or width exceeding that shown on the plans. This price is full compensation for
shaping existing material, loosening, mixing, pulverizing, spreading, applying cement,
compacting, finishing, curing, curing materials, blading, shaping and maintaining shape,
replacing mixture, disposing of loosened materials, processing, hauling, preparing secondary
subgrade, water, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals.
1-1 275---002
12-09
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
340---003
Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt (Method)

For this project, Item 340, Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt (Method), of the Standard
Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses
or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.
Article 340.2. Materials, Section A. Aggregate, Section 2. RAP is voided and replaced by the
following:
2. RAP. RAP is salvaged, milled, pulverized, broken, or crushed asphalt pavement. Crush or
break RAP so that 100% of the particles pass the 2-in. sieve.
Use of Contractor-owned RAP including HMA plant waste is permitted, unless otherwise
noted in the plans. Department-owned RAP stockpiles are available for the Contractors use
when the stockpile locations are shown on the plans. Department-owned RAP generated through
required work on the Contract is available for the Contractors use when shown on the plans.
Perform any necessary tests to ensure Contractor or Department-owned RAP is appropriate for
use. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the Department will not perform any tests or assume
any liability for the quality of the Department-owned RAP.
Fractionated RAP is defined as having 2 or more RAP stockpiles whereas the RAP is
divided into coarse and fine fractions. The coarse RAP stockpile will contain only material
retained by processing over a 3/8 in. screen or 1/2 in. screen unless otherwise approved. The fine
RAP stockpile will contain only material passing the 3/8 in. screen or 1/2 in. screen unless
otherwise approved. The Engineer may allow the Contractor to use an alternate to the 3/8 in.
screen or 1/2 in. screen to fractionate the RAP. The maximum percentages of fractionated RAP
may be comprised of coarse or fine fractionated RAP or the combination of both coarse and fine
fractionated RAP. Utilize a separate cold feed bin for each stockpile of fractionated RAP used.
Determine asphalt content and gradation of RAP stockpiles for mixture design purposes.
Perform other tests on RAP when shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use
no more than 10% unfractionated RAP in surface mixtures and no more than 20% unfractionated
RAP in non-surface mixtures that are placed within 8 in. of the final riding surface. Use no more
than 30% unfractionated RAP in non-surface mixtures that are placed 8 in. or more from the
final riding surface. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use no more than 20% fractionated
RAP in surface mixtures and no more than 30% fractionated RAP in non-surface mixtures that
are placed within 8 in. of the final riding surface. Use no more than 40% fractionated RAP in
non-surface mixtures that are placed 8 in. or more from the final riding surface. Surface
mixtures are defined as mixtures that will be the final lift or riding surface of the pavement
structure.Non-Surface mixtures are defined as mixtures that will be an intermediate or base
layer in the pavement structure. Do not use Department or Contractor owned RAP contaminated
with dirt or other objectionable materials. Do not use Department or Contractor owned RAP if
1-2 340---003
01-09
2-2 340---003
01-09
the decantation value exceeds 5% and the plasticity index is greater than 8. Test the stockpiled
RAP for decantation in accordance with the laboratory method given in Tex-406-A, Part I.
Determine the plasticity index using Tex-106-E if the decantation value exceeds 5%. The
decantation and plasticity index requirements do not apply to RAP samples with asphalt removed
by extraction.
Do not intermingle Contractor-owned RAP stockpiles with Department-owned RAP
stockpiles. Remove unused Contractor-owned RAP material from the project site upon
completion of the project. Return unused Department-owned RAP to the designated stockpile
location.

Article 340.2. Materials, Section A. Aggregate. is supplemented by the following:

4. Recycled Asphalt Shingles (RAS). The contractor may use post-manufactured RAS or post-
consumer RAS; however, the use of post-consumer RAS may be restricted when shown on
the plans. RAS are defined as processed asphalt shingle material from manufacturing of
asphalt roofing shingles or from re-roofing residential structures. Post-manufactured RAS
are processed manufacturers shingle scrap by-product. Post-consumer RAS, or tear-offs,
are processed shingle scrap removed from residential structures.

Process the RAS by ambient grinding or granulating such that 100% of the particles pass the
1/2 in. sieve when tested in accordance with Tex-200-F, Part I. Add sand meeting the
requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 to RAS stockpiles, if needed, to keep the processed
material workable. Use a maximum of 4% sand by weight of RAS. Perform a sieve analysis
on processed RAS material prior to extraction of the asphalt.

Determine asphalt content and gradation of the RAS material for mixture design purposes in
accordance with Tex-236-F. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use no more than 5%
processed RAS of the total mixture weight. When RAS is used, whether in conjunction with
RAP or not, calculate and ensure the ratio of the virgin binder to total binder is greater than
65% in surface mixtures and 60% in non-surface mixtures. Surface mixtures are defined as
mixtures that will be final lifts or riding surfaces of a pavement structure. Non-Surface
mixtures are defined as mixtures that will be intermediate or base layers in a pavement
structure. When RAS is used in conjunction with fractionated RAP, use no more than 20%
combined RAS and RAP for surface mixtures, and no more than 30% combined RAS and
RAP in non-surface mixtures, unless otherwise shown on the plans. When RAS is used in
conjunction with un-fractionated RAP, use no more than 10% combined RAS and RAP for
surface mixtures, and no more than 20% combined RAS and RAP in non-surface mixtures,
unless otherwise shown on the plans.

Certify compliance of the RAS with specification DMS-11000, Evaluating and Using
Nonhazardous Recyclable Materials Guidelines. If the RAS has not come into contact with
any hazardous materials, treat it as an established NRM. Do not use RAS if deleterious
materials as measured by Tex-217-F, Part I, are more than 1.5% of the stockpiled RAS.
1-1 360---003
01-06
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
360---003
Concrete Pavement

For this project, Item 360, Concrete Pavement, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 360.3. Equipment, Section E. Curing Equipment. The third sentence is voided and
Provide curing equipment that is independent of all other equipment when required to meet the
requirements of Article 360.4.I, Curing.
Article 360.4. Construction, Section H. Spreading and Finishing, Section 2. Maintenance of
Surface Moisture. The first and second sentences are voided and replaced by the following:
Prevent surface drying of the pavement before application of the curing system by means that
may include water fogging, the use of wind screens and the use of evaporation retardants.
Article 360. 4. Construction, Section I. Curing. The first sentence is voided and replaced by
the following:
Keep the concrete pavement surface from drying as described in Section 360.4.H.2,
Maintenance of Surface Moisture, until the curing material has been applied.
Article 360. 4. Construction, Section I. Curing, Section 1. Membrane Curing. The first
Spray the concrete surface uniformly with 2 coats of membrane curing compound at an
individual application rate of not more than 180 sq. ft. per gallon. Do not allow the concrete
surface to dry before applying the curing compound. Use a towel or absorptive fabric to remove
any standing pools of bleed water that may be present on the surface before applying the curing
compound. Apply the first coat within 10 min. after completing texturing operations. Apply the
second coat within 30 min. after completing texturing operations.

1-2 420---002
09-05

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
420---002
Concrete Structures

For this project, Item 420, Concrete Structures, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 420.4. Construction, Section I, Finish of Bridge Slabs. The tenth paragraph is
supplemented with the following:
For bridge approach slabs the carpet drag, burlap drag, or broom finish may be applied either
longitudinally or transversely.
Article 420.4. Construction, Section I, Finish of Bridge Slabs. The first sentence of the
fourteenth paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
Unless noted otherwise, saw-cut grooves in the hardened concrete of bridge slabs, bridge
approach slabs, and direct-traffic culverts to produce the final texturing after completion of the
required curing period.
Article 420.4. Construction, Section I, Finish of Bridge Slabs. The fourteenth paragraph is
amended by the following:
When saw-cut grooves are not required in the plans, provide either a carpet drag or broom finish
for micro-texture. In this case insure that an adequate and consistent micro-texture is achieved by
applying sufficient weight to the carpet and keeping the carpet or broom from getting plugged
with grout. For surfaces that do not have adequate texture, the Engineer may require corrective
action including diamond grinding or shot blasting.
Article 420.4. Construction, Section J. Curing Concrete. The first sentence of the fourth
For upper surfaces of bridge slabs, bridge approach slabs, median and sidewalk slabs, and culvert
top slabs constructed using Class S concrete, apply interim curing using a Type 1-D curing
compound before the water sheen disappears but no more than 45 minutes after application of
the evaporation retardant. Do not allow the concrete surface to dry before applying the interim
cure, and do not place the interim cure over standing water.

2-2 420---002
09-05
Article 420.6 Payment. The pay adjustment formula given in the sixth bullet of the fourth
A = Bp[-5.37(Sa/Ss)
2
+ 11.69(Sa/Ss) 5.32]
Where:
A = Amount to be paid
Sa = Actual strength from cylinders or cores
Ss = Specified design strength
Bp = Unit bid price

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
421---035
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
For this project, Item 421, Hydraulic Cement Concrete, of the Standard Specifications is
Article 421.2.D. Water, Table 1. Chemical Limits for Mix Water is voided and replaced by
the following:
Table 1
Chemical Limits for Mix Water
Contaminant Test Method Maximum Concentration (ppm)
Chloride (Cl)
Prestressed concrete
Bridge decks and superstructure
All other concrete
ASTM C 114
500
500
1,000
Sulfate (SO
4
) ASTM C 114 2,000
Alkalies (Na
2
O + 0.658K
2
O) ASTM C 114 600
Total Solids ASTM C 1603 50,000
Article 421.2.B. Supplementary Cementing Materials (SCM) is supplemented with the
following:
6. Modified Class F Fly Ash (MFFA). Furnish MFFA conforming to DMS-4610,
Fly Ash.
Article 421.2.D. Water, Table 2. Acceptance Criteria for Questionable Water Supplies is
voided and replaced by the following:
Table 2
Acceptance Criteria for Questionable Water Supplies
Property Test Method Limits
Compressive strength, min. %
control at 7 days
ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39
1,2
90
Time of set, deviation from
control, h:min.
ASTM C 403
1
From 1:00 early to 1:30 later
1. Base comparisons on fixed proportions and the same volume of test water compared to the control
mix using 100% potable water or distilled water.
2. Base comparisons on sets consisting of at least two standard specimens made from a composite
sample.
Article 421.2.E.1 Coarse Aggregate. The fourth paragraph is voided and replaced by the
following:
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide coarse aggregate with a 5-cycle magnesium sulfate
soundness when tested in accordance with Tex-411-A of not more than 25% when air
1-7 421---035
08-09
entrainment is waived and 18% when air entrainment is not waived. Crushed recycled hydraulic
cement concrete is not subject to the 5-cycle soundness test.
Article 421.2.E.2 Fine Aggregate. The fifth paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
Acid insoluble (%) = {(A1)(P1)+(A2)(P2)}/100
where:
A1 = acid insoluble (%) of aggregate 1
A2 = acid insoluble (%) of aggregate 2
P1 = percent by weight of aggregate 1 of the fine aggregate blend
P2 = percent by weight of aggregate 2 of the fine aggregate blend
Article 421.2.E.2. Fine Aggregate. The final paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
For all classes of concrete, provide fine aggregate with a fineness modulus between 2.3 and 3.1
as determined by Tex-402-A.
Article 421.2.E. Aggregate is supplemented by the following:
4. Intermediate Aggregate. When necessary to complete the concrete mix design, provide
intermediate aggregate consisting of clean, hard, durable particles of natural or
lightweight aggregate or a combination thereof. Provide intermediate aggregate free from
frozen material and from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other
objectionable material, and containing no more than 0.5% clay lumps by weight in
accordance with Tex-413-A.
If more than 30% of the intermediate aggregate is retained on the No. 4 sieve, the
retained portion must meet the following requirements:
must not exceed a wear of 40% when tested in accordance with Tex-410-A.
must have a 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness when tested in accordance with
Tex-411-A of not more than 25% when air entrainment is waived and 18% when air
entrainment is not waived.
If more than 30% of the intermediate aggregate passes the 3/8 sieve, the portion passing
the 3/8 sieve must not show a color darker than standard when subjected to the color test
for organic impurities in accordance with Tex-408-A and must have an acid insoluble
residue, unless otherwise shown on the plans, for concrete subject to direct traffic equal
to or greater than the value calculated with the following equation:

AIia 60 - (AIfa)(Pfa)
( Pia)
where:
AIfa = acid insoluble (%) of fine aggregate or fine aggregate blend
Pfa = percent by weight of the fine aggregate or fine aggregate blend as a
percentage of the total weight of the aggregate passing the 3/8 sieve in the
concrete mix design
Pia = percent by weight of the intermediate aggregate as a percentage of the total
weight of the aggregate passing the 3/8 sieve in the concrete mix design

2-7 421---035
08-09
Article 421.2.F. Mortar and Grout is supplemented by the following:
Section 421.4.A.6, Mix Design Options, does not apply for mortar and grout.
Article 421.3.A. Concrete Plants and Mixing Equipment is supplemented by the following:
When allowed by the plans or the Engineer, for concrete classes not identified as structural
concrete in Table 5 or for Class C concrete not used for bridge-class structures, the Engineer may
inspect and approve all plants and trucks in lieu of the NRMCA or non-Department engineer
sealed certifications. The criteria and frequency of Engineer approval of plants and trucks is the
same used for NRMCA certification.
Article 421.3.A.2. Volumetric Mixers is supplemented by the following:
Unless allowed by the plans or the Engineer, volumetric mixers may not supply classes of
concrete identified as structural concrete in Table 5.
Article 421.4.A Classification and Mix Design. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by
the following:
Unless a design method is indicated on the plans, furnish mix designs using ACI 211, Standard
Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete, Tex-470-A, or
other approved procedures for the classes of concrete required in accordance with Table 5.
Perform mix design and cement replacement using the design by weight method unless
otherwise approved. Do not exceed the maximum water-to-cementitious-material ratio.
Article 421.4.A. Classification and Mix Design, Table 5 Concrete Classes is voided and
Table 5
Concrete Classes
Class of
Concrete
Design
Strength,
Min.
28-day f
c

(psi)
Maximum

W/C Ratio
1

Coarse
Aggregate
Grades
2,3

General Usage
4
A 3,000 0.60 14, 8
Inlets, manholes, curb, gutter, curb & gutter,
conc. retards, sidewalks, driveways, backup
walls, anchors
B 2,000 0.60 27 Riprap, small roadside signs, and anchors
C
5
3,600 0.45 16
Drilled shafts, bridge substructure, bridge
railing, culverts except top slab of direct traffic
culverts, headwalls, wing walls, approach
slabs, concrete traffic barrier (cast-in-place)
C(HPC)
5
3,600 0.45 1-6 As shown on the plans
D 1,500 0.60 27 Riprap
E 3,000 0.50 25 Seal concrete
F
5
Note 6 0.45 25
Railroad structures; occasionally for bridge
piers, columns, or bents
F(HPC)
5
Note 6 0.45 25 As shown on the plans
H
5
Note 6 0.45 36
Prestressed concrete beams, boxes, piling, and
concrete traffic barrier (precast)
H(HPC)
5
Note 6 0.45 36 As shown on the plans
S
5
4,000 0.45 25 Bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts
3-7 421---035
08-09
Class of
Concrete
Design
Strength,
Min.
28-day f
c

(psi)
Maximum

W/C Ratio
1

Coarse
Aggregate
Grades
2,3

General Usage
4
S(HPC)
5
4,000 0.45 25 As shown on the plans
P See Item 360 0.45 23 Concrete pavement
DC
5
5,500 0.40 6 Dense conc. overlay
CO
5
4,600 0.40 6 Conc. overlay
LMC
5
4,000 0.40 68 Latex-modified concrete overlay
SS
5
3,600
7
0.45 46
Slurry displacement shafts, underwater drilled
shafts
K
5
Note 6 0.45 Note 6 Note 6
HES Note 6 0.45 Note 6 Note 6
1. Maximum water-cement or water-cementitious ratio by weight.
2. Unless otherwise permitted, do not use Grade 1 coarse aggregate except in massive foundations with
4-in. minimum clear spacing between reinforcing steel bars. Do not use Grade 1 aggregate in drilled
shafts.
3. Unless otherwise approved, use Grade 8 aggregate in extruded curbs.
4. For information only.
5. Structural concrete classes.
6. As shown on the plans or specified.
7. Use a minimum cementitious material content of 650 lb/cy of concrete. Do not apply Table 6 over
design requirements to Class SS concrete.
Article 421.4.A. Classification and Mix Design, Table 6 Over Design to Meet Compressive
Strength Requirements. Footnote 3 is supplemented by the following:
For Class K and concrete classes not identified as structural concrete in Table 5 or for Class C
concrete not used for bridge-class structures, the Engineer may designate on the plans an
alternative over-design requirement up to and including 1,000 psi for specified strengths less
than 3,000 psi and up to and including 1,200 psi for specified strengths from 3,000 to 5,000 psi.
Article 421.4.A.1. Cementitious Materials is supplemented by the following:
The upper limit of 35% replacement of cement with Class F fly ash specified by mix design
Options 1 and 3 may be increased to a maximum of 45% for mass placements, high performance
concrete, and precast members when approved.
Article 421.4.A.3. Chemical Admixtures is supplemented by the following:
When a corrosion-inhibiting admixture is required, use a 30% calcium nitrite solution. The
corrosion-inhibiting admixture must be set neutral unless otherwise approved. Dose the
admixture at the rate of gallons of admixture per cubic yard of concrete shown on the plans.
Article 421.4.A.4 Air Entrainment is voided and replaced by the following:
Air entrain all concrete except for Class B and concrete used in drilled shafts unless otherwise
shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, target an entrained air content of 4.0%
for concrete pavement and 5.5% for all other concrete requiring air entrainment. To meet the air-
entraining requirements, use an approved air-entraining admixture. Unless otherwise shown on
the plans, acceptance of concrete loads will be based on a tolerance of 1.5% from the target air
content. If the air content is more than 1.5 but less than 3.0% above the target air, the concrete
4-7 421---035
08-09
may be accepted based on strength tests. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi, a
reduction of 1% is permitted.
Article 421.4.A Table 7 Air Entrainment is voided.
Article 421.4.A.6. Mix Design Options. The first and second paragraphs are voided and
For structural concrete identified in Table 5 and any other class of concrete designed using more
than 520 lb. of cementitious material per cu. yd., use one of the mix design Options 18 shown
below, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
For concrete classes not identified as structural concrete in Table 5 and designed using less than
520 lb. of cementitious material per cu. yd., use one of the mix design Options 18 shown below,
except that Class C fly ash may be used instead of Class F fly ash for Options 1, 3, and 4 unless
sulfate-resistant concrete is shown on the plans.
Do not use mix design Options 6 or 7 when High Performance Concrete (HPC) is required.
Option 8 may be used when HPC is required provided: a minimum of 20% of the cement is
replaced with a Class C fly ash; Tex-440-A, Initial Time of Set of Fresh Concrete is performed
during mix design verification; the additional requirements for permeability are met; and the
concrete is not required to be sulfate-resistant.
Article 421.4.A.6.b. Option 2 is voided and replaced by the following:
b. Option 2. Replace 35 to 50% of the cement with GGBFS or MFFA.
Article 421.4.A.6.c. Option 3 is voided and replaced by the following:
c. Option 3. Replace 35 to 50% of the cement with a combination of Class F fly ash, GGBFS,
MFFA, UFFA, metakaolin, or silica fume; however, no more than 35% may be fly ash, and no
more than 10% may be silica fume.
Article 421.4.A.6.f. Option 6 is voided and replaced by the following:

f. Option 6. Use lithium nitrate admixture at a minimum dosage determined by testing conducted
in accordance with Tex-471-A, Lithium Dosage Determination Using Accelerated Mortar Bar
Testing. Before use of the mix, provide an annual certified test report signed and sealed by a
licensed professional engineer, from a laboratory on the Departments List of Approved Lithium
Testing Laboratories, certified by the Construction Division as being capable of testing
according to Tex-471-A, Lithium Dosage Determination Using Accelerated Mortar Bar
Testing.
Article 421.4.A.6.g. Option 7 is voided and replaced by the following:
g. Option 7. When using hydraulic cement only, ensure that the total alkali contribution from the
cement in the concrete does not exceed 3.5 lb. per cubic yard of concrete when calculated as
follows:

lb. alkali per cu. yd. = (lb. cement per cu. yd.) (% Na2 equivalent in cement)
100
5-7 421---035
08-09
In the above calculation, use the maximum cement alkali content reported on the cement mill
certificate.
Do not use Option 7 when any of the aggregates in the concrete are listed on the Departments
List of Aggregate Sources Excluded from Option 7 ASR Mitigation.
Article 421.4.A.6.h. Option 8 is voided and replaced by the following:
h. Option 8. For any deviations from Options 15, perform annual testing on coarse,
intermediate, and fine aggregate separately in accordance with ASTM C 1567. Before use of the
mix, provide a certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, from a
laboratory on the Departments List of Approved ASTM C 1260 Laboratories, demonstrating
that the ASTM C 1567 test result for each aggregate does not exceed 0.08% expansion at
14 days.
Do not use Option 8 when any of the aggregates in the concrete are listed on the Departments
List of Aggregate Sources Excluded from Option 8 ASR Mitigation. When HPC is required,
provide a certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer
demonstrating that AASHTO T 277 test results indicate the permeability of the concrete is less
than 1,500 coulombs tested immediately after either of the following curing schedules:
Moist cure specimens 56 days at 73F.
Moist cure specimens 7 days at 73F followed by 21 days at 100F.
Article 421.4.B. Trial Batches is supplemented by the following:
Once a trial batch substantiates the mix design, the proportions and mixing methods used in the
trial batch become the mix design of record.
Article 421.4.B. Trial Batches. The fourth sentence of the second paragraph is voided and
Test at least one set of design strength specimens, consisting of two specimens per set, at 7-day,
28-day, and at least one additional age.
Article 421.4.D. Measurement of Materials, Table 9 is voided and replaced by the following:
Table 9
Measurement Tolerances Non-Volumetric Mixers
Material Tolerance (%)
Cement, wt. -1 to +3
SCM wt. -1 to +3
Cement + SCM (cumulative weighing), wt. -1 to +3
Water, wt. or volume 3
Fine aggregate, wt. 2
Coarse aggregate, wt. 2
Fine + coarse aggregate (cumulative weighing), wt. 1
Chemical admixtures, wt. or volume 3

6-7 421---035
08-09
7-7 421---035
08-09
Article 421.4.E. Mixing and Delivering Concrete. The first paragraph is supplemented with the
following:
Do not top-load new concrete onto returned concrete.
Article 421.4.E.3. Truck-Mixed Concrete. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the
following:
Mix the concrete in a truck mixer from 70 to 100 revolutions at the mixing speed designated by
the manufacturer to produce a uniform concrete mix. Deliver the concrete to the project in a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and discharge the concrete with a satisfactory degree of
uniformity. Additional mixing at the job site at the mixing speed designated by the manufacturer
is allowed as long as the requirements of Section 421.4.A.5, Slump and Section 421.4.E,
Mixing and Delivering Concrete are met.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
440---002
Reinforcing Steel

For this project, Item 440, Reinforcing Steel, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby

Article 440.2. Materials, Section G. Mechanical Couplers is voided and replaced by the
following:

When mechanical splices in reinforcing steel bars are shown on the plans, use couplers of the
type specified in DMS-4510, Mechanical Couplers, under the section General Requirements.

Furnish only couplers that have been produced by a manufacturer that has been prequalified in
accordance with DMS-4510. Do not use sleeve-wedge type couplers on coated reinforcing.
Sample and test couplers for use on individual projects in accordance with DMS-4510. Furnish
couplers only at locations shown on the plans.

Article 440.3. Construction, Section D. Splices. The fifth bullet is voided and replaced by the
following:

For box culvert extensions with less than 1 ft. of fill, lap the existing longitudinal bars
with the new bars as shown in Table 5. For extensions with more than 1 ft. of fill, lap at
least 1 ft. 0 in.

1-1 440---002
06-09
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
442 ---016
Metal for Structures

For this project, Item 442, Metal for Structures, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of

Article 442.2, Materials, Section A, Structural Steel, Section 1, Bridge
Structures. The third sentence is voided and not replaced.

Article 442.5, Payment, is voided and replaced by the following:

442.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for
Structural Steel of the type (Rolled Beam, Plate Girder, Tub Girder, Box Girder, Railroad
Through-Girder, Railroad Deck-Girder, Miscellaneous Bridge, Miscellaneous Non-Bridge)
specified. This price is full compensation for materials, fabrication, transportation, erection,
paint, painting, galvanizing, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals.

1-1 442 ---016
02-10
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
448---002
Structural Field Welding

For this project, Item 448, Structural Field Welding, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 448.3 Equipment is voided and replaced by the following:
Provide electrode drying and storing ovens that can maintain the required temperatures specified
in Section 448.4.C.1, Electrode Condition. Each oven must have a door that is sealed and can
be latched. Each oven must have a small port that may be opened briefly to insert a thermometer
or the oven must be equipped with a thermometer that allows for direct reading of temperature
inside the oven without opening the oven. Provide equipment able to preheat and maintain the
temperature of the base metal as required and as shown on the plans. Provide approved
equipment, temperature indicator sticks, infrared thermometer, etc., for checking preheat and
interpass temperatures at all times while welding is in progress. Provide welding equipment
meeting the requirements of the approved welding procedure specifications (WPS), if required,
and capable of making consistent high-quality welds.
Article 448.4.B.2.Certified Steel Structures Welder. The second bulleted item is voided and
Use metal for test plates that meets Item 442, Metal for Structures, with a minimum
yield point of 36 ksi. The minimum width of test plate must be sufficient to accommodate
the radiograph inspection of 6 continuous inches of the weld, not counting the ends of the
weld.
Article 448.4.C.5. Welding Practice. The second paragraph is voided and replaced by the
following:
Use the stringer-bead technique where possible for groove welds. In vertical welding passes,
progress upward using a back-step sequence keeping the end of the low-hydrogen electrode
contained within the molten metal and shield of flux, unless the electrode manufacturers
specifications indicate otherwise
Article 448.4.C.7. Radiographic Inspection is supplemented by the following:
Meet the requirements specified in Section 441.3.B.5.a, Radiographic Testing for radiograph
film quality.
1-1 448---002
06-09
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
450---001
Railing

For this project, Item 450, Railing, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended with
respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived
or changed hereby.
Article 450.2. Materials is supplemented with the following:
Where epoxy anchors are allowed or required, provide an approved Type III, Class C epoxy in
accordance with DMS-6100, Epoxies and Adhesives, for installing drilled and epoxied rail
anchorage reinforcement or rail anchor bolts. Use other materials if shown in the plans. Provide
only dual cartridge epoxy systems mixed with a static mixing nozzle supplied by the epoxy
adhesive manufacturer and dispensed with a tool supplied by the epoxy adhesive manufacturer.
Do not use bulk epoxies. Drill and install anchorage reinforcement or anchor bolts to the
embedment depth shown in the plans or the depth recommended by the manufacturer, whichever
is deeper. No additional payment will be made for providing embedment deeper than shown in
the plans. If no resistance or embedment depth is specified in the plans, select an embedment
depth capable of developing the yield strength of the steel anchor.
Article 450.3. Construction, Section B. Concrete Railing. The last paragraph is voided and

Obtain approval to slipform railing. Slipforming equipment must be approved. Do not slipform
railing with cast-in-place anchor bolts unless noted otherwise. Provide additional reinforcing, at
Contractors expense, as needed to prevent movement of the reinforcement cage. Clear cover and
epoxy coating requirements for additional reinforcement are the same as shown for the rail
reinforcement. The rail reinforcing cage may be tack welded to the rail anchorage reinforcement
provided the rail and anchorage reinforcement are not epoxy coated and weld locations measured
along the rail are no closer than 3 ft. If epoxy coated reinforcement is required for the railing
proposed to be slipformed, tie all bar intersections. Provide a wire line to maintain vertical and
horizontal alignment of the slipform machine. Attach a grade line gauge or pointer to the
machine so a continuous comparison can be made between the rail being placed and the
established grade line. Rails or supports at the required grade are allowed instead of sensor
controls. Prior to placing concrete, make one or more passes with the slipform over the rail
segment to ensure proper operation and maintenance of grades and clearances. Provide
slipformed rail within a vertical and horizontal alignment tolerance of +/- in. in 10 ft.
Construct rail with a smooth and uniform appearance. Consolidate concrete so it is free of
honeycomb. Provide concrete with a consistency that will maintain the shape of the rail without
support. Minimize starting and stopping of the slipform operation by ensuring a continuous
supply of concrete.
1-2 450---001
07-09
2-2 450---001
07-09
Do not exceed the manufacturers recommended speed for the slipform machine. If slipforming
causes movement of the reinforcement such that plan clearances are not achieved, stop
slipforming and take remedial action. Remove and replace unsatisfactory slipformed rail at the
Contractors expense.

Install epoxy adhesive anchorages in accordance with the manufacturers instructions including
hole size, drilling equipment and method, hole cleaning equipment and method, mixing and
dispensing epoxy, and anchor insertion. Do not alter the manufacturers mixing nozzle or
dispenser. Anchorage bars or bolts must be clean and free of grease, oil, or any other foreign
material. Do not weld to an anchor bar or anchor bolt that is anchored with epoxy adhesive. Do
not expose rail to traffic until epoxy adhesive has cured.
Article 450.3. Construction, Section C. Tests is supplemented with the following:

The Engineer will select three anchor bars or bolts of the first days production to be tested after
the epoxy has cured. Test the bars or bolts in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with
ASTM E 1512, using a restrained test, to evaluate the epoxy adhesives bond strength. Verify
that the anchor bars or bolts develop the required pullout resistance in the plans or 75 percent of
the yield strength of the bars or bolts, whichever is less, without a bond failure of the epoxy. The
Engineer may require additional tests during production. If any of the tests do not meet the
required test load, perform corrective measures to provide adequate capacity. Repair damage
from testing.

Article 450.5. Payment is voided and replaced with the following:

provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for Railing of the type
specified. This price will be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, and placing concrete,
expansion joint material, reinforcing steel, structural steel, aluminum, cast steel, pipe, anchor
bolts or bars, testing of epoxy anchors, and all other materials required in the finished railing;
removal and disposal of salvageable materials; and hardware, paint and painting of metal railing,
galvanizing, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals.

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
464---003
Reinforced Concrete Pipe

For this project, Item 464, Reinforced Concrete Pipe, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 464.2. Materials, Section A. Fabrication is voided and replaced by the following:
Fabrication plants must be approved by the Construction Division in accordance with DMS-
7310, Reinforced Concrete Pipe Fabrication and Plant Qualification before furnishing precast
reinforced concrete pipe for Department projects. The Construction Division maintains a list of
approved reinforced concrete pipe plants.
Furnish material and fabricate reinforced concrete pipe in accordance with DMS-7310,
Reinforced Concrete Pipe Fabrication and Plant Qualification.
Article 464.2. Materials, Section B. Design. 1. General. Table 2 is voided and replaced with
the following:
Table 2
Arch Pipe
Design Size Equivalent
Diameter (in.)
Rise
(in.)
Span
(in.)
1 18 13-1/2 22
2 21 15-1/2 26
3 24 18 28-1/2
4 30 22-1/2 36-1/4
5 36 26-5/8 43-3/4
6 42 31-5/16 51-1/8
7 48 36 58-1/2
8 54 40 65
9 60 45 73
10 72 54 88

Article 464.2. Materials, Section C. Physical Test Requirements is voided and not replaced.

1-2 464---003
07-09
2-2 464---003
07-09
Article 464.2. Materials, Section D. Markings. The first paragraph is voided and replaced with
the following:
Furnish each section of reinforced concrete pipe marked with the following information specified
in DMS-7310, Reinforced Concrete Pipe Fabrication and Plant Qualification:
class or D-Load of pipe,
ASTM designation,
date of manufacturer,
name or trademark of manufacturer and plant location,
designated manufacturers approval marking,
pipe to be used for jacking and boring (when applicable), and
pipe meeting sulfate-resistant concrete plan requirements (when applicable).
Article 464.2. Materials, Section E. Inspection is voided and replaced with the following:
Provide access for inspection of the finished pipe at the project site before and during
installation.
Article 464.2. Materials, Section F. Causes for Rejection is voided and replaced by the
following:
Individual sections of pipe may be rejected for any of the conditions stated in the annex of
DMS-7310, Reinforced Concrete Pipe Fabrication and Plant Qualification.
Article 464.2. Materials, Section G. Repairs is voided and replaced by the following:
Make repairs if necessary as stated in the annex of DMS-7310, Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Fabrication and Plant Qualification.
Article 464.2. Materials, Section H. Rejections is voided and not replaced.

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
465---001
Manholes and Inlets

For this project, Item 465, Manholes and Inlets, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 465.2, Materials. The second paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
Precast manholes, inlets, risers, and appurtenances are acceptable unless otherwise shown.
Alternate designs for precast items must be acceptable to the Engineer and must conform to
functional dimensions and dimensions for plan wall, slab and edge beam thicknesses, and
reinforcing steel areas. Alternate designs must be designed and sealed by a licensed professional
engineer.

1-1 465---001
04-06
1-1 500-005
03-08
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
500---005
Mobilization

For this project, Item 500, Mobilization, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended
Article 500.1. Description is supplemented by the following:
Work for this Item includes submissions required by the Contract.
Article 500.3. Payment, Section A is voided and replaced by the following:
A. Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment, performance, or
retainage bonds, and required insurance. The combined payment for bonds and insurance will be
no more than 10% of the mobilization lump sum or 1% of the total Contract amount, whichever
is less.
Article 500.3. Payment, Section F is voided and replaced by the following:

F. Upon final acceptance, 97% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous
payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.
Article 500.3. Payment is supplemented by the following:
G. Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for Mobilization will be made after all
submittals are received, final quantities have been determined and when any separate vegetative
establishment and maintenance, test and performance periods provided for in the Contract have
been successfully completed.
1-1 502---033
10-07
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
502---033
Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling

For this project, Item 502, Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling, of the Standard
Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses
or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.
Article 502.4. Payment, Section C. Maximum Total Payment Prior to Acceptance is voided
and replaced by the following:
C. Maximum Total Payment Prior to Acceptance. The total payment for this Item will not
exceed 10% of the total Contract amount before final acceptance in accordance with Article 5.8,
Final Acceptance. The remaining balance will be paid in accordance with Section 502.4.E,
Balance Due.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
540---015
Metal Beam Guard Fence

For this project, Item 540, Metal Beam Guard Fence, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 540.2. Materials, Section A. Metal Beam Rail Elements. The third paragraph is
Furnish metal beam rail elements from a manufacturer on the Departments approved Material
Producer List, entitled Metal Beam Guard Fence Rail Element Manufacturers.
Article 540.2. Materials, Section B. Posts, Section 2. Steel Posts is voided and replaced by the
following:
2. Steel Posts. Provide rolled sections conforming to the material requirements of ASTM A 36.
Drill or punch posts for standard rail attachment as shown on the plans. Galvanize in
accordance with Item 445, Galvanizing. Low fill culvert posts may be fabricated as
galvanized blanks with the hole to accept the rail and the final height field fabricated.
Treat all exposed post surfaces caused by the field fabrication in accordance with Section
445.3.D. Repairs.
Article 540.2. Materials, Section B. Posts is supplemented by the following:
3. Composite Posts. Meet the requirements of DMS-7210, Composite Material Posts and
Blocks for Metal Beam Guard Fence.
Article 540.2. Materials is supplemented by the following:
H. Terminal Anchor Posts. Furnish new terminal anchor posts from steel conforming to the
material requirements of ASTM A 36. Fabricate posts in accordance with Item 441,
Steel Structures. Galvanize terminal anchor posts after fabrication in accordance with
Item 445, Galvanizing.
540.5. Payment. The work performed and material furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for Metal
W-Beam Guard Fence of the post type specified, Metal Thrie-Beam Guard Fence of the post
type specified, Terminal Anchor Section, Metal Beam Guard Fence Transition of the type
specified, Metal W-Beam Guard Fence Adjustment, Metal Thrie-Beam Guard Fence
1-2 540---015
06-09
2-2 540---015
06-09
Adjustment, Terminal Anchor Section Adjustment, or Transition Adjustment. When
weathering steel is required, Type IV will be specified.
Article 540.5. Payment, Section C. Transition is voided and replaced by the following:
C. Transition. The price bid for Metal Beam Guard Fence Transition is full compensation for
furnishing nested sections of thrie-beam; nested sections of W-beam; thrie-beam-to-W-beam
transitional rail piece, posts, concrete, curb, and connections to W-beam guard fence and bridge
rails; thrie-beam terminal connectors and terminal connectors; excavation and backfilling; and
equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals.
1-1 620---001
09-04
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
620---001
Electrical Conductors

For this project, Item 620, Electrical Conductors, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 620.2 Materials. The fourth and fifth paragraphs are void and replaced by the
following:
Use white insulation for grounded (neutral) conductors, except that grounded conductors
AWG No. 4 and larger may be black with white tape marking at every accessible location. Do
not use white insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically
shown on the plans.
Ensure that insulated grounding conductors are green except that insulated grounding conductors
AWG No. 4 and larger may be black with green tape marking at every accessible location. Do
not use green insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically
shown on the plans.

2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
TO
6266--017
Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System

For this project, Special Specification Item 6266, Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System, is
Article 1. Description. The second paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
A VIVDS configuration for a single intersection will consist of variable focal length cameras,
VIVDS card rack processor system, and all associated equipment required to setup and operate
in a field environment including a video monitor and/or laptop (if required), connectors and
camera mounting hardware.
Article 6. Camera Assembly, Section B. Camera and Lens Assembly. Section 2 is voided
2. The enclosure must allow the camera to operate satisfactorily over an ambient temperature
range from -30F to +140F while exposed to precipitation as well as direct sunlight.

1-1 6266--017
07-09
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
628---001
Electrical Services

For this project, Item 628, Electrical Services, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 628.5. Payment, A. Installation is voided and replaced by the following:

A. Installation. Except as provided for in the following paragraph, this price is full
compensation for paying all fees, permits, and other costs; making arrangements with the utility
company for all work and materials provided by the utility company; furnishing, installing, and
connecting all components including poles, service supports, foundations, anchor bolts, riprap,
enclosures, switches, breakers, conduit (from the service equipment including the elbow below
ground), fittings, conductors (from the service equipment including the elbow below ground),
brackets, bolts, hangers, and hardware; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals.

Costs for utility-owned power line extensions, connection charges, and meter charges will be
paid for by the Department. The Department will reimburse the contractor only the amount
billed by the utility plus bond cost. No additional compensation will be paid for overhead,
superintendence, profit, administrative costs, or supervision of the utilitys work.
1-1 628---001
08-09
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
636---014
Aluminum Signs

For this project, Item 636, Aluminum Signs, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended
Article 636.1. Description is voided and replaced by the following:
Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect signs. Sign supports are provided for under other
Items.
Replacement. Replace existing signs on existing sign supports.
Refurbishing. Refurbish existing signs on existing sign supports.
Article 636.2. Materials, Section A. Sign Blanks is voided and replaced by the following:
A. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blank substrates in accordance with DMS-7110, Aluminum Sign
Blanks or DMS-8305, Fiberglass Sign Substrate, and in accordance with the types shown
on the plans. Use single-piece sheet-aluminum substrates for Type A (small) signs. Use
either extruded aluminum or fiberglass substrates for Type G (ground-mounted) or Type O
(overhead-mounted) signs as shown on the plans.

Article 636.2. Materials, Section B. Sign Face Reflectorization is supplemented by the
following:
Ensure that sign legend, symbols, borders, and background exhibit uniform color, appearance,
and retroreflectivity when viewed both day and night.
Article 636.2. Materials, Section C. Sign Messages. The last two bullets are voided and
Fabricate non-reflective black film legend from materials meeting DMS-8300.
Furnish direct-applied route markers and other attachments within the parent sign face,
unless otherwise specified in the plans.
Article 636.2. Materials, Section D. Hardware is supplemented by the following:
Furnish sign hardware for fiberglass signs in accordance with the fiberglass substrate
manufacturers recommendations.
Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 1. Sign Blanks. The first paragraph
is voided and replaced by the following:
1-3 636---014
10-08
Furnish sign blanks to the sizes and shapes shown on the plans and that are free of buckles,
warps, burrs, dents, cockles, or other defects. Do not splice individual extruded aluminum or
fiberglass panels.
Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 2. Sheeting Application is voided
2. Sheeting Application. Apply sheeting to sign blanks in conformance with the sheeting
manufacturers recommended procedures. Meet the fabrication requirements of DMS-8300,
Section 8300.7.F, Sign Fabrication for white, orientation non-compliant sheeting listed on
the Departments Material Producer List entitled Sign Face Materials. Clean and prepare the
outside surface of extruded aluminum or fiberglass flanges in the same manner as the sign
panel face.
Minimize the number of splices in the sheeting. Overlap the lap-splices by at least 1/4 in. Use
butt splices for Type C microprismatic, Type D, and Type E reflective sheeting. Provide a 1-ft.
minimum dimension for any piece of sheeting. Do not splice sheeting for signs fabricated with
transparent screen inks or colored transparent films.
Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 3. Sign Assembly. The first
3. Sign Assembly. Assemble extruded aluminum signs in accordance with the details shown on
the plans. Assemble fiberglass signs in accordance with the fiberglass manufacturers
recommendations located on the Departments Material Producer List entitled Fiberglass
Sign Substrates. Sign face surface variation must not exceed 1/8 in. per foot. Surface
misalignment between panels in multi-panel signs must not exceed 1/16 in. at any point.
Article 636.3. Construction, Section B. Storage and Handling. The last paragraph is voided
Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store finished
sheet-aluminum substrate signs in a weatherproof building. Extruded aluminum and fiberglass
substrate signs may be stored outside.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section E. Replacement is supplemented by the following:
Mounting hardware for fiberglass signs will be per the fiberglass substrate manufacturers
recommendations.

2-3 636---014
10-08
3-3 636---014
10-08
Article 636.3. Construction, Section H. Documentation is added.
H. Documentation. Provide a notarized original of the Signing Material Statement (Form 2273)
with the proper attachments for verification of compliance.
provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit price bid for Aluminum Signs,
Fiberglass Signs, Signs, Replacing Existing Aluminum Signs, Replacing Existing
Fiberglass Signs, Refurbishing Aluminum Signs, or Refurbishing Fiberglass Signs, of the
type specified.
Article 636.5. Payment, Section B. Replacement is voided and replaced by the following:
B. Replacement. This price is full compensation for: furnishing and installing new aluminum or
fiberglass signs and hardware; removal of existing signs; fabrication of sign panels; treatment
of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the
background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames,
wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws,
fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs;
preparing and cleaning the signs; salvaging and disposing of unsalvageable material; and
equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
643---001
Sign Identification Decals

For this project, Item 643, Sign Identification Decals, of the Standard Specifications, is
hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or
requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.
Article 643.2. Materials. Figure 1 and Table 1 are replaced by the following:

TxDOT
C Fabrication Date T 1
J F M A M J J A S O N D 2
200 201 202 203 204 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4
Sheeting MFR - Substrate
A B C D E F G H J K L M 5
Film/Ink MFR
Sheeting MFR - Legend
Installation Date
0 1 2 3 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9
J F M A M J J A S O N D 10
200 201 202 203 204 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
Figure 1
Decal Design (row numbers explained in Table 1).
1-2 643---001
03-09
2-2 643---001
03-09

Table 1
Decal Description
Row Explanation
1 Sign Fabricator
2 Month Fabricated
3 First 3 Digits of Year Fabricated
4 Last Digit of Year Fabricated
5 Manufacturer of the Sheeting Applied to the Substrate
6 Film (colored transparent or non-reflective black) or Screen Ink Manufacturer
7 Manufacturer of the Sheeting for the Legend
8 Tens digit of Date Installed
9 Ones Digit of Date Installed
10 Month Installed
11 First 3 Digits of Year Installed
12 Last Digit of Year Installed
Article 643.3. Construction, Section A. Sign Fabricator. Replace the first bullet with
the following:
C if fabricated by a commercial sign fabricator or T if fabricated by the
Department or the Texas Department of Criminal J ustice,
Article 643.3. Construction, Section A. Sign Fabricator. Replace the last bullet with
the following:
sheeting, film, and ink manufacturers (codes for these manufacturers are located
in the Departments approved Material Producer List, Sign Face Materials)

Article 643.3. Construction, Section B. Contractor. This section is voided and not
replaced.
2004 Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISION
672---034
Raised Pavement Markers

For this project, Item 672, Raised Pavement Markers, of the Standard Specifications, is hereby
Article 672.2. Materials, Section B. Adhesives is supplemented by the following:
The Contractor may propose alternate adhesive materials for consideration and approval by
the Engineer.
Article 672.3. Construction. The sixth paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:
Use the following adhesive materials for placement jiggle bar tile, reflectorized pavement
markers, and traffic buttons unless otherwise shown on the plans:
standard or flexible bituminous adhesive for applications on bituminous pavements.
epoxy adhesive or flexible bituminous adhesive for applications on hydraulic cement
concrete pavements.
Use epoxy adhesive for plowable reflectorized pavement markers.
Article 672.3. Construction is supplemented by the following:
Provide a 30-day performance period that begins the day following written acceptance for each
separate location. The date of written acceptance will be the last calendar day of each month for
the RPMs installed that month for the completed separate project locations. This written
acceptance does not constitute final acceptance.
Replace all missing, broken or non-reflective RPMs. Visual evaluations will be used for these
determinations. Upon request, the Engineer will allow a Contractor representative to accompany
the Engineer on these evaluations.
The Engineer may exclude RPMs from the replacement provisions of the performance, provided
the Engineer determines that the failure is a result of causes other than defective material or
inadequate installation procedures. Examples of outside causes are extreme wear at
intersections, damage by snow or ice removal, and pavement failure.
Replace all missing or non-reflective RPMs identified during the performance period within 30
days after notification. The end of the performance period does not relieve the Contractor from
the performance deficiencies requiring corrective action identified during the performance
period.
1-3 672---034
08-08
Article 672.5. Payment is supplemented by the following:
No additional payment will be made for replacement of RPMs failing to meet the performance
requirements.
2-3 672---034
08-08
RPMs INSTALLATION RECORD
The 30 day performance period begins the day after written acceptance for each separate
location. The date of written acceptance will be the last calendar day of each month for the
RPMs installed that month for the completed separate project locations.

COUNTY
HIGHWAY
CONTROL
PROJ ECT
LIMITS FROM
LIMITS TO
MONTH/YR
OF INSTALLATION

Contractor signature
Date
Department signature
Date

3-3 672---034
08-08
Product Specification - TriAx
TM
TX5 Geogrid

Tensar International Corporation reserves the right to change its product specifications at any time. It is the responsibility of the person specifying the use of this product and of
the purchaser to ensure that product specifications relied upon for design or procurement purposes are current and that the product is suitable for its intended use in each
instance.

General General General General
1. 1. 1. 1. The geogrid is integrally formed and produced from a punched sheet of
polypropylene which is then oriented in three substantially equilateral directions so
that the resulting ribs shall have a high degree of molecular orientation, which
continues at least in part through the mass of the integral node.
2. 2. 2. 2. The resulting geogrid structure shall have apertures that are triangular in shape, and
have ribs with depth-to-width ratios greater than 1.0.
3. 3. 3. 3. The geogrid shall have the typical characteristics shown in the table below:

Geometrical P Geometrical P Geometrical P Geometrical Properties roperties roperties roperties Longitudinal Longitudinal Longitudinal Longitudinal Diagonal Diagonal Diagonal Diagonal Transverse Transverse Transverse Transverse General General General General
Rib pitch
(1)
, mm (in)
Mid-rib depth
(1)
, mm (in)
Mid-rib width
(1)
, mm (in)
Rib shape
Aperture shape

40 (1.60)
-
-
40 (1.60)
1.4 (0.06)
1.0 (0.04)
-
1.2 (0.05)
1.1 (0.04)

rectangular
triangular
Durability Durability Durability Durability
Resistance to chemical degradation
(2)

Resistance to ultra-violet light and weathering
(3)

100%
100%

Dimensions and Delivery Dimensions and Delivery Dimensions and Delivery Dimensions and Delivery
The TX geogrid shall be delivered to the jobsite in roll form with each roll individually identified and nominally measuring 4.0 meters (13.1feet) in
width and 75 meters (246 feet) in length.
Notes Notes Notes Notes
1. 1. 1. 1. Nominal dimensions.
2. 2. 2. 2. Resistance to loss of load capacity or structural integrity when subjected to chemically aggressive environments in accordance with EPA 9090
immersion testing.
3. 3. 3. 3. Resistance to loss of load capacity or structural integrity when subjected to 500 hours of ultraviolet light and aggressive weathering in accordance
with ASTM D4355-05.

Tensar TriAx Tensar TriAx Tensar TriAx Tensar TriAx
TM TM TM TM
Geogrid Geogrid Geogrid Geogrid
Tensar International Tensar International Tensar International Tensar International Corporation Corporation Corporation Corporation
5883 Glenridge Drive, Suite 200 5883 Glenridge Drive, Suite 200 5883 Glenridge Drive, Suite 200 5883 Glenridge Drive, Suite 200
Atlanta, Georgia 3032 Atlanta, Georgia 3032 Atlanta, Georgia 3032 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 88 8- -- -5363 5363 5363 5363
Phone Phone Phone Phone: :: : 800 800 800 800- -- -TENSAR TENSAR TENSAR TENSAR- -- -1 11 1
www.tensar www.tensar www.tensar www.tensar- -- -international.com international.com international.com international.com

This specification supersedes any and all prior specifications for the product designated above and is not applicable to any
product shipped prior to October 23, 2009.Tensar and TriAx are trademarks of Tensar International Corporation or its
affiliates in the US and many other countries. TriAx
TM

geogrid and the use thereof are protected by U.S. Patent No.
7,001,112. Patents or patent applications also exist in other countries. Final determination of the suitability of the above-
mentioned information or product for the use contemplated, and its manner of use are the sole responsibility of the user.
Tensar International Corporation disclaims any and all express, implied or statutory warranties, including but not limited to,
any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose regarding this product or the Companys other products,
technologies or services. The information contained herein does not constitute engineering advice.

388-82679 City of New Braunfels
Reconstruction of Walnut Avenue -
CONCRETE
03002 - 1
2008/10/16
SECTION 03002
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete and grout.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology.
b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete.
c. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
d. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
e. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.
f. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
g. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.
h. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
i. 347R, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
d. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
e. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
f. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
g. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
h. C138, Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete.
i. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
j. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
k. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement,
Mortar, and Concrete.
l. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
m. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method.
n. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
o. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
p. C289, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method).
q. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
r. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
CONCRETE
03002 - 2
s. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete.
t. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having
Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.
u. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
v. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion J oint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type).
w. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded
Rubber.
x. D1709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-
Falling Dart Method.
y. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion J oint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
z. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
aa. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or
Testing.
bb. E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
3. Corps of Engineers (COE):
a. CRD-C621, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink).
B. Quality Control:
1. Concrete testing agency:
a. Contractor to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory to:
1) Perform materials evaluation.
2) Design concrete mixes.
b. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E329.
2. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has been approved by
Engineer.
a. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of his
responsibility to provide concrete that meets the requirements of this Specification.
3. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength
test results or other circumstances warrant.
a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer.
4. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the structure in
combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely
support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon.
C. Qualifications:
1. Ready mixed concrete batch plant certified by National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
(NRMCA).
2. Formwork, shoring and reshoring for slabs and beams except where cast on ground to be
designed by a professional engineer currently registered in the state where the Project is
located.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Per ACI 116R except as modified herein:
1. Concrete fill: Non-structural concrete.
2. Concrete Testing Agency: Testing agency employed to perform materials evaluation,
design of concrete mixes or testing of concrete placed during construction.
3. Exposed concrete: Exposed to view after construction is complete.
4. Indicated: Indicated by Contract Documents.
5. Lean concrete: Concrete with low cement content.
6. Nonexposed concrete: Not exposed to view after construction is complete.
7. Required: Required by Contract Documents.
CONCRETE
03002 - 3
8. Specified strength: Specified compressive strength at 28 days.
9. Submitted: Submitted to Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Concrete mix designs proposed for use.
a. Concrete mix design submittal to include the following information:
1) Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates.
2) Test for aggregate organic impurities.
3) Test for deleterious aggregate per ASTM C289.
4) Proportioning of all materials.
5) Type of cement with mill certificate for cement.
6) Type of fly ash with certificate of conformance to specification requirements.
7) Slump.
8) Air content.
9) Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture proposed for use.
10) 28-day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 318 and as
indicated herein.
11) Shrinkage test results.
12) Standard deviation value for concrete production facility.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Manufacturers and types:
1) J oint fillers.
2) Curing agents.
3) Bonding and patching mortar.
4) Construction joint bonding adhesive.
5) Non-shrink grout with cure/seal compound.
3. Reinforcing steel:
a. Show grade, sizes, number, configuration, spacing, location and all fabrication and
placement details.
b. In sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without having to make
reference to Contract Drawings.
c. Obtain approval of Shop Drawings by Engineer before fabrication.
d. Mill certificates.
4. Strength test results of in place concrete including slump, air content and concrete
temperature.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of Material:
1. Cement and fly ash:
a. Store in moistureproof, weathertight enclosures.
b. Do not use if caked or lumpy.
2. Aggregate:
a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or foreign materials.
b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching.
c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
d. Do not use bottom 6 IN of stockpiles in contact with ground.
e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use.
3. Admixtures:
a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage.
b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer.
c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use.
4. Reinforcing steel: Support and store all rebars above ground.
CONCRETE
03002 - 4
B. Delivery:
1. Concrete:
a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load for ready-mixed concrete.
b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Owner's Representative at the time of delivery.
c. Ticket to show:
1) Mix identification mark.
2) Quantity delivered.
3) Amount of each material in batch.
4) Outdoor temp in the shade.
5) Time at which cement was added.
6) Numerical sequence of the delivery.
7) Amount of water added.
2. Reinforcing steel:
a. Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers.
b. Mark numbers to match Shop Drawing mark number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout:
a. Sika "SikaGrout 212."
b. Euclid Chemial "NS Grout."
c. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Masterflow 713."
2. Epoxy grout:
a. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Brutem MPG."
b. Euclid Chemical Company, "E3-G."
c. Fosroc, "Conbextra EPHF".
3. Expansion joint fillers:
a. Permaglaze Co.
b. Rubatex Corp.
c. Williams Products, Inc.
4. Form coating:
a. Richmond "Rich Cote."
b. Industrial Lubricants "Nox-Crete Form Coating."
c. Euclid Chemical "Eucoslip VOX."
5. Chemical sealer:
a. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
b. Euclid Chemical Company.
c. Dayton Superior.
6. Bonding agent:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.
b. BASF Admixtures, Inc.
c. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150 Type I and Type II.
B. Fly Ash:
1. ASTM C618, Class F or Class C.
2. Nonstaining.
a. Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform light gray color.
3. Maximum loss on ignition: 4 percent.
CONCRETE
03002 - 5
4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients.
5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the State Highway Department in the
state where the Project is located for use in concrete for bridges.
C. Admixtures:
1. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.
2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures:
a. ASTM C494 Type A through E.
b. Conform to provisions of ACI 212.3R.
c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved in writing
by Engineer and at no cost to Owner.
d. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
e. Use chloride free admixtures only.
3. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of
concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures by weight
percent of cement:
a. 0.10 all concrete.
4. Do not use calcium chloride.
5. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618.
6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in establishing required
concrete proportions in the mix design.
D. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter.
E. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33, except as modified below.
2. Fine aggregate:
a. Clean natural sand.
b. No manufactured or artificial sand.
3. Coarse aggregate:
a. Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert granular material.
b. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent.
c. See landscape detail drawings and specifications for exposed aggregate requirements.
4. Gradation of coarse aggregate:
a. All concrete: Size #57 or #67.
F. Concrete Grout:
1. Nonshrink nonmetallic grout:
a. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed with only water to be added.
b. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion.
c. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation.
d. Minimum compressive strength of nonshrink grout at 28 days: 6500 psi.
e. In accordance with COE CRD-C621.
2. Epoxy grout:
a. 3-component epoxy resin system.
1) Two liquid epoxy components.
2) One inert aggregate filler component.
b. Each component packaged separately for mixing at jobsite.
G. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2. Welded wire reinforcement: ASTM A185.
a. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 psi.
3. Column spirals: ASTM A82.
H. Forms:
1. Prefabricated or job built.
2. Wood forms:
CONCRETE
03002 - 6
a. New 5/8 or 3/4 IN 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade.
b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel.
c. 4 x 8 FT sheets for built-in-place type except where smaller pieces will cover entire
area.
d. When approved, plywood may be reused.
3. Metal forms:
a. Metal forms excluding aluminum may be used.
b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide
members of uniform thickness.
4. Chamfer strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed.
5. Form ties:
a. Removable end, permanently embedded body type with cones on outer ends not
requiring auxiliary spreaders.
b. Cone diameter: 3/4 IN minimum to 1 IN maximum.
c. Embedded portion 1-1/2 IN minimum back from concrete face.
d. If not provided with threaded ends, constructed for breaking off ends without damage to
concrete.
e. Provide ties with built-in waterstops at all walls that will be in contact with process
liquid during plant operation.
6. Form release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future finishes to concrete
surface.
I. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, and Hangers:
1. Stainless steel, epoxy coated, or plastic coated metal.
a. Plastic coated: Rebar support tips in contact with the forms only.
J . Membrane Curing Compound:
1. ASTM C309, Type I-D.
2. Resin based, dissipates upon exposure to UV light.
3. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of any future coverings, coatings or finishes.
4. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction to be nontoxic and taste and
odor free.
K. Bonding Agent:
1. High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to
improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars.
2. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con."
3. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Acryl-Set."
4. L & M Construction Chemicals "Everbond."
5. Thoro System Products "Acryl 60."
L. Expansion J oint Filler:
1. In contact with water or sewage:
a. Closed cell neoprene.
b. ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5 psi compression
deflection (Grade SCE41).
2. Exterior driveways, curbs and sidewalks:
a. Asphalt expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D994.
3. Other use:
a. Fiber expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D1751.
2.3 CONCRETE MIXES
A. General:
1. All concrete to be ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94.
CONCRETE
03002 - 7
2. Provide concrete of specified quality capable of being placed without segregation and, when
cured, of developing all properties required.
3. All concrete to be normal weight concrete.
B. Strength:
1. Provide specified strength and type of concrete for each use in structure(s) as follows:

TYPE WEIGHT
SPECIFIED
STRENGTH*
Concrete fill Normal weight 3000 psi
Lean concrete Normal weight 3000 psi

Precast concrete Normal weight 5000 psi
All other general use concrete Normal weight 4000 psi
* Minimum 28-day compressive strength.
C. Air Entrainment:
1. Provide air entrainment in all concrete resulting in a total air content percent by volume as
follows:

MAX AGGREGATE SIZE TOTAL AIR CONTENT PERCENT
1 IN or 3/4 IN 5 to 7
1/2 IN 5 1/2 to 8

2. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138.
D. Slump - 4 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum:
1. Measured at point of discharge of the concrete into the concrete construction member.
2. Concrete of lower than minimum slump may be used provided it can be properly placed and
consolidated.
3. Pumped concrete:
a. Provide additional water at batch plant to allow for slump loss due to pumping.
b. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at discharge end of
pump hose does not exceed maximum slump specified above.
4. Determine slump per ASTM C143.
E. Selection of Proportions:
1. General:
a. Proportion ingredients to:
1) Produce proper workability, durability, strength, and other required properties.
2) Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water on surface.
2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios for concrete to be as follows:

SPECIFIED
STRENGTH
MINIMUM CEMENT, LB/CY MAXIMUM WATER
CEMENT RATIO BY
WEIGHT
MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE
1/2 IN 3/4 IN 1 IN
3000 --- 517 517 0.45
4000 611 611 611 0.45
5000 --- 686 665 0.40

3. Substitution of fly ash: Maximum of 25 percent by weight of cement at rate of 1 LB fly ash
for 1 LB of cement.
4. Sand cement grout:
a. Three parts sand.
b. One part Portland cement.
c. Entrained air: Six percent plus or minus one percent.
CONCRETE
03002 - 8
d. Sufficient water for required workability.
e. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 3,000 psi.
5. Normal weight concrete:
a. Proportion mixture to provide desired characteristics using one of methods described
below:
1) Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as modified herein.
a) Air content within range specified above.
b) Record and report temperature of trial mixes.
c) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1.
2) Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as modified herein:
a) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this method.
b) Test records shall represent materials, proportions and conditions similar to
those specified.
6. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive strength by the
amount determined or calculated in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.3 of
ACI 318 using the standard deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as
described in Paragraph 5.3.1 of ACI 318.
F. Allowable Shrinkage: 0.048 percent per ASTM C157.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Formwork:
1. Contractor is responsible for design and erection of formwork.
2. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation and position.
a. Allowable tolerances: As recommended in ACI 347R.
3. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping foundation base slabs or
elevated floor slabs to drains.
a. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs of minimum uniform
indicated depth.
b. Do not place floor drains through beams.
4. Openings: Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades.
a. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
5. Chamfer strips: Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in forms to produce 3/4 IN wide beveled edges
on permanently exposed corners of members.
6. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement.
7. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage.
8. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing reinforcing bars in forms.
B. Reinforcement:
1. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement.
2. Locate and support with chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
3. Set wire ties so ends do not touch forms and are directed into concrete, not toward exposed
concrete surfaces.
4. Lap splice lengths: ACI 318 Class B top bar tension splices unless indicated otherwise on
the Drawings.
5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges.
a. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcement to within 3 IN of the edge.
6. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement: As shown on Drawings.
7. Do not weld reinforcing bars.
8. Welded wire reinforcement:
a. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum practical sizes.
CONCRETE
03002 - 9
b. Splice sides and ends with a splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires
of each fabric sheet not less than:
1) One spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN.
2) 1.5 x development length.
3) 6 IN.
c. Development length: ACI 318 basic development length for the specified fabric yield
strength.
C. Construction, Expansion, and Control Joints:
1. Provide at locations indicated on the landscape drawings and structural details.
2. Locate wall vertical construction expansion and control joints as shown on the landscape
drawings.
3. Locate construction joints in floor slabs and foundation base slabs so that concrete
placements are approximately square and do not exceed 2500 SF.
4. Locate construction joints in beams, walls and footings:
a. At the middle of the span, unless a beam intersects a girder at that point.
b. If the middle of the span is at an intersection of a beam and girder, offset the joint in the
girder a distance equal to twice the beam width.
c. Provide satisfactory means for transferring shear and other forces through the
construction joint.
5. Install construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement with all reinforcement
continued across construction joints.
6. At least 48 HRS shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete construction.
7. Thoroughly clean and remove all laitance and loose and foreign particles from construction
joints.
8. Before new concrete is placed, coat all construction joints with an approved bonding
adhesive used and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Embedments:
1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is
attached to, or supported by concrete.
2. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions for locating and setting.
3. Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced along the length
of the waterstop and wire tie to adjacent reinforcing steel.
E. Placing Concrete:
1. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R.
2. Place in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections.
3. Begin placement when work of other trades affecting concrete is completed.
4. Place concrete by methods which prevent aggregate segregation.
5. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 FT.
6. Where free fall of concrete will exceed 4 FT, place concrete by means of tremie pipe or
chute.
F. Consolidation: Consolidate all concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented with hand
rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and embedded items into
all parts of forms.
G. Protection:
1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes.
2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R except as modified herein.
a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or reinforcing bars
coated with frost, ice or snow.
b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing:

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
AT PLACEMENT (IN SHADE)
CONCRETE TEMPERATURE
AT MIXING
Below 30 DegF 70 DegF
CONCRETE
03002 - 10
Between 30-45 DegF 60 DegF
Above 45 DegF 50 DegF

c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80 DegF.
d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the concrete temperature
at or above 50 DegF for 7 days or 70 DegF for 3 days.
e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly.
3. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R except as modified herein.
a. At air temperature of 90 DegF and above, keep concrete as cool as possible during
placement and curing.
b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90 DegF at placement.
c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture.
d. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds
0.2 LBS/SF/HR as determined from ACI 305R, Figure 2.1.5.
H. Curing:
1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces.
2. Cure concrete by use of moisture retaining cover, burlap kept continuously wet or by
membrane curing compound.
3. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to concrete and to prevent moisture loss
from concrete during curing period.
4. Provide curing for minimum of 7 days.
5. Form materials left in place may be considered as curing materials for surfaces in contact
with the form materials except in periods of hot weather.
6. In hot weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R.
7. In cold weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R.
8. If forms are removed before 7 days have elapsed, finish curing of formed surfaces by one of
above methods for the remainder of the curing period.
9. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound:
a. Cover vertical surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound.
b. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat.
c. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal.
d. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water
on the surface.
e. A vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal.
I. Form Removal:
1. Remove forms after concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal
operations or lack of support.
3.2 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Tolerances:
1. Class A: 1/8 IN in 10 FT.
2. Class B: 1/4 IN in 10 FT.
B. Surfaces Exposed to View:
1. Provide a smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces that are:
a. To be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
b. Scheduled for grout cleaned finish.
2. Remove fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and honeycomb areas with
cement grout.
3. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout.
C. Surfaces Not Exposed to View:
1. Patch voids, air pockets and honeycomb areas with cement grout.
2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout.
CONCRETE
03002 - 11
D. Grout Cleaned Finish:
1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient bonding agent/water
mixture to produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint.
a. White Portland cement shall be substituted for gray Portland cement to produce a color
that matches color of surrounding concrete as determined by trial patch for areas not to
be painted.
2. Wet surface of concrete to prevent absorption of water by grout and uniformly apply grout
with brushes or spray gun.
3. Immediately scrub the surface with a cork float or stone to coat and fill air bubbles and
holes.
4. While grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working surface with rubber float,
sack or other approved means.
5. After the surface whitens from drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap.
6. Keep final finish damp for a minimum of 36 HRS after final rubbing.
E. Slab Float Finish:
1. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do no further work
until ready for floating.
2. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to
permit operation.
3. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface with a 10 FT straightedge
applied at not less than two different angles.
4. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during this procedure to produce a surface
within Class B tolerance throughout.
5. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture.
F. Troweled Finish:
1. Float finish surface.
2. Next power trowel, and finally hand trowel.
3. Produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects with first hand troweling.
4. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently.
5. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface.
6. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling.
7. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance
and plane to a Class A tolerance.
8. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings remove any defects of sufficient magnitude
that would show through floor covering by grinding.
G. Broom Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as specified, give it a
transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across surface.
3.3 GROUT
A. Preparation:
1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout:
a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout.
b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to grouting.
2. Epoxy grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface.
B. Application:
1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout:
a. Mix in a mechanical mixer.
b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout.
c. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
d. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the bottom of baseplates.
e. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine grout.
f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth.
CONCRETE
03002 - 12
g. Except where a slope is indicated on Drawings, finish edges flush at the baseplate,
bedplate, member, or piece of equipment.
h. Protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or polyethylene sheets.
i. Wet cure grout for seven (7) days, minimum.
2. Epoxy grout:
a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors without voids.
c. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to ensure proper placement.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of a concrete testing laboratory to perform testing of
concrete placed during construction.
1. Contractor to cooperate with Owner in obtaining and testing samples.
B. Tests During Construction:
1. Strength test - procedure:
a. Three cylinders, 6 IN DIA x 12 IN high, will be taken from each sample per
ASTM C172 and ASTM C31.
b. Cylinders will be tested per ASTM C39:
1) One at 7 days.
2) Two at 28 days.
2. Strength test - frequency:
a. Not less than one test each day concrete placed.
b. Not less than one test for each 50 CY or major fraction thereof placed in one day.
c. Not less than one test for each type of concrete poured.
d. Not less than one test for each concrete structure exceeding 2 CY volume.
3. Slump test:
a. Per ASTM C143.
b. Determined for each strength test sample.
c. Additional slump tests may be taken.
4. Air content:
a. Per ASTM C231, ASTM C173, and ASTM C138.
b. Determined for each strength test sample.
5. Temperature: Determined for each strength test sample.
C. Evaluation of Tests:
1. Strength test results:
a. Average of 28-day strength of two cylinders from each sample.
1) If one cylinder manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, handling,
curing or testings, strength of remaining cylinder will be test result.
2) If both cylinders show any of above defects, test will be discarded.
D. Acceptance of Concrete:
1. Strength level of each type of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the
following requirements are met:
a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds the required
specified 28-day compressive strength.
b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28-day compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
2. If tests fail to indicate satisfactory strength level, perform additional tests and/or corrective
measures as directed by Engineer.
a. Perform additional tests and/or corrective measures at no additional cost to Owner.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Concrete Finishes:
1. Grout cleaned finish: Where indicated on Drawings.
CONCRETE
03002 - 13
2. Slab finishes: See Landscape Drawings.
3. Exposed stem wall finished:
a. Exposed aggregate.
b. See landscape drawings and details.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE
03002 - 14
COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
04050 - 1
2009/09/23
SECTION 04050
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cold weather protection.
2. Hot weather protection.
1. American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry Society
(ACI/ASCE/TMS):
a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specifications for Masonry Structures.
2. Brick Industry Association (BIA):
a. Technical Notes 1, All-Weather Construction.
3. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC):
a. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Masonry Construction.
4. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).
a. TEK 3-1C, All Weather Concrete Masonry Construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, hot weather construction is
defined as occurring when ambient temperatures exceed 100 DegF or 90 DegF when the wind
velocity is greater than 8 mph.
B. Cold Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, cold weather construction is
defined as occurring when ambient temperature falls below 40 DegF or when the temperature of
the masonry units is below 40 DegF.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Comply with NCMA TEK 3-1C recommendations and practices.
2. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials.
3. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered with
clear polyethylene minimum 6 mil thick.
a. Extend down each side of wall minimum of 16 IN and secure.
B. Temporary Facilities:
1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and orderly
progress of work.
2. Provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32 DegF within protected
areas.
3. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of work.
04050 - 2
C. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements:
1. Prior to and during installation:
a. Air temperature 32 to 40 DegF: Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF.
b. Air temperature 25 to 32 DegF:
1) Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and
120 DegF.
2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used.
c. Air temperature below 25 DegF:
1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and
120 DegF.
2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used.
3) Maintain temperature of units until laid at not less than 40 DegF.
4) Provide heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain air temperature
above freezing.
5) Provide windbreaks or shelters when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
a) Wind breaks or shelters shall be translucent.
2. After installation:
a. Air temperature 32 to 40 DegF: Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 HRS by
covering with weather-resistive translucent membrane.
b. Air temperature 25 to 32 DegF: Completely cover with translucent weather-resistive
membrane for not less than 24 HRS.
c. Air temperature 20 to 25 DegF: Completely protect with insulating blankets for not
less than 24 HRS or provide other protection approved by Engineer.
d. Air temperature below 20 DegF:
1) Provide enclosed translucent shelters and heating to maintain air temperature on
each side of wall above 32 DegF for 24 HRS.
2) Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat.
e. Promptly repair all tears, holes, etc., to translucent membrane and shelter using
compatible patching material and tape as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D. Hot Weather Construction and Protection Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of IMIAWC, NCMA and ACI/ASCE/TMS.
2. Storage and preparation of materials.
a. Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials from direct sun.
b. Maintain sand in a damp loose condition.
1) Sand moisture shall be maintained at minimum 8 percent.
2) Sprinkle with cool water as required to maintain moisture content.
c. Use cool water for mixing mortars.
d. Avoid using tools and equipment that have been sitting in the sun.
1) Sprinkle mortar boards, mortar pans, wheel barrows, mixers, etc., with cool water.
e. Wet brick units having high initial rates of absorption.
f. Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to use.
3. Installation:
a. Place masonry units within one minute of the spreading of the mortar.
1) Mortar beds shall not be spread more than 4 FT ahead of the masonry unit being
placed.
b. Provide wind screens and shading partitions as required to eliminate direct sunlight
exposure.
c. Wet installed units using fog spray of clean water.
d. Cover installed work immediately after installation to slow rate of loss of moisture from
units.
e. Fog-spray new masonry work until damp.
1) Repeat fog spraying minimum of three (3) times per day until masonry work has
cured for 72 HRS.
04050 - 3
2) In high humidity conditions, Engineer reserves the right to discontinue fog
spraying if operation is found to be introducing excessive amounts of moisture into
the Work.
END OF SECTION
CEMENT AND LIME MORTARS
04110 - 1
2009/10/07
SECTION 04110
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cement and lime mortars and masonry grout.
2. Integral water repellent admixture.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry.
1. American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry Society
(ACI/ASCE/TMS).
a. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
b. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
d. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
e. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
f. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
g. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
h. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.
i. C1093, Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
j. C1384, Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars.
B. Qualifications:
1. Testing Laboratory shall be an independent agency qualified in accordance with
ASTM C1093 for performing the testing indicated.
a. Testing Laboratory shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the testing of
mortar and grout.
2. Technician conducting tests shall have minimum of five (5) years experience in the testing
of mortar and grout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Coarse grout and fine grout are defined by the aggregate size used in accordance with
ASTM C476.
B. Coarse aggregate and fine aggregate are defined in ASTM C404, Table 1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
b. Proposed mortar mix design, including proposed preblended, prepackaged dry mortar
mixes.
1) Proposed mortar mix design to include brand, type and manufacturer of all
cementitious materials and source or producer of aggregate.
04110 - 2
2) Provide integral water repellent manufacturer's certified recommended dosage rate
for mortar batched each day during masonry construction.
c. Proposed masonry grout mix design.
2. Test results:
a. Preconstruction mortar test results.
b. Preconstruction pointing grout test results.
c. Preconstruction masonry grout test results.
d. Strength test results for all mortar and masonry grout placed during construction.
e. Slump test results of all masonry grout placed during construction.
A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
1. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo.
1. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover,
and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C150, Type I or II.
2. No air entrainment.
3. Natural color.
4. Maximum percent of alkalis: 0.60 in accordance with ASTM C150, Table 1A.
B. Hydrated Lime:
1. ASTM C207, Type S.
2. Type SA not acceptable.
3. Lime substitutes are not acceptable.
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, free of gypsum.
D. Masonry Grout:
1. ASTM C476.
2. No admixtures allowed.
E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Mortar Pigments:
1. Commercial colorants suitably compounded for use in mortar mixes.
2. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratios.
H. Integral Water Repellent Admixture:
1. Liquid polymeric admixture: ASTM C1384.
2. Verify compatibility with liquid water repellent admixture being used in the fabrication of
concrete masonry units.
2.2 MIXES
A. Type "S" mortar shall be used:
04110 - 3
1. Wherever a fire-resistance classification or rating is shown for unit masonry construction
provide mortar of type which has been tested and listed for construction indicated.
2. Comply with ASTM C270, Table No. 1.
3. Do not use masonry cement.
4. Mix materials minimum of three (3) minutes and maximum of five (5) minutes.
5. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason.
6. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
7. Provide integral water repellent admixture in all mortar used for both interior and exterior
masonry work.
B. Masonry Grout:
1. Comply with ASTM C476.
2. Use no anti-freeze additives.
3. No fly ash additives will be accepted.
4. Mix 5 minutes minimum.
5. Slump: 8 to 11 IN.
6. Do not add integral water repellent admixture to masonry grout mix.
7. At Contractor's option, manufactured grout meeting the above minimum requirements may
be used.
8. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 2,000 psi.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform preconstruction laboratory tests on proposed masonry grout mix prior to start of
masonry work.
1. Perform tests far enough in advance so that any necessary retesting can be accomplished
before masonry construction begins.
a. Test grout per ASTM C1019.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials:
1. Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a
single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one (1) source or producer
for each aggregate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS
602.
B. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 IN.
C. Consolidate all grout while installing.
1. Consolidate grout pours 12 IN or less in height by mechanical vibration or by puddling.
2. Consolidate grout pours exceeding 12 IN in height by mechanical vibration and
reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred.
A. Mortar:
1. If standard gray mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water and
remixing.
a. Standard gray mortar shall not be retempered more than one (1) time.
2. Colored mortar shall not be retempered.
3. All mortar and pointing grout must be used within 1-1/2 HRS maximum after initial mixing.
B. Engineer reserves right to alter mix design based on initial rate of absorption of masonry units.
04110 - 4
C. Masonry Grout:
1. Use grout within 1-1/2 HRS maximum after initial mixing.
2. Use no grout after it has begun to set.
3. Do not retemper grout after initial mixing.
4. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 4 FT.
D. Masonry Grout Testing:
1. Testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner's special masonry inspector.
a. Do not include in the bid price the cost of these services.
2. Conduct compressive strength tests and slump tests on all masonry grout used during
masonry construction.
3. Perform all compressive strength test sampling, testing and reporting per ASTM C1019.
4. Perform all slump test sampling, testing, and reporting per ASTM C143.
5. Frequency of sampling: One (1) sample (three (3) specimens) collected each grouting
operation during masonry construction.
6. Compressive strength testing:
a. One (1) strength test shall be the average of three (3) specimens from the same sample,
tested at 28 days.
END OF SECTION
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04155 - 1
2009/02/10
SECTION 04155
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Masonry accessories.
1. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry.
a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
c. A951, Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry J oint Reinforcement.
d. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution
Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
e. D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers.
f. D2287, Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer
Molding and Extrusion Compounds.
2. Building code:
a. International Code Council (ICC):
1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all
amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
c. Manufacturer's data sheet on each product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Masonry anchors, horizontal joint reinforcing random coursing veneer anchorage system
and miscellaneous anchors:
a. Dur-O-Wal.
b. Heckman.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
d. Wire Bond.
2. Preformed control joint inserts:
a. Dur-O-Wal.
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04155 - 2
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3. Grout screen:
a. Wire Bond.
b. Dur-O-Wal.
c. Heckman Building Products.
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Veneer Anchorage System for New Concrete Back-up:
1. Edge J oints for Stone:
a. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153.
b. Hohman & Barnard DW10 & Split tail.
c. Tie length will vary relative to stone thickness. Minimum embedment on stone surface
is 3 IN.
2. Adjustable pintle and plate:
a. Conform to ASTM A951.
b. Cold drawn steel wire pintle, ASTM A82.
c. 14 GA steel plate, ASTM A1008.
d. Galvanized, ASTM A153, Class B2.
e. 3/16 IN DIA wire x length required to embed pintle minimum 2 IN into veneer mortar
joint.
f. Similar to Dur-O
B. Horizontal J oint Reinforcing:
1. General:
a. Conform to ASTM A951.
b. Cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82.
c. 9 GA side rods.
d. 9 GA cross rods.
e. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153.
f. Prefabricated corner and tee sections with minimum length of 30 IN from point of
intersection.
2. Single wythe wall joint reinforcing:
a. Ladder design at walls with vertical reinforcing.
b. Truss design at walls without vertical reinforcing.
C. Grout Screen:
1. Polypropylene monofilament.
2. 1/4 x 1/4 IN mesh.
3. Width of grout screen to be 2 IN less than nominal width of CMU.
D. Masonry Veneer Weeps:
1. 1/4 Dia cotton rope at 48IN OC Max .
E. Preformed Control J oint Inserts:
1. ASTM D2287.
2. Hardness: 85 durometer.
3. Shear strength: Minimum 2831 LBS/per/FT/joint.
4. Similar to Dur-O-Wal #D/A 2002 or Hohmann & Barnard #VS Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04155 - 3
B. Butt joints of preformed control joint inserts tightly together and secure with adhesive or sealant
acceptable to insert manufacturer.
C. Anchoring Veneer:
1. Veneer with concrete block back-up:
a. Anchor veneer to new construction using horizontal joint reinforcing and specified
veneer anchors.
b. Provide veneer anchorage at not more than 16 IN OC vertically and 16 IN OC
horizontally.

D. Reinforcing Masonry:
1. General:
a. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing in all concrete masonry wall
construction.
1) Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length with minimum cover of
5/8 IN on exterior side of walls and 1/2 IN at other locations.
2) Lap reinforcement minimum of 12 IN at ends.
a) Remove cross wires on one (1) side of the lap splice and bend the side rods
slightly so the lap is provided with 12 IN of uninterrupted wire lap occurring
in the same plane.
3) Do not bridge control joints with horizontal joint reinforcing.
4) Do not bridge expansion joints with horizontal joint reinforcing.
5) At corners and wall intersections use prefabricated "L" and "T" horizontal joint
reinforcing sections.
6) Cut and bend as required.
b. Install reinforcing at 16 IN OC vertically unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
c. Install reinforcing 8 IN OC vertically for a minimum of 24 IN at starter courses.
d. In concrete masonry, install additional horizontal joint reinforcing 16 IN OC in courses
on each side of vertical control joints and on each jamb of openings for full height of
joint or opening.
1) Alternate with normal wall horizontal joint reinforcing.
2) Extend reinforcing minimum 32 IN beyond joint or jambs of opening.
E. Remove all excess mortar and grout from as walls being constructed and protect from other
construction debris.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220 - 1
2008/03/17
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry construction (CMU) including all standard concrete masonry.
1. Section 04050 - Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
2. Section 04110 - Cement and Lime Mortars.
3. Section 04155 - Masonry Accessories.
4. Section 07900 - J oint Sealants.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/The
Masonry Society (TMS):
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b. C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA):
a. TEK 2-3A, Architectural Concrete Masonry Units.
b. TEK 3-4B, Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction.
4. Building code:
a. International Code Council (ICC):
1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all
amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
B. All masonry units of any one (1) particular type, color or face style shall be from the same
production run.
1. Special shapes shall be factory fabricated unless noted otherwise.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions to be in accordance with Standard Unit Nomenclature Table 1, NCMA TEK 2-3A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Reinforcing layout with wall profiles.
a. Manufacturer's information on aggregate and cement type used in manufacture.
3. Certifications:
a. Certification that concrete masonry units meet or exceed requirements of standards
referenced.
4. Qualifications of testing lab and technician.
5. Test results for all masonry testing.
A. Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver in cubes and store on dunnage.
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220 - 2
B. Protect units from damage.
C. Inspect units upon delivery for damage, to assure color match with mock-up or approved
samples, dimensional quality, and trueness of unit.
1. Remove damaged or otherwise unacceptable units from the Project Site.
D. Store units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
acceptable:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Modular units, ASTM C90.
a. Provide aggregate in accordance with ASTM C33.
b. Total linear drying shrinkage: ASTM C90.
c. Weight: Minimum of 125 LB/CF.
d. Medium weight or light weight units are not acceptable.
2. Face shell and web thickness: ASTM C90, Table 1.
3. Water absorption: ASTM C90 Table 2.
4. Concrete bricks of same material, texture and quality.
5. Compressive strength: ASTM C90, Table 2.
6. Dimensional tolerance: ASTM C90.
B. Reinforcing Bars: Refer to Specification and as indicated on Drawings.
C. Mortar: Refer to Specification Section 04110.
D. Masonry Grout: Refer to Specification Section 04110.
E. Sealants: Refer to Specification Section 07900 and drawings.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Color:
a. Standard gray.
2. Design compressive strength: f'm=1,500 psi minimum.
a. Determine in accordance with unit strength method per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
3. Fabricated in the manufacturing plant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.
B. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints.
1. Properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. General:
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220 - 3
1. Build cavity walls to thickness indicated on Drawings.
2. Build composite walls to thickness indicated on Drawings.
3. Build in flashing, reinforcing, reglets and related accessory items.
a. See Specification Section 04155 for installation of accessory items.
4. Perform all cutting with masonry saws using saw blades as recommended by masonry unit
manufacturer.
5. Drill holes with power drill using drill bits as recommended by masonry unit manufacturer.
6. Holes made by chipping unit will not be accepted.
7. Install field units in running bond.
a. Provide special coursing where indicated on the Drawings.
8. Cut as required to maintain bond pattern.
9. Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes and as noted on Drawings.
10. Avoid use of less than half size units, whenever possible.
11. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, stained or imperfect units exposed in finish work.
12. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
13. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades.
a. Provide not less than 8 IN of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings,
and between adjacent chases and recesses unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings.
C. Laying and Tooling:
1. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints.
a. Provide full mortar bed on all block cross webs and completely fill head joints.
1) Do not slush head joints.
2) Protect cells requiring grout fill from mortar droppings.
3) Omit mortar from head joint at weep joint opening.
2. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN joint widths.
a. Cut joints flush where concealed.
b. Tool exposed joints concave.
c. Compress mortar in below ground joints and in joints concealed by insulation in cavity
wall construction.
d. Provide wider joints where noted on Drawings.
1) In no case shall any mortar joint be more than 3/4 IN wide.
e. Where masonry sits on top of steel support omit the mortar joint on top of the support
and sit masonry directly on top of the thru wall flashing or the steel support member
unless a mortar joint is required to maintain coursing.
3. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar.
4. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide neat, uniform
appearance.
5. Remove masonry disturbed after laying.
a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar.
b. Do not pound units to fit.
c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar.
6. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course.
a. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
7. As work progresses, build in items indicated on Drawings and specified.
a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items.
b. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place grout
screen in joint below and fill core solid with mortar.
D. Control J oints and Sealants:
1. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints where indicated on Drawings.
a. Where not indicated on Drawings, provide control joints or at natural point of
weakness.
b. Provide at all T intersections.
c. Rake out mortar in joint.
2. Refer to Specification Section 07900 for sealant installation requirements.
a. Seal control and expansion joints.
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220 - 4
E. Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises:
a. 1/4 IN in 10 FT.
b. 3/8 IN in a story height not to exceed 20 FT.
c. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.
2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other
conspicuous lines:
a. 1/4 IN in any story or 20 FT maximum.
b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.
3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines:
a. 1/4 IN in any bay or 20 FT.
4. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls, and partitions:
a. 1/2 IN in any bay or 20 FT.
5. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from
dimensions shown on Drawings:
a. Minus 1/4 IN.
b. Plus 1/2 IN.
F. Protect against weather when work is not in progress.
1. During inclement weather conditions, cover top of walls with translucent waterproof
membrane.
2. See Specification Section 04050.
G. Protect against cold/hot weather as specified in Specification Section 04050.
A. Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction:
1. At a minimum, provide bracing in accordance with NCMA TEK 3-4B.
2. Contractor is responsible for adequately bracing all masonry during construction.
B. Remove and replace loose, stained, damaged and other unacceptable units as directed by
Engineer.
1. Provide new units to match.
2. Install in fresh mortar.
3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.
C. Special Masonry Inspection:
1. Masonry inspection services will be provided during the following construction activities:
a. Cost of masonry inspection services will be paid by Owner.
b. During laying of units:
1) During the first day of the masonry construction, inspect proportions of site
prepared mortar, construction of mortar joints, location of all reinforcing and
connectors, size and location of structural elements, type, size and location of
anchors, protection of masonry during cold weather.
2) Inspection to be continuous the first full day of masonry construction which
requires special inspection.
a) Thereafter, a minimum of 3 HRS every third day of construction until the
concrete masonry work is complete.
3) Inspection while laying masonry units may be made concurrently with other
inspection duties provided all inspection duties are adequately performed.
4) When deficiencies are found, additional inspection shall be provided as required
until deficiencies have been corrected.
5) If masonry crews change, an additional full day of inspection is required during the
first day the new crew is on-site.
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220 - 5
c. Placement of reinforcing steel:
1) Verification of all reinforcing including size, grade, lap lengths, and type.
2) Inspection may be periodic as required to verify all reinforcing.
3) Inspector to be present during the concrete pour in which any dowels connecting
concrete to masonry are cast to verify proper location of dowels.
d. Prior to each grouting operation, verify that grout space is clean, reinforcing is clean
and connectors are properly placed, proportions of site-prepared grout are correct and
mortar joints have been properly constructed.
1) Inspection may be periodic as required to verify proper grout space.
e. Verify compliance with Building Code and Specifications continuously during all
grouting operations.
f. Provide special inspection in accordance with the Building Code Table 1704.5.1
including observation of masonry work for conformance to the Contract Documents:
1) Provide inspection reports to the Engineer, Building Official and Owner.
a) Notify Contractor of discrepancies for correction.
b) Notify Engineer, Building Official and Owner, in writing, when discrepancies
have been satisfactorily corrected.
2) Submit final signed report stating that work requiring special inspection was, to the
best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance to the Contract Documents and
the applicable workmanship previsions of the Building Code.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean concrete masonry as the wall is being constructed using fiber brushes, wooden paddles
and scrapers.
1. No acid-based cleaning solutions shall be used unless approved in writing by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
J OINT SEALANTS
07900 - 1
2010/04/14
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Sealant work.
B. Work included consists of but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air or moisture, unless sealing work
is specifically required under other Specification Sections.
a. Work may include the following:
1) Exterior wall joints.
2) Masonry control joints, exterior and interior and between masonry and other
materials.
3) Isolation joints, and expansion joints.
4) J oints between paving or sidewalks and building.
5) Concrete construction, control and expansion joints, exterior.
6) Other joints where calking, sealant, expanding foam sealant or compressible
sealant is indicated.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
a. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric J oint Sealants.
c. C1521, Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing
Sealant J oints.
3. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF).
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
B. Qualifications: Sealant applicator shall have minimum five (5) years experience using products
specified on projects with similar scope.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. "Caulk(ing)," "calk(ing)," and "sealant": J oint sealant work.
B. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at
the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
C. Finish sealant: Sealant material per this specification applied over face of compressible sealant
or expanding foam sealant specified, to provide a finished, colored sealant joint.
D. Defect(ive): Failure of watertightness or airtightness.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
J OINT SEALANTS
07900 - 2
c. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling and bond
breaker.
2. Warranty.
3. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating product being used is recommended for and
is best suited for joint in which it is being applied.
4. Certification of applicator qualification.
B. Samples:
1. Cured sample of each color for Architect's color selection.
2. Color chart not acceptable.
C. Test Results:
1. Provide adhesion test results for each sealant sample including adhesion results compared to
adhesion requirements.
2. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative recommended remedial measures for all
failing tests.
A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact: Labels shall
indicate contents and expiration date on material.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Material and Labor Warranty:
1. Sealant work free of defects for a period of three (3) years from date of final acceptance.
2. Remove any defective work or materials and replace with new work and materials.
3. Warranty signed jointly by Applicator and sealant manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
acceptable:
1. Polyurethane sealants:
a. Pecora.
b. Sika Chemical Corp.
c. Sonneborn - Rexnord.
d. Tremco.
2. Silicone sealants:
a. General Electric.
b. Dow Corning Corp.
c. Tremco.
3. Compressible sealant:
a. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation.
b. Emseal.
c. Norton.
d. Sandell.
4. Polysulfide rubber sealant:
a. Pecora.
b. Sonneborn.
c. Morton Polymer Systems.
5. Polyurea joint filler:
a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corporation.
J OINT SEALANTS
07900 - 3
b. Euclid Chemical Co.
c. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Sonneborn.
6. Backer rod, compressible filler, primer, joint cleaners, bond breaker: As recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sealants - General:
1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed.
2. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished work, provide manufacturer's color
which has best performance.
3. Nonsagging sealant for vertical and overhead horizontal joints.
4. Sealants for horizontal joints: Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade.
B. Polyurethane Sealant:
1. One (1) or two (2) components.
2. Paintable.
3. Meet ASTM C920 Type S or Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, A and O.
a. Pecora Dynatrol-IXL, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200, NR-201.
b. Sika Chemical Corporation Sikaflex-1a, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL.
c. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP-1, NP-II, SL-1 SL-2.
d. Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric, Vulkem 116,227,45,245.
C. Silicone Sealant:
1. One (1) component.
2. Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, O.
a. General Electric: Silpruf, Silglaze II.
b. General Electric: Sanitary 1700 sealant for sealing around plumbing fixtures.
c. Dow Corning: 786 for sealing around plumbing fixtures.
d. Dow Corning: 790, 795.
e. Tremco: Spectrem 1, Spectrem 3, Tremsil 600.
3. Mildew resistant for sealing around plumbing fixtures.
D. Compressible Sealant:
1. Size so that width of material is twice joint width.
2. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized polybutylene waterproofing coated
on front face with nonreactive release agent that will act as bond breaker for applied sealant.
a. Polytite Manufacturing Corp. "Polytite-B."
3. Fire rated where required.
E. J oint Cleaner, Primer, Bond Breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Sealant Backer Rod and/or Compressible Filler:
1. Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible,
nonabsorbent, nonbituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to:
a. Control joint depth.
b. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint.
c. Provide proper shape of sealant bead.
d. Serve as expansion joint filler.
G. Adhesive, Compressible Sealant: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
H. Polysulfide Rubber Sealant:
1. One (1) or two (2) component.
2. Meet ASTM C920.
a. Pecora Synthacalk GC2+.
b. Sonneborn - Sonolastic - two-part polysulfide sealant.
c. Morton Polymer Systems - Thiokol Sealants.
J OINT SEALANTS
07900 - 4
I. Polyurea J oint Filler:
1. Two (2) component, semi-rigid material for filling control, sawcut and construction joints in
interior concrete floors.
a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp. "J oint Fill, J oint Seal, J oint Saver II" as
required for condition and recommended by manufacturer.
b. Euclid Chemical Co. "EUCO QWIK" joint.
c. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "J oint Tite 750".
d. Sonneborn "TF-100" control joint filler.
2. Comply with ACI 302.1R performance recommendations regarding control and
construction joints.
3. Color: Gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before use of any sealant, investigate its compatibility with joint surfaces, fillers and other
materials in joint system.
B. Use only compatible materials.
C. Where required by manufacturer, prime joint surfaces.
1. Limit application to surfaces to receive calking.
2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
D. Provide joint depth for joints receiving polyurea joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements.
B. Clean all joints.
C. Make all joints water and airtight.
D. Make depth of sealing compounds, except expanding foam and polyurea sealant, not more than
one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 1/4 IN nor more than 1/2 IN unless
recommended otherwise by the manufacturer.
E. Provide correctly sized backer rod, compressible filler or compressible sealant in all joints to
depth recommended by manufacturer:
1. Take care to not puncture backer rod and compressible filler.
2. Provide joint backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer for polyurea joint filler.
F. Apply bond breaker where required.
G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids.
H. Upon completion, leave calking with smooth, even, neat finish.
I. Where piping, conduit, ductwork, etc., penetrate wall, seal each side of wall opening.
J . Install compressible sealant to position at indicated depth.
1. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of joint.
2. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of finish sealant).
3. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint sides.
4. Install finish sealant where indicated.
K. Install expanding foam sealant to minimum 4 IN depth or thickness of wall being penetrated if
less than 4 IN or as indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide adequate fire rated backing material as required.
J OINT SEALANTS
07900 - 5
2. Hold material back from exposed face of wall as required to provide backer rod and finish
sealant.
a. Allow expanding foam sealant to completely cure prior to installing backer rod and
finish sealant.
3. Material shall be minimum of 70 DegF prior to and during installation.
4. Trim off excess material flush with surface of the wall if not providing finished sealant.
A. Adhesion Testing:
1. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM C1521 per the following criteria:
a. Exterior precast concrete wall panels: One (1) test per every 2000 LF of joint sealed.
b. Expansion joints: One (1) test per every 500 LF of joint sealed.
c. All other type of joints except butt glazing joints: One (1) test per every 2000 LF of
joint sealed.
d. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative shall recommend, in writing, remedial
measures for all failing tests.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE
NEW BRAUNFELS, TEXAS

TOCM 070-060 J UNE 9, 2010
INDEX OF SPECIFICATIONS - 1

ISSUE /
DATES
INDEX OF SPECIFICATIONS
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE SCOPE ITEMS
2
0
1
0

0
6

0
9

F
U
T
U
R
E

F
U
T
U
R
E

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION SECTION TITLE
X 012201 Unit Prices for Landscape Scope Items
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Cast In Place Concrete (Provided by HDR Structural)
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Unit Masonry Assemblies and Accessories (Provided by HDR
Structural)
X 044213 Site Stone Veneer And Cladding
X 047200 Cast Stone Masonry and Stone Curbing
DIVISION 05 - METALS
X 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
X 093233 Site Stone Paving
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
X 129300 Site Furnishings
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
X 320516 Aggregate and Decomposed Granite Surfacing
X 321317 Site Architectural Concrete Paving
X 321400 Concrete Unit Pavers
X 323113 Chain Link Fencing
X 323129 Exterior Wood Fencing
X 328400 Landscape Irrigation
X 329113 Soil Preparation
X 329119 Finish Landscape Grading
X 329200 Lawns And Turf Grass
X 329300 Tree, Shrub, Perennial and Groundcover Planting
X 329350 Landscape Establishment for 90 Days
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
X 334617 Landscape Drainage

Date Key:

KEYS:
X R O
KEYS:
X n column represents current specification to be used.
R in column represents specification previously issued, (replaces previous X in date), and new date with X added.
O in column represents current specification is deleted from the scope requirement.
BLACK SQUARE: If a specification is added, there will also be a black square in previous issues to indicate the spec has never been
issued and the square will be followed with an X in the date of the first issue. There will not be a black square prior to the general first issue.

In the example above, a spec was issued after the general issue, later it was revised, and finally deleted from the projects scope.
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 1
SECTION 012200 UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract including the City of New Braunfels
and Civil Engineers Project Manual which contains Specifications and other Contract
Documents apply to the work in this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. The City of New Braunfels and the Civil Engineers Project Manual.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion
of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the
scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are
increased or decreased.
1. The Unit Prices in this document reference items in the Landscape Architects scope of
services.
2. Contract for Landscape Architectural scope items shall be lump sum based on the plans
and specifications provided for construction and shall be listed on the Project Manual
within the Bid Form.
3. Quantities are the responsibility of the contractor and the contractor shall supply all items
necessary including items in 1.4 to fully install and warrant the installation. Quantities if
provided are for reference only.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are
specified in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 2
D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
1.5 UNIT PRICE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Contractor is required to provide unit prices of items listed within this document and to furnish
the document with the unit prices listed with the other bid documents as a part of the formal bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. The following unit prices shall include all labor, materials, shipping, excavation, backfill, bed and
pit preparation, overhead, profit, insurance, warranty, etc., to cover the finished work listed.
Changes shall be processed in accordance with the General Conditions.
B. Items shown are to be in according with the schedules and materials lists shown on the
drawings and shall comply with requirements for installation and other specific model numbers,
types or varieties indicated on the drawings.

01 5639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
Item
No.
Description Measurement Unit Price
1. Tree protection fencing including
installation, maintenance and
removal
Linear Foot
2. Tree Armoring assuming 12 caliper
tree
Each Tree
3. Construction Mulch, 8 thick Square Foot
4. 3 man Tree Pruning Crew including
equipment to perform ANSI A-300
Pruning type 10.4.1 and 10.4.2
Cleaning and Thinning trees. Use of
spikes for climbing is not permitted.
Crew Day
03 3053 - Cast In Place Concrete (Structural And Civil)
Item
No.
Description Measurement Cost
5. Mow Curb, 12 wide x 5 thck,
Medium Broom finish, rub finish
exposed sides, reinforced with
control and expansion joint
treatments
Linear Foot
6. Retaining Wall, reinforced Cubic Yard
7. Expansion J oint Linear Foot
8. Control J oint Linear Foot
9. Stone Wall Footing, non retaining Linear Foot
10. Sand Blast Finish on Exposed
Retaining Wall
Square Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 3

04 2200 CMU Construction Exposed Block Types(Structural)
Item
No.
11. CMU with Split Face Finish and
Integral Color (Private wall side in
Stone Face fence options)
Face Foot
12. CMU with Burnished Finish and
Integral Color (Private wall side in
Stone Face fence options)
Face Foot
13. CMU with Paint finish( Private wall
side in Stone Face fence options)
Face Foot
04 2200 - Unit Masonry Assemblies (Structural)
Item
No.
14. 16 CMU Pilaster and foundation per
structural, does not include veneer
or cap (Corner or end Column)
EACH
15. 12 CMU Pilaster and foundation per
structural, does not include veneer
or cap (Intermediate Pilaster)
EACH
04 4213 - Site Stone Veneer And Cladding
Item
No.
16. Flagstone wall veneer, standard
installation
Face Foot
17. Flagstone wall veneer, rustic old
world rub and sack finish
Face Foot
18. Pilaster stone veneer Flagstone,
standard installation
Face Foot
19. Pilaster stone veneer Thin ledge
stone
Face Foot
20. Stone Cladding on Planter Curb
(detail 2 L4.2)
Linear Foot
21. 4 Square Stone Veneer Seating
Block, includes installation of all
stone with foundation and text
coordination (text carried in 129300)
Each
22. San Antonio Monument complete
with foundation and text coordination
(text carried in 129300)
Each
23. Elliot Knox Identity wall, 3 veneer
Leuders Limestone, anchored and
sealed in place with sealant joints
Face Foot
24. Elliot Knox Identity wall, 4 veneer
Leuders Limestone anchored and
sealed in place with sealant joints
Face Foot
25. Elliot Knox Mosaic pattern flagstone,
natural finish anchored and sealed in
place with grout
Face Foot
26. Elliot Knox Mosaic pattern flagstone,
old world rubbed finish, anchored
and sealed in place with sealant
joints
Face Foot
27. Elliot Knox Stone Cap Linear Foot

UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 4
047200 Cast Stone Masonry and Stone Curbing
Item
No.
28. Cast Stone Cap, Stone Face Wall Linear Foot
29. Cast Stone Cap, End and Corner
Columns
Each Column
30. Cast Stone Cap, Intermediate
Columns
Each Column
31. Cast Stone Base, Corner Columns
with Wood or Chain Link Fence
Option
Each Column
32. Cast Stone Base, Intermediate
Columns with Wood or Chain Link
Fence Option
Each Column
with Stone Face Fence Option
Each Column
Columns with Stone Face Fence
Option
Each Column
with Stone Face Fence Option
Each Column
Columns with Stone Face Fence
Option
Each Column
37. Cast Stone Planter Curb and
foundation per structural (3/L4.2)
Linear Foot
38. Cast Stone Planter Curb and

39. Stone Seat Block and foundation per
structural (1/L4.3)
Linear Foot
40. Stone Seat Block Retaining and
Linear Foot
41. Stone Planter Wall and foundation
per structural (6/L4.3) x 24: height
Linear Foot
05 5213 - Pipe And Tube Railings (Handrails)
Item
No.
Description Measurement Quantity Cost
42. Handrails 2 L3.4 (both, furnished
and installed as shown)
Total for 2
rails

43. Powder Coat Finish as shown for
Both
Total for 2
rails

44. Deduct Powder coat and substitute
Galvanized wash / primer and
exterior acrylic enamel paint, satin
finish, 2 coats for both
Total for 2
rails

09 3233 - Site Stone Paving
Item
No.
45. Street marker stone and engraving
coordination (L4.16) (engraving in
129300) Installed, grouted and
Prosoco sealer
Each
46. Flagstone Paving Hill Country Flag
(Base Bid) Installed, grouted and
Prosoco sealer
Square Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 5

09 3233 - Site Stone Paving
Item
No.
47. Flagstone Paving Arizona
Flagstone (Alternate Selection)
Installed, grouted and Prosoco
sealer

48. Flagstone Paving Leuders
Flagstone (Alternate Selection)
Installed, grouted and Prosoco
sealer

49. Cut Stone Band (3/L419
Enlargment) Leuders Buff, Radial
Cut Installed, grouted and Prosoco
sealer

50. Flagstone Narrative Pavers and
Engraving Coordination (2/L4.19)
(engraving in 129300) Installed,
grouted and Prosoco sealer
Each
51. Stone Sealer Square Foot
12 9300 - Site Furnishings
Item
No.
52. 4 Square Stone Seating Block
engraving
Each Block
53. Bench Each
54. Metal Bollard Each
55. Oversize Flagstone Paver
Engraving, 300 character allowance
Each Paver
56. Elliot Knox Entry Identity Wall
Engraving, all wall
Lump Sum all
Wall

57. Elliot Knox Entry Identity Wall
Signage New Braunfels Tree Logo
with patina and Seal
Each
58. San Antonio Monument Engraving Each Wall
32 0516 - Aggregate Surfacing
Item
No.
59. Steel Edging Linear Foot
60. Decomposed Granite on Filter Fabric Square Foot
61. Limestone Aggregate (matches
block wall)
Cubic foot
62. 1 Rainbow Gravel with filter fabric
at ROW planter areas noted on
drawings
Cubic foot
63. #4-#7 Decorative Granite Aggregate
with filter fabric in areas as noted in
the drawings
Cubic Foot
32 1317 - Site Architectural Concrete Paving
Item
No.
64. Integral Color (any of 3 options) per
cubic yard
Cubic Yard
65. Integral Color (any of 3 options) per
square foot in 5 paving
Square Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 6
32 1317 - Site Architectural Concrete Paving
Item
No.
66. Broom Finish Square Foot
67. Light Sandblast Finish (includes
protection and cleanup)
Square Foot
68. Medium Sandblast Finish (includes
Square Foot
69. Heavy Sandblast Finish (includes
Square Foot
70. Tooled J oint Linear Foot
71. Sawcut J oint Linear Foot
72. Sealant joint and expansion material
with bond breaker if required
Linear Foot
32 1413 - Concrete Unit Paving
Item
No.
73. Galvanized Edge Restraint Angle
Straight Runs
Linear Foot
74. Galvanized Edge Restraint Angle
Curved Runs
Linear Foot
75. R-1 Paver Square Foot
76. S-1 Paver Square Foot
85. M-1 Paver Square Foot
88. H-1 Paver Square Foot
89. Paver Sealer Square Foot
90. San Antonio Turn Lane Arrow with
Pavers (Provide Surebond Cement
and attach both colors at transition to
eliminate individual paver units)
Each Arrow
91. Traffic Button (adhered to paver S-7)
either double or single, per detail
Each Button
32 3113 - Chain Link Fencing
Item
No.
92. Fence according to details with all
posts, braces, hardware and fabric
LF
93. End post Bracing EA
94. Footing and Post Set in Mow Curb EA
95. Footing and Post Set in Retaining
Wall
EA
96. Footing and Post set conventionally
with concrete footing in soil
Each
97. Bottom Rail LF
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 7

32 3129 - Exterior Wood Fencing
Item
No.
98. Fence according to details with all
posts, bottom kick board (s), top trim
LF
99. Footing and Post Set in Mow Curb Each
100 Footing and Post Set in Retaining
Wall
Each
101 Footing and Post Set in Mow Curb Each
102 Footing and Post set conventionally
with concrete footing in soil
Each
32 8400 - Landscape Irrigation
Item
No.
103 Baseline (BL3200 CMP-BLCMPNT)
Controller, pedestal and electrical
power coordination and connection
to
Each
104 Nibco T-113-K -2 Gate Valve and
Valve Box
Each
105 Wilkins Series S Wye Strainer 2 and
Valve Box
Each
106 Wilkins 975 with unions and wye
straine and isolation valve valve
Each
107 ARAD flow meter Each
108 Strongbox SBBC-45CR with
Concrete Pad
Each
109 Watertronics Waterpak Model
WPBV-2-2-240-1-45-30 with VFD
and disconnect, including
powdercoat enclosure and
equipment pad
Each
110 3/4 irrigation control valve, fittings,
wire connection and valve box
Each
111 1 irrigation control valve, fittings,
Each
112 1 1/2 irrigation control valve, fittings,
Each
113 2 irrigation control valve, fittings,
Each
114 H33DRC Quick Coupler (purple) and
Ball Valve, Stake and 12 Inch Round
Box, Complete
Each
115 Hunter ICZ-101 for Drip with Disc
Filter, PRV and Valve Box
Each
116 Netafim Techline CV-096-12 Linear Foot
117 Manual Flush Valve for drip sections Each
118 1 1/2 Pressurized main line and
fittings (purple)
Linear Foot
119 2 Pressurized main line and fittings
(purple pipe)
Linear Foot
120 2 Pressurized main line and
fittings (purple pipe)
Linear Foot
121 3 Pressurized main line and fittings
(purple pipe)
Linear Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 8
32 8400 - Landscape Irrigation
Item
No.
122 lateral line and fittings (purple
pipe)
Linear Foot
123 lateral line and fittings (purple
pipe)
Linear Foot
124 1 lateral line and fittings (purple
pipe)
Linear Foot
pipe)
Linear Foot
pipe)
Linear Foot
pipe)
Linear Foot
pipe)
Linear Foot
129 Hunter PGP/PGJ w/riser assembly
and nozzle (Purple)
Each
130 4 Pop-up spray Hunter INST-04
(Purple), w/riser assembly and
nozzle
Each
131 Hunter INST-12 (Purple)12 inch pop
up heads, w/riser assembly and
nozzle
Each
132 Hunter PCB-25 Bubbler nozzle
including riser assembly
Each
133 4 Schedule 40 PVC Sleeve installed
in place by trenching
Linear Foot
134 2 Schedule 40 PVC Conduit for
irrigation control wire installed in
place by trenching
Linear Foot
135 Trench and backfill 12 Linear Foot
136 Trench and backfill 18 Linear Foot
137 UF #14 Wire installed in trench Linear Foot
138 Valve Box, Black Cover 12 x 18 Each
139 Valve Box, Black Cover 12 Round Each
140 Valve Box, Black Cover 10 Round Each
141 Valve Box, Dark Green Cover, 6
Round
Each
142 Gravel Backfill for valve boxes Cubic Foot
32 9113 - Soil Preparation
Item
No.
143 Organic Amendment Cubic Yard
144 Fertilizer Amendment, mass soil
preparation
1000 square
feet

145 Plant pit back fill with prepared soil
mix using existing soil and chemical
and organic amendments
Cubic Yard
146 Rip existing soil to relieve
compaction at 12 inches deep
minimum on 12 inch centers
maximum
Square Foot
147 Soil Preparation: Rip and cultivate
soil to 12 inches deep
Square Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 9
32 9113 - Soil Preparation
Item
No.
148 Soil Conditioning, planting areas
including rototill and broadcasting
organic and fertilizer amendments
Square Foot
149 Soil Conditioning, turf areas
including rototill and broadcasting
fertilizer amendments
Square Foot
150 Soil Preparation including rototill and
installation of organic and fertilizer
amendments
Square Foot
32 9119 - Finish Landscape Grading
Item
No.
151 Rip existing soil to relieve
compaction at 12 inches deep
minimum on 12 inch centers
maximum
Square Foot
152 Import top soil, install, incorporate
and compact in place, per
compacted in place yard
Cubic Yard
153 Fine Grading Square Foot
154 Hard Rock Excavation Cubic Yard
32 9200 - Lawns And Turf Grass
Item
No.
155 Bermuda Sod Square Foot
32 9300 - Tree, Shrubs, Perennials, Vines and Ground Cover
Item
No.
ACCESSORIES FOR PLANTING
156 Steel Edging Linear Foot
157 Root Barrier Linear Foot
158 Mulch Top Dressing Linear Foot
159 Inspection and Sump Tubes Each
160 Tree Staking, 4 and Smaller Each
161 Tree Staking, 4 and Larger Each
162 Vine Trellis on Chainlink Fence 6 x
6 area or 36 square feet with
anchors, wire and ties as described
in details

163 Vine Trellis on Stone Wall or Fence
6 x 6 area or 36 square feet with
anchors, wire and ties as described
in details
Each
TREES
164 Acer grandidentatum Big Tooth
Maple (Specimen)
Each
165 Acer grandidentatum Big Tooth
Maple (Specimen)
Each
166 Quercus virginiana 'Highrise' /
'Highrise' Live Oak
Each
167 Quercus muehlenbergii / Chinkapin
Oak
Each
168 Taxodium distichum / Bald Cypress Each
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 10
Item
No.
TREES (contd)
169 Quercus shumardii / Shumard Red
Oak
Each
170 Ulmus crassifolia / Cedar Elm Each
171 Fraxinus texensis / Texas Ash Each
172 Carya illinoensis / Paper Shell Pecan Each
173 Eriobotrya japonica / J apanese Plum Each
174 Ficus carica 'Celeste' / 'Celeste Fig
Tree
Each
175 Lagerstroemia indica / 'Natchez'
Crape Myrtle
Each
176 Vitex agnus-castus / 'Shoal Creek'
Vitex
Each
Item
No.
177 Prunus mexicana / Mexican Plum Each
178 Hibiscus syriacus / Althea - Red Each
179 Osmanthus fragrans / 'Fruitland's'
Tea Olive
Each
180 Cercis Canadensis v Texensis /
Texas Red Bud
Each
181 Koelreuteria paniculata / Golden
Raintree
Each
182 Ulmus Americana Princeton /
Princeton American Elm
Each
SHRUBS
183 Abelia grandiflora / 'Edward
Goucher' Abelia
Each
184 Abelia X 'Rose Creek / 'Rose Creek'
Abelia
Each
185 Nandina domestica / 'Gulfstream' Each
186 Rosa sp 'Knockout' / Double Red
'Knockout' Rose
Each
187 Rosa sp 'Knockout' / Double Pink
'Knockout Rose
Each
188 Lagerstroemia sp. / 'Pokomoke'
Miniature Crape Myrtle
Each
189 Hesperaloe (yucca) parviflora / Red
Yucca
Each
190 Yucca rupicola / Twisted Leaf Yucca Each
191 Yucca recurvifolia / Soft Leaf Yucca Each
192 J asminum floridum / Florida J asmine
193 Myrica pusilla / Dwarf Wax Myrtle Each
194 Rhus glabra / smooth
sumacJ asminum floridum / Florida
J asmine
Each
195 Rapheolepis indica Pinkie / India
Hawthorne Pinkie
Each
196 Rhus glabra / Smooth Sumac Each
197 Agave salmana v Ferox / Giant
Century Plant
Each
198 Agave parryi / Parrys Century Plant Each
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 11
Item
No.
VINES
199 Clematis armandii / Evergreen
Clematis
Each
200 Rosa bankseia / Lady Banks Rose
(yellow)
Each
201 Rosa spp / Climbing Pinkie
Earthkind Rose
Each
202 Rosa spp / Climbing American
Beauty Rose
Each
203 Rosa spp / Climbing Mermaid
Beauty Rose
Each
204 Rosa spp / Climbing New Dawn
Rose
Each
205 Rosa spp / Climbing Dortmund
Rose
Each
206 Cocculus carolinus / Snailseed Vine Each
207 Gelsemium sempervirens Carolina
Yellow J essamine
Each
208 Hydrangea anomala petiolaris /
Climbing Hydrangea
Each
209 Trachelospermum jasminoides / Star
jasmine 3 Gallon
Each
210 Ficus pumila / fig vine Each
211 Passiflora Lavender Lady /
Lavender Lady Passion Vine
Each
212 Trachelospermum jasminoides / Star
jasmine 15 Gallon
Each
213 Campsis radicans / Orange Trumpet
Vine
Each
214 Clytostoma callistegoides / Lavender
Trumpet Vine
Each
GROUNDCOVER
215 Liriope muscari Big Blue Big Blue
Liriope
Each
216 Euonymous fortunei / Wintercreeper Each
217 Trachelospermum asiaticum / Asian
J asmine
Each
GRASSES
218 Muhlenbergia lindheimeri /
Lindheimer Muhly
Each
219 Muhlenbergia filipes / Gulf Muhly Each
220 Pennisetum alopecuroides 'Little
Bunny' / Little Bunny Fountain Grass
Each
221 Pennisetum alopecuroides 'Hameln/
Hameln Dwarf Fountain Grass
Each
PERENNIALS
222 Eupatorium greggii / Hardy
Ageratum
Each
223 Salvia greggii / Red Salvia Each
224 Hemerocallis spp / 'Hyperion' Daylilly Each
225 Nepeta faassenii ' Walker's Low' /
'Walker's Low' Catmint
Each
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 12

Item
No.
PERENNIALS
226 Phlomis russeliana / 'J erusalem
Sage'
Each
227 Rudbeckia fulgida / 'Goldstrum'
Black Eyed Susan
Each
228 Lavender stoechas / Spanish
Lavender
Each
229 Thymus sp. / Thyme Each
230 Rosmarinus officinalis / Hardy
Rosemary
Each
231 Rosmarinus officinalis Prostratus /
Creeping Rosemary
Each
232 Scabiosa 'Butterfly Blue' / 'Butterfly
Blue' Scabiosa
Each
233 Buddleia X Davidii / 'Nanho Blue'
Butterfly Bush
Each
234 Iris pseudocorus / Yellow Flag Iris Each
235 Iris spp. Louisiana Iris / Louisiana
Iris
Each
236 Leucantha sp / Russian Sage Each
237 Canna x Generalis Firecracker /
Dwarf Canna Lily Firecracker Red
Each
238 Agapanthus africanus / Blue lily of
the Nile
Each
239 Lantana sp New Gold / New Gold
Lantana
Each
32 9700 - Landscape Establishment
Item
No.
240 90 Day Establishment Period All
Areas
Per Calendar
Day

241 Provide Temporary Irrigation to non
irrigated landscape areas per acre of
landscape
Per Calendar
Day

33 4617 - Landscape Drainage
Item
No.
242 Lawn Area Drain in place 12x12
concrete with cast iron grate in place
Each
243 Lawn Area Drain, 9x9 NDS with
black grate in place
Each
244 Planter Area Drain, Atrium, 9 Black
NDS in place
Each
245 Planter Area Drain, Atrum 6 Black,
NDS in place
Each
246 Soil Separator Fabric Square Foot
247 4 Perforated Pipe, Filter Fabric and
Gravel, (includes trenching and back
fill up to 24 inch depth)
Linear Foot
UNIT PRICES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
012200 - Page 13

33 4617 - Landscape Drainage
Item
No.
248 18 to 24 inch deep trench and
backfill for 6 to 8 pipe
Linear Foot
249 24 to 36 inch trench and backfill for 6
to 8 pipe
Linear Foot
250 36 to 60 inch trench and backfill for 6
to 8 pipe
Linear Foot
251 6 PVC Drain Piping installed
including trench and backfill
Linear Foot
252 8 PVC Drain Piping installed
Linear Foot
253 12 PVE Drain Piping installed
Linear Foot
254 Connection to Civil Stubouts with 8
PVC or less
Each
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 - PAGE 1
SECTION 328400
SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Drawings, Division 0 and Division 1 apply to the work under this
Section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Work Included:
1. Furnishing and installing a complete irrigation system.
2. Trenching and backfill.
3. Furnishing and installing backflow prevention devices and pressure reducing valves.
4. Boring under existing paving for irrigation piping and remote control valve wiring at loca-
tions where sleeves or conduits are not indicated on plans.
5. Furnishing and installing sleeves for irrigation piping and remote control valves where in-
dicated.
6. Coordination and cost of installation of water meters and taps.
7. Coordination and cost of installation of electrical circuit only from switch/panel after the
panel secondary breakers to controller which includes only controller specific after panel
conduit and wiring.
8. Connecting and conforming to existing adjacent property irrigation systems (if any).
9. Inspections and tests.
B. Related Work in Other Sections:
Submittals According to the Owners documents.
Record Drawings at Project Closeout As provided in these specifications and as indicated in
the Owners project record requirement documents.
Finish Landscape Grading - Section 329119
Lawns and Grasses - Section 329200
Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcover - Section 329300
Landscape Establishment - Section 329350
Electrical Work on Site Reference Civil and Electrical Engineers drawings and specifications
1.3 RELATED WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT:
1. Electrical meters, panels and circuit breakers
2. Installation of water meter(s) which are to be paid for by irrigation contractor.
3. Sleeves for irrigation piping and remote control valve wiring under pavements and walls
a. Only sleeves and conduit for irrigation will be installed which are indicated on the
Civil Engineers documents, irrigation contractor is responsible for crossing all other
pavement areas at required depths and locations at their own expense.
1.4 INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS: Sprinkler lines shown on the drawings are essentially diagram-
matic. Locations of all sprinkler heads, valves, piping, wiring, etc., shall be established by the
Contractor at the time of construction. Spacing of the sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves
are shown on the drawings and shall be exceeded only with permission of the Owner's autho-
rized representative.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (REFER ALSO TO OWNERS DOCUMENTS)
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEMS - SECTION 328400

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 2
1. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with latest rules and regulations of safe-
ty orders of Division of Industrial Safety; the Uniform Plumbing Code and other applicable
laws or regulations, including the City of New Braunfels Plumbing Code.
2. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not con-
forming to these codes. Should the Contract Documents be at variance with the afore-
mentioned rules and regulations, notify Landscape Architect and get his instructions be-
fore proceeding with the work affected.
B. Testing:
1. Preliminary review of completed installation will be made by Landscape Architect prior to
backfilling of trenches and during hydrostatic testing.
2. Final review shall be made in conjunction with the final review of lawn, shrub and tree
planting.
1.6 SUBMITTALS: (REFER ALSO TO SECTION OWNERS DOCUMENTS)
A. Furnish required copies of manufacturer's literature, certifications, and operating instructions for
the complete list of materials, for the following items:
1. Irrigation Controller.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Gate Valves.
4. Pipe and Fittings.
5. Remote Control Valves.
6. Valve Boxes.
7. Quick Coupling Valves.
8. Sprinkler Heads.
9. Moisture Sensor and Mounting Device.
B. Substitutions:
1. Specific reference to manufacturers' names and products specified in this Section are
used as standards, but this implies no right to substitute other material or methods with-
out written approval of the Landscape Architect.
2. Installation of any approved substitution is Contractor's responsibility. Any changes re-
quired for installation of any approved substitution must be made to the satisfaction of
Landscape Architect and without additional cost to Owner.
3. Approval by Landscape Architect of substituted equipment and/or dimensional drawings
does not waive these requirements.

C. Record Drawings:
1. The contractor shall transfer all information noted on the field record print to the sepia,
vellum or Auto CAD disc as required by the owner. The drawings shall be to scale and
all indications shall be recorded in a neat, orderly way. The record sepia shall or Auto
CAD disc shall be turned over to the Landscape Architect before the Final Acceptance of
the project.
2. Indicate the actual dimensioned location of valves and quick couplers, irrigation main line
piping, sleeve crossing locations for main and wire, wire routing, meters, pumps and
backflow devices and any wire splices.
3. Locate all valves and quick couplers, irrigation main line piping wire and wire routing (at
100 feet on center) sleeve crossing locations for mains at walks and streets, meters,
pumps and backflow devices and any wire splices by GPS coordinates. Indicate station
numbers and GPS coordinates on the record drawings. Providing metal tags connected
to valves with corresponding GPS information is required. Coordinate additional specific
requirements with the City of New Braunfels Parks Department. Provide GPS informa-
tion in coordinate system suitable and coordinated with the City of New Braunfels.
4. Dimension main piping at 100 foot intervals and at all changes in direction. Dimension all
items from easily identified permanent features, such as buildings, curbs, fences, walks
or permanent features and lines.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 3
5. Contractors drawings shall be updated to show approved substitutions, if any, of material
including manufacturer's name, and catalogue number in a revised legend.
D. Prior to the end of the 90 day establishment period, provide to the General Contractor or Own-
ers Representative, provide to the owners building manager / system operator record drawings:
1. Four sets of color-coded, laminated reduced size irrigation as built drawings for each dif-
ferent controller
2. Four sets of a one sheet composite of the record drawings
a. The reduced drawings will be reduced to approximately 11 x 17 or as small as
practical to read valve numbers and zone areas.
b. The composite drawing will be approximately 30 x 42.
c. The reduced drawings and composite shall be color-coded to clearly indicate
zones or sections of valves and the approximate areas of coverage in different
colors such that no adjacent areas are the same color. Laminate the reduced and
composite drawing between two sheets of clear plastic.
3. Four CD or DVD disc copies of the AutoCAD files with the dimensioned record drawings.
Zones do not need to be colored coded on the disc in the AutoCAD format. Provide
scanned files in PDF format of the colored drawings. Include dimensions as described
above and GPS information on the AutoCAD file.
1.7 SPARE PARTS:
A. Provide 5 each type head and 10 each type of nozzle used as spare parts. Provide 2 sets of
keys to each controller and any locking enclosure. Provide 2 quick coupler keys with swivel
hose ells for every 8 quick couplers installed, minimum of 2. Provide 1 each set of tools re-
quired for adjustment of sprinklers, nozzles and valve operation. Deliver spare parts to the
owner at or before the time of training.
1.8 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TRAINING:
A. Schedule and hold a controller and system training session with the owners maintenance per-
sonnel prior to the end of the 90-day establishment period. Demonstrate operation of the con-
troller and generally train the owner on manual and automatic operation of the controllers and
valves, and. Instructions for the emergency shut down of the system main lines.
B. Contractor shall make a daily record of all work installed during each day on a construction
progress drawing. Construction drawings shall be on the construction site at all times while the
irrigation system is being installed. Update the drawings on a daily basis.
1. All indications shall be recorded in a neat, orderly way.
2. Contractor shall make a daily record of all work installed during each day on a construc-
tion progress drawing. Construction drawings shall be on the construction site at all
times while the irrigation system is being installed. Update the drawings on a daily basis.
3. All indications shall be recorded in a neat, orderly way.
1.9 J OB CONDITIONS:
A. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should utilities or other work not
shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify Landscape
Architect for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any
and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not
shown on plans.
B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site conditions. Should damage be in-
curred, this Contractor shall repair damage to its original condition or furnish and install equal
replacement at his expense.
C. Existing Irrigation System: All existing irrigation circuits shall be kept in operation at all times. If
the existing system is damaged by this construction, Contractor shall be responsible for imme-

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 4
diate repair of such damage. After each repair, all heads of the repaired circuit shall be re-
moved so that the lines can be cleared of all dirt and foreign matter.
1.10 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Work under this Section will be accepted by Landscape Architect upon
satisfactory completion of all work. Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility
for maintenance of the work. Said assumption does not relieve Contractor of obligations under
Warranty.
1.11 WARRANTY:
A. In addition to manufacturer's guarantees or warranties, all work shall be warranted for one year
from the date of Final Acceptance against defects in material, equipment and workmanship by
Contractor. Warranty shall also cover repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting
from leaks or other defects in materials, equipment and workmanship to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
B. Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc.,
during Guarantee Period. Report such conditions to Landscape Architect in writing.
1.12 CLEAN UP: Keep all areas of work clean, neat, and orderly at all times. Keep all paved areas
clean during installation operations.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS: Materials throughout the system shall be as specified and/or noted on the Draw-
ings, new and in perfect condition.
2.2 WATER METER(S): Shall be provided and installed by the local water district in accordance
with their requirements. Cost will be paid by (Owner) (Contractor).
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER(S):
1. Wilkins 975 series with Unions and Wye Strainer and gate valves according to details.
2. Enclosure to be Strongbox SBBC-45CR backflow enclosure.
2.4 PUMP STATION
A. Watertronics Station Assembly, Waterpak Model WPBV-2-2-240-1-45-30, 2 HP, single phase
Grunfos Pump in powder coated 14gauge weather resistant enclosure, lockable. Color per
landscape architect. Include VFD and Disconnect. Power to pump to be coordinated by this
contractor and installed by general contractor.
2.5 EQUIPMENT PADS:
A. Provide 4 thick broom finish 3000 psi concrete, reinforce similar to walk way. Set with top at 1
above highpoint of surrounding grade. Edge of concrete to be 2 greater than the equipment
enclosure dimension such that there is a 1 edge of concrete exposed beyond the edge of the
enclosures.
2.6 PIPE:
A. All pipe shall be Non-Potable purple in color, both main and lateral piping.
B. Piping on pressure side of irrigation control valves:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 5
1. Two and one-half (2 1/2") inch diameter and smaller - Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120-
1220, Schedule 40 and shall conform to ASTM D-1785-73.
C. Piping on non-pressure side of irrigation control valves:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120-1220, SDR 21.0, Class 200, and shall conform to ASTM
D-2241-73, except one-half (1/2") inch diameter shall be Class 315.
D. Identification: All piping shall be purple and continuously and permanently marked with the fol-
lowing:
1. Manufacturer's name or trademark, size, schedule, and type of pipe, working pressure at
73 degrees F. and National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.) approval.
2.7 FITTINGS:
A. Fittings for Solvent-Welded Pipe:
1. Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride, standard weight, as manufactured by "Sloane", "Lasco",
or approved equal, to meet ASTM D-2466-73 and D-2467-73.
2. Threaded PVC nipples - Schedule 80 PVC.
B. Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe (Flex-J oints):
1. Polyallomer as manufactured by "Flintkote" or approved equal.
2. Compression type of CPVC as manufactured by "Pepco".
C. Fittings for Swing J oints:
1. Supply three (3) Schedule 40 "Marlex" elbows.
2. Threaded PVC nipples - Schedule 80 PVC.
2.8 GATE VALVES:
A. Up to Three (3") Inch Size: 125 Pound bronze construction, non-rising stem type, sized to line.
"Crane" #438; "NIBCO" #T113; or approved equal.
2.9 SLEEVE FOR CONTROL WIRE AND WATER LINE: PVC 1126-1220, Schedule 40 pipe or
Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
2.10 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER: Baseline ( bl3200cmp-blcmpnt) with Cell phone connection and
one flow meter ( match meter size) per meter. Use Arad Flow meters by Netafim.
2.11 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
A. Valves are to be Hunter ICV and or ICZ or approved equal.
2.12 CONTROL WIRE:
A. Wire: Solid copper wire, U.L. approved for direct burial in ground. Minimum gauge: #14 UF.
(#12 UF for runs over 1,000 LF.) Common ground wire shall be white.
B. Splicing Materials: Scotchlock Spring Connector. "Scotchlock" #3576 Sealing Pack or similar
waterproof sealant filled locking water proof connector as approved through submittals.
2.13 VALVE BOXES: To be injection-moulded of Polyesters and fibrous inorganic temperature resis-
tant components. Box shall provide adequate clearance to operate and service valve. Box and
lid to be black, as manufactured by "Ametek", "Christy", "Carson", or equal.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 6
A. For Remote Control Valve: Shall be rectangular, approximately ten (10") inches by fourteen
(14") inches inside dimensions by fifteen (15") inches deep.
B. For Gate Valves and Quick Coupler Valves: Shall be round, approximately nine (9") inches in-
side diameter by ten (10") inches deep.
2.14 QUICK COUPLING VALVES:
A. Valve and key shall be "Hunter", #33DRC- Purple cover.
B. Furnish two valve keys fitted with three-quarter (3/4") inch swivel hose ells.
2.15 SPRINKLER HEADS: Heads to be as shown on the drawings, where possible supply with
black finish.
2.16 STEEL STAKES AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE CLAMPS: As approved.
2.17 SAND BACKFILL: Sand for backfill shall be clean masonry sand free of stones or debris.
2.18 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKS: Shall be "Sakrete" or "Handi-Mix" concrete mix or equal.
2.19 CONDUITS: All conduits for irrigation mains and laterals shall be six (6") inch Schedule 40
PVC for remote control wiring and controller power feed, common conduit, unless otherwise
specified on the drawings or existing in the field. Use galvanized steel pipe only under public
roads for electrical power.
2.20 DRIP SYSTEM:
A. Remote Control Valve Hunter ICZ-101 Purple. Above valve is fitted with pressure regulator.
Specified valve to be factory set up at 45 psi fitted with Y type strainer downstream of all remote
control valves.
B. Controllers - As shown on drawings.
C. Drip Line and other components: Reference Drawings.
D. Valve Boxes - Ametek.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LAYOUT:
A. No consideration will be given to any design changes until after the awarding of the contract.
Should any changes be deemed necessary after award of contract, for proper installation and
operation of the system, such changes shall be negotiated by the Landscape Architect (and
based upon the Unit Price Schedule where applicable).
B. Layout work as accurately as possible to drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic to the extent
that swing joints, offsets and all fittings are not shown.
C. Full and complete coverage is required. Contractor shall make any necessary minor adjust-
ments to layout required to achieve full coverage of irrigated areas at no additional cost to Own-
er.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 7
D. Where connections to existing stubouts are required, make necessary adjustments should stubs
be located differently in the Drawings. Adjust layout as necessary to install around existing
work.
E. Where piping is shown to be under paved areas but running parallel and adjacent to planted
area, the intent is to install piping in planted areas. Do not install directly over another line in
same trench.
F. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish the location of all sprinkler heads on all turf
areas in order to assure proper coverage of all areas. In no case shall spacing of sprinkler
heads exceed distances shown on the drawings and/or those specified. Pipe sizes shall con-
form to those shown on the drawings. No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted
but substitutions of larger sizes may be approved. All pipe damaged or rejected because of de-
fects shall be removed from the site at the time of said rejection.
G. The Contractor will stake out the location of each run of pipe and all sprinkler heads of sprinkler
valve locations prior to trenching. Before installation is started in a given area, the Landscape
Architect shall check all locations and give his approval.
3.2 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING:
A. Perform all excavations as required for installation of work included under this Section, including
shoring of earth banks, if necessary. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations,
etc., damaged or cut as a result of the excavations, to their original condition.
B. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly
notify Landscape Architect for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make Con-
tractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery
of such utilities. Indicate such utility crossings on the Record Drawings promptly.
C. Dig trenches wide enough to allow a minimum of four (4") inches between parallel pipe lines.
Trenches shall be of sufficient depth to provide minimum cover from finish grade as follows:
1. Over pipe on pressure side of irrigation control valve, control wires and quick coupling
valves: (18) (24) (30) inches.
2. Over pipe on non-pressure side of irrigation control valve: (12) (18) inches.
3. Where system is installed over structure, lay pipe on top of soil separator. Protect soil
separator with two (2") inch layer of specified planting soil mix or sand.
4. All PVC pipe under paving shall be bedded with minimum of four (4") inches of sand
backfill on all sides and have twenty four (24") inch cover.
5. All mains shall be sloped to drain valves where applicable.
D. Backfill all pressurized mains and marker boxes with a minimum of four (4") inches of sand
Should existing paving require cutting, saw cut paving a minimum twelve (12") inches wide,
compact backfill to ninety five (95%) percent dry density; dispose of waste off site. Patch to
match existing pavement.
3.3 BORING UNDER EXISTING PAVEMENTS:
A. The boring shall proceed from a pit provided for the boring equipment and workmen. Excava-
tion for pits and installation shall be as described under "Excavating and Trenching". The loca-
tion of the pit shall not interfere with existing plant materials or structures designated to remain.
B. Holes shall be bored mechanically. Where holes required are larger than two (2") inches, the
bore shall be completed using a pilot hole. The two (2") inch hole shall be bored the entire
length of the crossing and shall be checked on the opposite end for line and grade. If accepta-
ble, this hole shall serve as the centerline for the larger hole to be bored. Lateral and vertical to-
lerance is limited to one (1") inch in ten (10') feet, provided that the variation be regular and oc-
cur only in one direction.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 8
C. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to
lubricate cutting. J etting shall not be permitted.
1. In unconsolidated soil formations, a gel-forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of at least
ten (10%) percent of high-grade processed bentonite may be used to consolidate cut-
tings, seal the hole walls and furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and
installation of the pipe.
D. Excavated material will be placed near the top of the working pit and disposed of as required.
Refer to other authorities for jurisdiction over other installations.
3.4 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS:
A. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tess and
where the rubber-gasketed main terminates.
B. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of thirty six (36) to forty eight (48) hours following
the completion of pouring of the blocks.
C. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufactur-
er's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created
by the maximum internal water pressure.
3.5 WATER METER(S): Install as per the requirements of the local water district and local codes.
Costs will be paid by Contractor.
3.6 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE: Install according to local codes. House in a rectangular con-
crete box of sufficient size to easily allow repair or replacement of unit.
3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE: Install according to local codes and manufacturer's latest
printed instructions.
3.8 CONDUITS AND SLEEVES:
A. Furnish and install conduit where control wires pass under or through walls. Conduits to be of
adequate size to accommodate retrieval for repair of wiring and shall extend twelve (12") inches
beyond edge of walls.
B. Install sleeves for all pipes passing through or under walls, walks and paving as shown on
Drawings. Sleeving to be of adequate size to accommodate retrieval for repair of wiring or pip-
ing and shall extend twelve (12") inches beyond edge of paving or other construction.
C. Coordinate conduit and sleeve installation with other trades as required.
3.9 PIPE LINE ASSEMBLY:
A. General:
1. Install pipes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's latest printed instructions.
2. Clean all pipes and fittings of dirt, scales and moisture before assembly.
3. All pipe, fittings and valves, etc., shall be carefully placed in the trenches. Interior of
pipes shall be kept free from dirt and debris and when pipe laying is not in progress, open
ends of pipe shall be closed by approved means.
4. All lateral connections to the mainline as well as all other connections shall be made to
the side of the mainline pipe. No connections to the top of the line shall be allowed.
B. Solvent-Welded J oints for PVC Pipes:
1. Use solvents and methods by pipe manufacturer.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 9
2. Cure joint a minimum of one hour before applying any external stress on the piping and
at least twenty four (24) hours before placing the joint under water pressure.
C. Threaded J oints for Plastic Pipes:
1. Use Teflon tape on the threaded PVC fittings except where Marlex fittings are used.
2. Use strap-type friction wrench only. Do not use metal-jawed wrench.
3. When connection is plastic to metal, male adaptors shall be used. The male adaptor
shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. J oint compound shall be Tef-
lon tape or equal upon approval.
D. Threaded J oints for Galvanized Steel Pipes:
1. Factory-made nipples shall be used wherever possible. Field-cut threads in pipes will be
permitted only where absolutely necessary; when field threading, cut threads accurately
on axis with sharp dies.
2. Use pipe joint compound to make threads only.
E. J oints for Polyethylene Pipes:
1. Double-clamp all connections one and one-quarter (1 1/4") inch diameter and greater.
2. Make all connections between polyethylene pipes and metal valves or pipes with
threaded fittings using male adaptors.
F. Laying of Pipe:
1. Pipes shall be bedded in at least two (2") inches of finely divided material with no rocks or
clods over one (1") inch diameter to provide a uniform bearing.
2. Pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and con-
traction. One additional foot per 100 feet of pipe is the minimum allowance for snaking.
3. Do not lay PVC pipe when there is water in the trench.
4. Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction
as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Plastic pipe shall be cut with PVC pipe cutters or hacksaw, or in a manner so as to en-
sure a square cut. Burrs at cut ends shall be removed prior to installation so that a
smooth unobstructed flow will be obtained.
6. All plastic to plastic joints shall be solvent-weld joints or slip seal joints. Only the solvent
recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be used. All plastic pipe and fittings shall
be installed as outlined and instructed by the pipe manufacturer and it shall be the Con-
tractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the pipe manufacturer for any field as-
sistance that may be necessary. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the
correct installation.
7. Unless waived by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall install bell type or ap-
proved slip joint fitting at a minimum of twenty (20') feet OC for all pressurized mains.
3.10 GATE VALVES: Group valves together and locate in planted areas where possible. Box shall
be flush with finish grade. (For three (3") inches or larger rubber-gasketed pipe, anchor valve
with thrust block.)
3.11 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVES: Install control valves in valve boxes where shown and
group together where practical. Place no closer than twelve (12") inches to walk edges, build-
ings and walls. Valve boxes shall be flush with finish grade.
3.12 SPRINKLER HEADS:
A. Install spray heads and bubbler heads on as detailed on the Drawings.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 10
3.13 QUICK COUPLING VALVES: Quick coupling valves shall be installed on a swing joint assem-
bly as detailed on the Drawings and shall include valve box, gravel and ball valves as shown.
3.14 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER:
A. Install per local code and manufacturer's latest printed instructions.
B. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with station
setting beginning with Stations 1, 2, 3, etc.
C. Affix controller name (i.e. "Controller A") on inside of controller cabinet door with letters mini-
mum of one (1") inch high. Affix a non-fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below
controller name. Irrigation diagram to be sealed between two sheets of 20 mil (minimum) plas-
tic.
1. Irrigation diagram shall be as described in the general record drawing section of these
specifications.
3.15 CONTROL WIRING:
A. Install control wires with sprinkler mains and laterals in common trenches wherever possible.
Lay to the side of pipe line. Provide looped slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow
for contraction of wires. Tie wires in bundles at ten (10') foot intervals.
B. Control wire splices at remote control valves to be crimped and sealed with specified splicing
materials. Line splices will be allowed only on runs of more than 500 feet. Line splices to be
Marconi-type taped and sealed with Scotchkote sealer.
C. Install a minimum of one (1) extra control wire to the control valve located the greatest distance
from the controller in both directions and label each end blank.
3.16 CLOSING OF PIPE AND FLUSHING OF LINES:
A. Cap or plug all openings as soon as lines have been installed to prevent entrance of materials
that would obstruct the pipe. Leave in place until removal is necessary for completion of instal-
lation.
B. Thoroughly flush out all water lines before installing heads, valves and other hydrants.
C. Test as specified.
D. Upon completion of testing, complete assembly and adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribu-
tion.
E. All sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular to finished grades un-
less otherwise designated on the drawings, or otherwise specified. Sprinkler heads adjacent to
existing walls, curbs and other paved areas, shall be set to grade. Sprinkler heads which are to
be installed in lawn areas where the turf has not yet been established shall be set one (1") inch
above the proposed finish grade. Heads installed in this manner will be lowered to grade when
the turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable destruction. Such
lowering of heads shall be done by this Contractor as part of the original contract with no addi-
tional cost to the Owner.
3.17 TESTING:
A. Make hydrostatic tests when welded PVC joints have cured as per manufacturer's instructions.
1. Pressurized Mains:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
328400 PAGE 11
a. Completely install water meter, mains, isolation valves and control valves. Do not
install laterals.
b. Open all isolation valves.
c. Fill all lines with water and shut off at meter.
d. Pressurize the main with air to 70 psi. Monitor gauge for pressure loss for four (4)
hours.
e. Leave lines and fittings exposed throughout testing period.
f. Leaks resulting from tests shall be repaired and tests repeated until the system
passes.
g. Test all isolation valves for leakage.
2. Non-Pressure Laterals:
a. Test piping after laterals and risers are installed and system is fully operational.
b. Leave trenches open to detect possible leaks.
B. Submit written requests for inspections to the Landscape Architect at least forty eight (48) hours
prior to anticipated inspection date.
3.18 BACKFILL AND COMPACTING:
A. After system is operating and required tests and inspections have been made, backfill excava-
tions and trenches with clean soil, free of debris.
B. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to minimum
ninety five (95%) percent density under pavements, eighty five (85%) percent under planted
areas.
C. Compact trenches in areas to be planted by thoroughly flooding the backfill. J etting process
may be used in those areas.
1. Dress off all areas to finish grades.
D. Backfill to remain solid with out settlement throughout the warranty period. Contractor shall re-
turn upon request at no additional expense and correct backfill that has settled more than 1/4
inch in any 10 feet length of trench area during the warranty period. Repair of backfill shall in-
clude repairing or replacing landscape affected by the repair work.
3.19 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall warrant all materials and workmanship for (one (1) year
from Final Acceptance) (as specified under Section 01700 "Contract Closeout").
3.20 CLEAN UP: Clean up and remove all debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance
to satisfaction of Landscape Architect.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 1
SECTION 044213
SITE STONE VENEER AND CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry:
1. Anchored and adhered to concrete or unit masonry backup.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
2. Engineers Section "Concrete Unit Masonry"
3. Engineers Division 7 Sealants
4. Section 047200 Cast Stone.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
A. Contractor is required to provide unit pricing as detailed in Section 012201 for each furnished
item as described in the unit price, shown on the drawings and conforming to these
specifications.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Masonry mix, anchors, shims and accessories.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least five samples in each set for each type of
stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics
expected in completed Work
2. For each color of mortar required together with the mix design for the mortar.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Stone Fabrication and Anchoring Shop Drawings:
1. Provide complete fabrication drawings and details for all stone. Anchoring drawing and
materials to be sealed by a qualified engineer. Generally the fabrication and
anchor/setting drawings shall include
a. Dimensions and connection points and methods of stone.
b. Anchor and anchor connections to stone and to substrate.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 2
B. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, sources of supply, and other information as
required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of
aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations
are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone
fitters.
B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each different variety of stone from the same quarry for
the entire project. Quarry shall have resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockups to include material at one column and an adjacent 5 length of each
different wall by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include cast stone coping at top of mockup for feature wall and at top of site wall
and column and at column base.
b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.
3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar
and sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of
workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities Architect
specifically approves in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at the project site not more than 90 days prior
to construction.
A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 3
1.8 PROJ ECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is
not in progress.
B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of
stone masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on
the ground and over the wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by
frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement,
veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry.
B. Advise others about the clearances required to allow stone surfaces to align and coordinate with
stone and cast stone or curbing thicknesses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE
A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and
from sources as shown on the drawings.
2.2 LIMESTONE
A. Limestone: Comply with ASTM C 568.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone as shown on the
drawings.
B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic
effects.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 4
2.3 OTHER STONE: Narrow ledge stone and flagstone.
A. Provide sound natural stone as follows:
B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic
effects.
2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry
mortar.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
a. Match Architect's sample.
E. Latex Additive: Manufacturers standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
F. Water: Potable.
2.5 ANCHORS FOR CUT STONE VENEER AND VENEER PIECES
A. Following Anchor types are to be used for all stone that is not either random mosaic flagstone,
or ledgestone.
B. Stone Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone
trim units and holes for fasteners or post installed anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or
framing as indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Halfen Anchoring Systems; Meadow Burke.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
C. Materials: Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. Fabricate
dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 5
D. Fasteners for Stone Trim Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.
E. Post installed Anchor Bolts for Fastening Stone Trim Anchors: Chemical anchors made from
stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2
for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors/
2.6 VENEER ANCHORS
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
B. Size: Sufficient to extend at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches, through stone
masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
C. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- diameter, hot dip galvanized
wire.
1. Ties are bent in the form of loops with legs not less than 15 inches in length and with last
2 inches bent at 90 degrees.
D. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors (for stone other than 3 and 4 inch thick cut stone) including
random mosaic flagstone and ledgestone veneers:
1. Not less than 0.030-inch- thick by 7/8-inch- wide galvanized sheet with corrugations
having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch.
2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.078-inch- thick,
stainless-steel sheet.
E. Polymer-Coated, Steel Tapping Screws for Concrete Masonry: Self-tapping screws with
specially designed threads for tapping and wedging into masonry, with hex washer head and
neoprene washer, 3/16-inch diameter by 1-1/2-inch length, and with organic polymer coating
with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.
B. Asphalt Dampproofing: Asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or IV.
C. Weep Hole/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Mesh Weep Holes/Vents: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full
width of head joint and 2 inches high by thickness of stone masonry; in color selected
from manufacturer's standard.
2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry
surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended
use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 6
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Dominion Restoration Products.
c. EaCo Chem, Inc.
d. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
e. Prosoco, Inc.
2.9 MASONRY/STONE SEALER:
A. Provide a siloxane type impregnating oil and water resistant sealer which is non-staining and
compatible with the stone, generally is invisible and does not change the natural appearance of
the stone. Verify compatibility with all stone materials.
1. Prosoco SLX 100 or approved equivalent.
2.10 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N.
2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Mix to match Architect's sample.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stone to comply with sizes, shapes, and tolerances recommended by applicable stone
association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.
1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
B. Select and cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details
on Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 7
D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.
E. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
F. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:
1. Thickness: 3 and 4 inch as noted plus or minus inch. Thickness does not include
projection of pitched faces.
G. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as shown on the drawings.
H. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
1. Finish: As shown on the drawings.
a. Finish exposed ends of copings same as front and back faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
3.3 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight
and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make edges
straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry fabricated.
3. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split.
B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for
intended use.
C. Arrange stones as shown on the drawings and approved through mock-ups.
D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 8
E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and
other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone
accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established
relationships and indicated tolerances.
F. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor
variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4
inch at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch at widest points.
G. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Provide Sealant submittal for approval. Reference engineers documents.
H. Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade
elevations.
2. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below
grade.
3. Allow cementitious dampproofing formulations to cure before setting dampproofed stone.
Do not damage or remove dampproofing in the course of handling and setting stone.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control
joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet
or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as variation of the average
plane of the face of each stone from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.
E. Variation in Mortar-J oint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for
thickness of stone.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY
A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in concrete.
B. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with individual wire veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Embed anchors in unit masonry mortar joints or grouted cells for distance at least
one-half of unit masonry thickness.
C. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-
1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 9
D. Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional
anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding
12 inches.
E. Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches.
F. Anchor stone trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening to
substrate and inserting tabs and dowels into kerfs and holes in stone units. Provide
compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels
and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.
G. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
into mortar joints as stone is set.
H. Fill cavity between stone masonry and backup construction with grout as construction
progresses unless otherwise indicated.
1. Place mortar spots in cavity at veneer anchors to maintain spacing.
2. Slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
A. Coat backs of stone units and face of masonry back-up with cement-paste bond coat, then
butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be
forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling
space between units and masonry back-up.
B. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch before setting mortar
has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
3.7 SPECIAL SURFACE APPLICATON:
A. Old World Sack and Rub finish on limestone to be accomplished by first adhering stone to
substrate with mortar, allow mortar to set and cure. After stone has cured and there is ample
are ready apply surface grout covering a substantial amount of stone but leaving some stone
exposed, allow to surface grout to partially set..Complete by brushing and then tragging a heavy
burlap sack over the surface.
B. Surface color of grout to be similar to stone color.
C. Process to be approved through mock-ups.
3.8 POINTING
A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.
Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing
mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed.
B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch
deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 10
C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the
following joint profile:
1. J oint Profile: Raked as approved through mock up.
3.9 ADJ USTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if
methods and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone
masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
3.10 SEALING
A. After verification of compatibility with stone and cast stone and completion of all sealers,
cleaning and grouting, apply sealer according to the manufacturers requirements on all stone
installed on the project.
3.11 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of all masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-
contaminated sand, by loading and hauling to legal disposal location off site..
END OF SECTION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 11
PART 4 - PHOTOGRAPHS / EXAMPLES
4.1 STONE VENEER MATERIALS;
A. Refer as follows for examples of stone veneer with photographic representations of some of the
alternative options and examples of appropriate character and quality. The following
photographs are to serve as a guide to contractors about the expectations of the quality of some
of the stone veneer where photographs were available as examples for this project.
4.2 4 SQUARE SEATING BLOCK SIMILAR PROJ ECT
A. Provide as described in this section. Image of expected construction and quality as follows:
1. Provide tooled edges at cleft or rock face where manufacturer/quarrying of stone results
in cut face on any side. Oversize as required to allow conformation to dimensions and
allow for hand tooling.
B.
C.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 12
4.3 Random Mosaic Wall (Flagstone) natural finish:
A.
4.4 Random Stone with Old World Sack and Rub finish
A.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
044213 - Page 13
4.5 Stone planter curb Similar to 2/L4.2
A.
END OF PART 4

WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 1
SECTION 047200
CAST STONE MASONRY AND STONE CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cast stone trim including the following:
a. Coping
b. Wall caps
c. Pilasters
d. Column covers
e. Cast or limestone curbing
1. Division 03 Section "Precast Architectural Concrete."
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include
dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.
1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.
2. Include curb jointing plans with piece and joint cuts for layout and dimensioning.
3. Include engineering for anchors with the shop drawings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each color and texture of stone or cast stone required, 10 inches square in size.
2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Provide mix design information for colored mortar.
E. Full-Size Samples: For each different color, texture and/or shape of cast stone unit required.
1. Make available for Architect's review at Project site.
2. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work.
SITE CAST STONE MASONRY AND STONE CURBS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 2
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according
to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
1. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.
C. Stone Curbing: Samples for review in the shape and profile indicated.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those
indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units,
and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute.
B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source
or producer for each aggregate.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to
minimize the need for on-site storage.
B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers,
securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination can be avoided.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven
days after completing cleaning.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAST STONE AND STONE SETTING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total
alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required
to produce cast stone color indicated.
C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and
colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and
colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable free from carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other
alkalis.
F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.
1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by
mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and
other admixtures used.
3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not
add to zero-slump concrete mixes.
4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60Use
galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast
stone material.
1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.
2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
I. Shims: Heckman products or equivalent high density, high impact shims, thickness as required.
2.2 CAST STONE UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, selection of manufacturer shall be
based on meeting qualifications stated in Part 1, experience, quality, references, ability to
schedule and perform the work suitably:
B. Regional Materials: Cast stone units shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from
aggregate and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
C. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-
cast method.
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing cycles.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 4
D. Fabricate units with sharp arrises and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on
all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1% to drain unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch.
2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the
length of unit or 1/8 inch whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch
3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is
greater.
4. Location of Grooves, False J oints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary
from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on
unformed surfaces.
F. Cure units as follows:
1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and
temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.
2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:
a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.
b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.
c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.
d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.
G. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
H. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color described on the
drawings.
A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."
B. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar] shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site
from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,
within 500 miles of Project site.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
F. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
available products that may be incorporated into the Work or approved equivalents:
a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.
b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.
c. Essroc, Italcementi Group
d. Holcim (US) IncLafarge North America Inc
e. Lehigh Cement Company;

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 5
f. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
G. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the following]
[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following or approved equivalent:
a. Lafarge North America Inc.;
b. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement
H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following or equivalents:
a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
b. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
I. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
J . Water: Potable.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying
with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
C. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring
or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cast
stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and
adjacent masonry materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the following]
[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following or approved equivalent:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
2.5 MORTAR MIXES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 6
B. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. For setting mortar, use Type N.
2. For pointing mortar, use Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry by weight.
3. Mix to match approved Architect's sample.
4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints.
5. one test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
2.6 SEALER
A. Provide surface impregnating sealer derived from organo-siloxane compounds that will be
invisible, will change the appearance of the stone or cast stone and which is stain / oil resistant.
1. Prosoco SLX100 or approved equivalent.
B. Verify compatibility with cast stone and provide alternative similar product if determined to be
not compatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges
and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to
secure units in place.
2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other
Sections.
B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.
C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set units with joints 3/8 in general to 1/2 maximum wide unless otherwise indicated.
2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to
receive sealant.
7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 7
D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to
uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess
mortar as joints are raked.
E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch.
Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next
layer.
F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and
pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated.
1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated.
3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less 3/8 inch width.
4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints
before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Division 07 Section "J oint Sealants."
3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED J OINTS
A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges
and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to
secure units in place.
2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations
indicated with uniform joints.
B. Fill cavities with mortar or grout.
C. Fill anchor holes with sealant.
1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at
ends of dowels.
D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material
of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone
a distance at least equal to width of joint.
E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from
joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do
not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.
1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.
F. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before
applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Division 07 Section "J oint Sealants."
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
047200 PAGE 8
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
C. Variation in J oint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-
fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with
adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch,
except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.
A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of cast stone.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
3.6 SEAL:
A. After acceptance and completion of all installation, including sealants and grouting apply sealer
as specified to achieve water and stain resistance according to manufacturers requirements.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 1
SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 2
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts and sleeve, escutcheon and collar at post Include post and rail corner in sample.
a. Show method of connection and finishing members at intersections.
A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 3
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 cold formed or ASTM A 513.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads or indicated on the drawings.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. Provide
tamper resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Primer and Powder Coat Enamel: Rail to be primed and prepared for powder coat finish as
required by the powder coat supplier. Comply with all requirements.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 4
F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound.
1. Water-Resistant Product: Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water
exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is
recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage and comply with structural loads
B. Completely assemble railings in the shop to eliminate any field splicing and assembly.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
J . Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 5
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside
dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate
forming bottom closure.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
3. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
1. Railings Indicated to Receive "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Primer to be compatible with final powder coat paint coating and the powdercoat
supplier/applicator shall determine primer type for the galvanizing finish products.
2. Powder coat color as determined through samples and mock-ups.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
3.3 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to paving with vandal
resistant decorative screw/bolts
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
055213 - Page 7
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

WALNUT AVENUE
TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 1

SECTION 093233
STONE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Stone paving on latex modified thick bed mortar with latex modified grout joints.
2. Coordination with other sections:
a. Coordinate with Section 129300 Site Furnishings where engraving and text to be
applied to certain amounts of stone will be required.
b. Furnish Stone as approved to that section, and take delivery and install the
engraved stone as a part of this work.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive-hardness value of 12, as determined per
ASTM C 241.
B. Definition of Terms: The standards shall be those published by the National Building Granite
Quarries Association, Inc.
C. Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028, values as follows:
1. Level Surfaces: A minimum of inch.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide as follows:
1. Product Data: Provide product information and data for each variety of stone, stone
accessories, and other manufactured products specified to be applied to or incorporated
in the work.
2. Shop Drawings: Show setting details and dimensions of stone paving, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of jointing; and details
showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of related work.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 2
3. Grout Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's standard samples of actual products
showing the full range of colors available showing color and texture expected in
completed Work.
4. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone
required; not less than approximate actual size and thickness. Include 2 or more samples
in each set delivered to the jobsite showing the full range of variations in appearance
characteristics expected in completed Work.
5. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
6. Maintenance Data: For stone paving to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by
Installer and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for
products.
7. Coordinate with Section 129300 Site Furnishings for delivery of samples of engraving
and text to be applied to stone.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed stone paving
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in producing stone paving and flooring
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single
quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties and to cut and finish material without delaying the Work.
1. Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in
another Section of the Specifications.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout,
admixture, stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a single manufacturer for each
product.
1.7 MOCK UPS:
A. Mockups: Before installing stone paving, construct mockups to verify selections made under
Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Build mockups as follows:
a. Approximately 10 feet square for each stone type or larger size as required to
sufficiently illustrate the installed patterns indicated.
b. Mock-up to include mortar setting of the stone, sealant joint and grout joint
samples for review and approval.
1) After approval of unsealed mock-up, apply specified sealer to of the
mockup surface for final mock-up approval.
3. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 3
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract
Documents contained in mockups, unless the Architect specifically approves those
deviations in writing.
b. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other causes.
1. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof covers. Arrange to
distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to
prevent condensation.
2. Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover, and in dry location.
3. Store aggregate materials covered and in dry location.
C. Defective material: Any piece of stone showing flaws or imperfections upon receipt at the
storage facility shall be referred to the Design Professional for determination as to whether it
shall be rejected or redressed for use prior to installation.
A. Do not set stone paving when air temperature or material temperature is below 50 deg F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 deg F during installation of stone flooring and for
7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by fabricator's or supplier's
instructions.
C. Weather Limitations for Stone Paving: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect stone paving against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is 40 deg F and falling. Maintain and control temperature grout and mortar
materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect stone paving when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial
shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE SOURCES
A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the stone varieties
indicated in the Finish Schedule in the drawings and as approved through the mock-up process
for each stone type.
B. All stone shall be of standard architectural grade, free of cracks, seams or starts which may
impair its structural integrity or function. Texture and finsish shall be within the range of
samples approved by the Design Professional.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 4
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work are as shown on the drawings. Use one manufacturer and
quarry source for each type of stone shown in the drawings.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Glen-Gery Corporation.
b. Lafarge Corporation.
c. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
d. Riverton Corporation (The).
2. Mortar Pigments:
a. Bayer Corporation; Industrial Chemicals Div.
b. Davis Colors.
c. Lafarge Corporation.
d. Solomon Colors.
3. Latex additive:
a. Laticrete International or equivalent.
4. Latex-Portland Cement Grouts:
a. Laticrete International, Inc.
2.3 STONE, GENERAL
A. Match approved samples for variety, color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
B. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural integrity or function.
C. Provide stone from a single quarry for each variety of stone required.
1. If descriptions of two or more stone types are identical except for finish, provide the same
variety from the same source for each type with designated finish on each
D. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure that as-quarried block orientations yield finished stone with
required characteristics.
E. Match Architect's samples for variety, color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2.4 STONE
A. Flagstone:
1. Locally available natural stone material.
2. Contractor shall confirm selection of flagstone stone material is suitable for pedestrian
paving.
3. Pattern and sizes: As shown on the drawings.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 5
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II; natural color, white, or a blend to produce mortar
color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows:
1. Water-Emulsion Latex Additive: Add at Project site to factory-packaged dry-mortar mix
specified or as recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
2.6 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: Provide colors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Match color of stone as approved, provide selection from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, for materials described in H-2.4, composed as
follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared dry-grout mix
and latex additive to comply with the following requirements:
C. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
1. Latex Additive: Laticrete product as approved.
2.7 SEALER AND STONE CLEANER
A. Sealer: SLX 100 Water and Oil Repellant. Manufactured by Prosoco Inc. (800)-255-4255.
B. Cleaner for Sealed Stone: Prosoco Stand Off All Surfaces Cleaner. Manufactured by Prosoco
Inc. (800)-255-4255.
C. Apply to all stone work after installation.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: If required, use resilient plastic shims, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint
thicknesses. Where shims are to support removable stone, use UV resistant plastic shims and
adhere to subslab with construction adhesive.
B. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4 mils thick.
2.9 STONE FABRICATION
A. Order and layout to minimize field cutting. Select form stock and order material to minimize
cutting for thickness, face sizes, and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable
stone association or, if none, by stone source.
1. Nominal Thickness: 1 to 2 inches or as indicated on Drawings.
2. Stone Edges: As follows:
a. Flagstone shall include:
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 6
1) Flagstone Patterns: Provide random naturally broken or cleft edges, pattern
should be reasonably fitted with some hand or tool trimmed edge.
3. Provide joints of uniform width and in locations indicated.
a. Flagstone joints: Random joint width varies from 1/8 inch minimum to 1 inch
maximum.
4. Clean backs of stones
5. Arrange units in blended pattern.
B. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of
colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and
mockups.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce mortar and grout of uniform quality and with optimum
performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a
mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar and grout when they
have reached initial set.
B. Latex-Modified-Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with latex additive manufacturer's written
instructions and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to
receive stone.
1. Thickness: Approximately 1 inch medium bed.
C. Latex-Modified-Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with latex additive manufacturer's
1. For latex-modified-portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water according to latex additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Pointing Mortar: Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Architect's sample and complying with
requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and the following:
1. Colored Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining aggregates with portland
cement and selected color material mixed at rate to achieve uniform colors as approved
through the mock up.
E. J oint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and manufacturer's
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paving and flooring and conditions under which stone will be
installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of stone paving and flooring.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of stone paving.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign
materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then
drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh
materials or abrasives.
A. Execute stone paving installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at the
site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use means required, accurately cutting stone if required. Produce natural lines cut true,
with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
B. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce tight and neat joints.
3.4 FLAGSTONE WITH GRAPHICS:
A. Stone contractor is to provide the quantity of stones with graphics shown on the drawings.
Location for installation will be at various positions in any of the parks with flagstone work.
B. Arrange a meeting with the City and landscape architect to establish specific locations for
installation of these stones, record locations and install as a part of the general flagstone work.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Line: For positions shown in plan for edges of paving, flooring, ramps, steps,
changes in color or finish, and continuous joint lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4
inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum.
B. Variation in J oint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch or 1/4 of nominal joint
width, whichever is less.
C. Variation in Surface Plane of Paving and Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in
20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum from level or slope indicated.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 8
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference
between planes of adjacent units.
3.6 INSTALLING STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface
water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste slush coat over surface of concrete about 15 minutes before placing setting
bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed
1/16-inch thickness for cement-paste slush coat.
C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat immediately after slush coat has been
applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for
accurate setting of stone to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only as much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set
before placing stone.
E. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed,
apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit with a flat
trowel.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
3.7 INSTALLING STONE OVER CLEAVAGE MEMBRANE OR WATERPROOFING
A. Examine slab prior to stone installation, verify planned expansion and control joint locations,
random and surface crack locations that have occurred. Provide and install membrane at all
such occurrences.
1. Place cleavage membrane over substrate surfaces at below grade joints, cracks and
where indicated on the drawings, lapped at least 4 inches at joints.
B. Where stone is set using medium or thick bed systems, provide 18 ga. galvanized wire fabric
over membrane plus 6 (15cm) each side. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at
least one full mesh and supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do
not butt edges against vertical surfaces, provide 2 inch (5 cm) clearance.
C. Place mortar setting bed with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in middle of setting bed.
Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at elevations required for accurate setting
of stone to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only as much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before
placing stone.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed,
apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit with a flat
trowel.
SITE STONE PAVING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
093233 - Page 9
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of
3.8 GROUTING STONE PAVING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking
care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After initial set of grout, finish
joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying cracks.
C. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for 7 days, except as otherwise recommended by
latex additive manufacturer.
A. Remove and replace stone paving and flooring of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if
methods and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved samples and mockups.
4. Stone paving and flooring not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone paving and flooring's matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone paving and flooring as work progresses. Remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
D. Clean stone paving after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by
stone fabricator for types of application.
3.10 SEALER:
A. Apply sealer specified after cleaning and after any sealant joints are installed. Apply according
to the manufacturers requirements.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect stone paving and flooring during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where
adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stone paving and flooring with a
minimum of 3/4-inch untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION

WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 1
SECTION 129300
SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Engraved text and coordination for square stone seating block with stone cap and (Refer
also to Part 4 Schedule)
2. Bench
3. Metal Bollard (at Trail Street Markers)
4. Oversize flagstone paver engraving, stone installation by stone contractor
5. Entry wall signage
6. Stone engraving on entry walls and monuments (Stone furnished and installed by stone
contractors)
7. Anchoring furnishings and signage in place.
8. Warranty and replacements.
9. Provide touch up paint for painted items.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Applicable standards: Review by Owner and Landscape Architect.
1. Material standards as referenced by the manufacturer or in other sections of these
specifications.
B. Compatibility with adjacent materials: Verify that all site furnishings are compatible with
adjacent site improvements by others, and that their installation shall not adversely affect either
the site furnishings of existing or proposed site improvements.
C. Deliver and transfer manufacturers warranty to owner.
A. Product Data: For each type of product
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 2
B. Submit manufacturer's current literature for the following items:
1. Color, finish and size for each type of furnishing.
2. Installation instructions and recommendations for general maintenance.
3. Color chips using same material as the manufactured product showing texture, color and
configuration.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch long linear
components and 6-inch square sheet components.
1. Include full-size samples of graphics, lettering, stone engraving on the same type of
material as will be installed using the same size of point or inch size and font. Minimum
size as required to adequately convey construction techniques and styles. Provide shop
drawing of proposed mock up lettering area for approval.
F. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
G. Shop Drawings: Installation and anchorage details for all manufactured items. Construction
details for all precast concrete or custom metal items.
1. Benches, bollards, signage and graphics (engraving)..
2. Show plans, elevations and details with dimensions, details of inserts, (joints), and
reinforcement (and connections to all adjoining work).
3. Provide fabrication tickets for stone and metal fabrications that must be installed in
particular locations with plans referencing tickets to on site locations.
A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.
1. Anchoring Cement, Paint, Preservative or moisture and water protection Treatment:
Include certification by manufacturer stating type of materials, durability, strength,
compatibility, and compliance with applicable standards.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Provide information for site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
B. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Paint: Minimum of 2 pints touch up paint with ordering information for future needs
of the owner.
b. Anchors/Screws: For bollard, provide matching additional 10 set screws and 5
central anchor bolt as a part of close out for the owners use.
1.8 PROTECTION:
A. Contractor is responsible for the protection of each furnishing until substantial completion and
acceptance and shall replace damaged items prior to acceptance at no cost to the owner.
Maintain protection of installation until acceptance.
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers: Refer to drawings. Alternate manufactures if requested by contractor will be
required to meet or exceed the selected manufactures finish design including shape and size,
color and material in every way for consideration.
2.2 CONDITION: All products are to be new and in first class condition.
2.3 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Contractor shall arrange manufacturers warranty to the effect that all
manufactured products shall carry a minimum one year manufactures warranty which shall be
transferred to the owner at time of acceptance. The warranty period shall commence the date
of installation. Early delivery shall not limit the installed warranty period.
B. Contractors Warranty: Contractor shall warrant all workmanship in addition to the
manufacturers warranty for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.
2.4 BENCHES:
A. Material supplier, Color and Finish:
1. Refer to the drawings.
B. Bench is required to be assembled by the contractor, reference manufacturers literature:
1. Assemble as noted by manufacturer.
2. Provide matching compatible paint for exposed anchorage. Paint to match furnishing
with product recommended by furniture or anchor manufacturer as approved.
3. Provide suitable permanent shims as needed for leveling.
4. All connecting hard ware is to be pin style or approved vandal resistant style screws and
bolts. If such material is not supplied with the bench, contractor shall supply the
hardware, match hardware type/strengths/thread etc. otherwise to the manufacturers
supplied materials.
2.5 BOLLARDS
A. Material supplier, Color and Finish:
1. Refer to the drawings.
B. Bollard requires assembly and stone coordination, reference manufacturers documents and
details for material and product information.
1. Provide permanent shims and sealant as required at base.
C. Bollard Construction:
a. Manufacturers standard as selected and shown on the drawings.
b. Contractor shall provide additional plate/anchors and bolts which are not furnished
by manufacturer. Contractor is required to embed/anchor such items in place as
part of the installation of the bollards.
D. Surface Plate, and steel tube: Per manufacturer.
E. Subsurface plate, anchors and coupling:
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 4
1. According to details and structural.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following unless superseded
by the structural engineer:
1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric-
resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.
3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.
4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in
ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.
5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666.
2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M.
3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.
D. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.
E. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-
coated or noncorrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant,
concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.
F. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective
zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or
ASTM A 924/A 924M.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and
angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length,
full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed
connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after
finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 5
C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.10 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A. Where painted, provided baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked,
polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for
surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
2.11 COPPER PLATED FINISH
A. Where copper plated and patina finish is shown provide custom fabricated steel plate which has
been suitably finished and prepared for plating with copper.
1. Finish plate to be smooth coated with copper which is permanently adhered to the plate
using a process that will suitably accomplish the goal of permanence and durability and
have the appropriate properties that the copper can be recieve an applied patina finish
without detrimental effect on the copper.
B. Follow electro plate with process of patina via coating with chemical and organic compound
mixtures to create colored patina. After patina is set, follow with seal process to stop patina at
desired color and protect metal from further patina.
C. Seal should not have a noticeable color and be matt or satin finish. Material must be also
suitable for long term outdoor and weather exposure.
D. Provide submittal and samples as specified in Part 1.
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 6
2.12 IRON FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.13 ANCHORS:
A. Non-corrosive, stainless or galvanized as approved. Embed in epoxy grout or provide
expansion anchors.
B. Provide compatible paint in color and finish to match furnishing if anchors are exposed.
C. Provide vandal resistant materials if exposed, peen or burr bolt extension to make bolts non
removable if no other vandal resistant product is available or suitable for bolt materials.
2.14 ENGRAVING STONE:
A. Provide cut stone engraving and tooled engraving as shown in the drawings and details.
B. Also include approved letter/stone text color or fill where shown on the drawings.
2.15 SETTING STONE BLOCKS:
A. Comply with masonry sections, set and level on shims, grout pack base, mortar joints with
specified material matching the stone.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been
completed.
C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on
Drawings.
D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 7
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD
of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and
concrete with approved non-shrink grout or epoxy anchoring cement where required by the
drawings. Material shall be mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
F. Pins set into stone: Drill stone and set material with suitable permanent high strength epoxy,
brace or hold level and plumb/aligned until epoxy has set and cured.
3.3 FLAGSTONE AND STONE:
A. Engrave or incise lettering and provide stone to stone contractor for installation on the project.
B. Coordinate schedules of delivery and maintain dates for delivery as required by the general and
the stone contractors.
C. Installation according to other masonry Specifications.
3.4 REPLACEMENTS:
A. Replace all products, materials and workmanship found to be defective through the end of the
warranty period.
3.5 TOUCH UP MATERIALS
A. Provide owner with manufactures touch-up paint for each painted furnishing. Supply literature
necessary for ordering touch-up paint at a later date.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the operation and maintenance of all equipment to the Owner. Submit final copy of
all maintenance manuals at the time of demonstration.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Maintain locked lids until acceptance by Landscape Architect. Replace all missing accessories
at no cost to Owner.
B. Wrappings: Do not remove protective wrappings from furnishings until acceptance.
3.8 CLEAN UP
A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times.
B. Clean up and remove all stains, packing and debris from the entire work or on any furnishing
area prior to Final Acceptance.
SITE FURNISHINGS

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
129300 - Page 8
END OF SECTION

PART 4 - SCHEDULES AND ILLUSTRATIONS
4.1 SELECTIIONS:
A. The following images are examples of expected contractor results for the products specified
under furnishings.
4.2 SQUARE SEATING BENCH
A. Provide as described in this section. Image of expected graphic work as follows:

4.3 Copper Clad Steel with Patina and Seal

END OF SCHEDULE
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
320516 - Page 1
SECTION 320516
AGGREGATE AND DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Work Included: Provide decomposed granite paving, complete as shown , and as specified.
1. Surface gravel paving materials
2. Gravel and decorative gravel surfacing materials
3. Steel Edge restraints
4. Filter Fabric
B. Related Work:
Irrigation System - Section 328400
Finish Landscape Grading Section 329119
Planting - Section 329300
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Percent Compaction: ASTM D1557, percentage of the maximum in-place dry density of the
same material as determined by Soils Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's current catalog cuts and specifications edging, filter fabric, and
organic stabilizer.
B. Samples:
1. Decomposed Granite, Samples: Half (1/2) a pound for each size and color range of
decomposed granite.
2. Aggregate: Half (1/2) a pound for each different type, size and color range.
3. Geotextile and filter fabric: 2 square feet with manufacturers data and literature.
4. Steel Edging: Manufacturers literature and 1 foot length sample (or full length provided to
the jobsite)
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Mock-Up: One (1) - 4 ft. x 4 ft. x thickness shown on Drawings, to remain at job site until Final
Acceptance for each type of gravel aggregate.
A. Protect gravels from contamination with foreign materials. Isolate stockpiles to prevent mixing
of different aggregate grades. Prevent contamination with organic materials.
1.7 ATTIC STOCK:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
320516 - Page 2
A. Provide the following minimum quantities of gravels at the end of the project and deliver to the
owners storage facility or warehouse
1. 1 ton of decomposed granite gravel
2. 1 ton of surface and drainage gravel
3. 500 pounds crushed granite decorative gravel
4. 250 pounds crushed cream limestone gravel
5. 4 pieces (64 linear feet total) steel edging with sufficient stakes to link and stake the
sections
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Acceptance: Do not install work under this section prior to acceptance of subgrade preparation
under another section.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades to insure decorative and decomposed granite
paving may proceed unencumbered. Minimum other sections to coordinate with include the
following:
1. Irrigation Sleeving: To be placed prior to placement of aggregate base.
2. Trees in Paving: To be installed prior to headers and paving.
3. Sub Drainage: Lines to be installed and tested, approved and partially set or backfilled.
4. Electrical rough in and crossings for any lighting in the area.
1.9 MAINTENANCE:
A. Service: Immediately repair all damage to the work as the result of weather or traffic conditions.
Report all damage resulting from work of other trades after acceptance of decomposed granite
work. Repair to match adjacent undisturbed work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DECOMPOSED GRANITE:
A. Physical Properties:
1. Fine Aggregate:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

#4 95-100
#30 30-50
#200 5-15
Sand Equivalent 38 Minimum
#200 0-2
B. Color: Tan/Orange as approved.
2.2 GRAVEL AGGREGATE:
A. Gravel at Seat Wall Block:
1. Provide crushed limestone aggregate that is the same color and type of the stone blocks.
Gravel to be thoroughly washed to remove dust and fines. Size of crushed stone to be
1/2 to 3/4inch. Color to match blocks.
B. Gravel to cover Subdrainage gravel along fence lines
1. Provide 1 Rainbow Gravel from Keller Materials, San Antonio, Texas or 1 Texas
Blend from Soil and Stone Supply, Boerne, Texas or approved equivalent.
C. Decorative Crushed Granite Gravel:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
320516 - Page 3
1. Provide Cibola Gold #4~#7 (1/2 to 7/8 inch) crushed granite stone, Texas Architectural
Aggregates. San Saba Texas.
D. All aggregate to be washed thoroughly prior to delivery and should be free from dust and fines,
ready for installation. Granite may be delivered bagged or bulk at contractors option. Store as
required to keep material free from contamination with soil, dust or other debris. Clean and
rewash if necessary.
2.3 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT: Compaction Equipment: (Vibratory plate type)
2.4 HERBICIDE: Ron Star 2 G or equivalent non-selective pre-emergent herbicide.
2.5 FILTER FABRIC: TenCate Mirafi FW 402, woven geotextile.
2.6 STEEL LANDSCAPE EDGING:
A. Standard commercial steel landscape edging with smoothed top and stamped cut loops for
insertion of cut stakes, factory powder coat paint finish. Material shall be equivalent to J . D.
Russell Company Dura Edge Heavy Duty (800) 888-6872 or Sure Loc Corporation Sur-Loc
Steel Landscape Edging (800) 787-3562, as approved.
1. Provide manufacturers stake assembly system and additional stakes if shown according
to the drawings.
2. Size:
a. 1/4" x 5" x 16 foot length.
3. Edging and Stake Color:
a. Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Subgrades are to be rough graded to within 0.10 ft. of finish grades less depth of finish surface
of paving.
B. Verify that irrigation or electrical work or sleeving crossing the work has been installed and
accepted under another Section prior to commencement of work.
3.2 DECOMPOSED GRANITE GRAVEL PREPARATION:
A. Compaction: Loosen and re-compact subgrade to minimum 90% compaction. Grade at
limestone gravel is not required to be compacted beyond 85%.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide:
1. Apply pre emergent to all subgrade surfaces.
3.3 AGGREGRATE SURFACING PREPARATION
1. Excess compaction in the area of limestone gravel is to be relieved to allow a subgrade
that will percolate.
2. Herbicide is not required.
3. Verify that Subdrainage is in place and trenches are set, flows have been tested.
4. Cover subgrade gravel and the extent of the aggregate area excavated to provide contact
on each side of filter fabric with gravel and to hold the fabric in place.
5. Continue with gravel to required depth.
3.4 INSTALLATION:
A. Steel Header:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
320516 - Page 4
1. Headers: Install header true to line and grade as shown on the Drawings. Align header
edges and set flush with adjacent paving. Field weld all butt joints.
2. Stakes: Stakes shall be a minimum of (16 in.) long and longer as required for solid
anchorage.
B. Decomposed Granite Paving:
1. Install continuous filter fabric and lap it up the sides of the steel edge. Install enough
granite to just secure the edge of the fabric and trim the fabric approximately inch to 1
inch below the top of the edging.
2. Lines and Levels: Install all decomposed granite work true to grade, properly coinciding
with adjacent work and elevations. Provide a finished surface uniform in texture and
appearance. Do not permit finished work to vary more than 1/8 in. in 10 ft. from true
profile and cross section.
3. Moisture Content: Add water to provide uniformly distributed moisture to obtain the
required compaction.
4. Compacting: Thoroughly compact each lift to a minimum 90%. Compact each area with
at least 4 passes of the compacting equipment. After compacting, screed smooth.
5. Top Dress: 10 to 14 days after initial surface sets depending on weather and use of the
areas, lightly rake, grade and add additional gravel to bring to new grade. Re-compact
the surface.
a. Insure surface areas are slightly loosened or raked to provide a bond with the
existing and added material.
6. Damaged or Defective Installation: Repair and replace in accordance with these
Specifications at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Placing Crushed Limestone And Decorative Gravel:
1. Install filter fabric over soil and over subdrainage layer after approval of piping and
Subdrainage materials.
a. Place crushed stone on the subgrade in a uniform layer to the required contour
and shape. Place in layers of not more than two (2) inches (compacted)
thickness. Total thickness after compaction shall not be less than four (4) inches.
b. Roll layers with a heavy sod roller.
c. Grade surface such that it is even and not overly compacted. Fill any voids with
additional gravel.
3.5 PROTECTION: Protect the paving against traffic, injury or defacement, or damage and
subsequent construction operations until Final Acceptance.
3.6 CLEANING: Keep surface of gravel clean, remove excess material and deliver to the City
warehouse or storage facility for their future maintenance.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321317 - Page 1

SECTION 321317
SITE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. These specifications are intended to be additive and do not over ride the Civil Engineers work or
documents. Reference the Civil Engineers documents for the full requirements of the project.
C. These documents specify only parts of the concrete related to finish or color.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Work Included:
1. Reference Engineers Documents for total requirements.
2. Concrete finishes for walks and pavements.
3. Integral Colored Concrete.
1. Refer as indicated in the Civil Documents and Specifications
2. Site Stone Paving 093233
3. Concrete Unit Paving - 321413
4. Finish Grading - Section 329119
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by
City of New Braunfels, Texas.
B. Lines and Levels: A licensed surveyor or registered civil engineer shall layout and establish all
lines, levels, grades and positions of all parts of the work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to the engineers requirements for full scope of information and product to be supplied.
Supply additional for the landscape components of the concrete work:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321317 - Page 2
B. Aggregates: Provide three samples of each component and different aggregate size and type
to be used in the mix design. Clearly identify the sieve size, name, and color of each sample on
the containers. Submit samples of the each of the following:
1. Course Aggregate
2. Fine Aggregate
3. Sand
4. Seeded Aggregate
5. Cement
C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Samples:
1. Flatwork
a. Multiple color requirements: Contractor is to budget and allow different color
samples in verification (3 samples) and in jobsite mock-up requirements (5
samples). One or more color may be chosen. Scofield colors are shown,
contractor may supply alternate similar colors if the proposed batch plant supplies
liquid forms of another equivalent and approved brand. Textures as indicated on
the drawings and minimum of colors as follows:
1) C-11 Desert Tan
2) C-12 Mesa Beige
3) C-21 Adobe Tan
b. Verification samples: Preliminary color, texture and finish samples to include one
approximately 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample for each type of concrete finish
and color. Batch sample using the same matrix components intended to be used
on the project. Construct using same ratio of components to be used by the batch
plant.
c. J obsite mock-up sample: After approval of color/texture verification samples, cast
one each 6 foot square x 4 inch thick sample for each different color or texture.
Simulate job conditions by casting sample panels adjacent to each other when
plans indicate different colors and textures adjacent to each other J oin adjacent
panels using detailed expansion joints. Include required joints and surface
treatment. The contractors selected concrete batch plant is to provide materials
for all jobsite mock-ups, the components provided shall include all matrix items
including admixtures approved in preliminary mix-design submittals. The mock-up
will simulate job conditions as closely as possible. Materials for mock-ups that do
not comply with batch plant supplier requirements and/or mix designs will be
rejected.
2. Color samples: Grout and expansion joint compounds.
1.6 MIX DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. Comply with the Engineers requirements.
1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. All concrete work shall be true to line and grade as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor
shall be responsible for proper drainage, without birdbaths, on all concrete paving surfaces.
Any discrepancies or omissions on drawings, or conditions on the site, which prevent this
Contractor from providing proper drainage shall be brought to the attention of the Owner in
writing for correction or relief before work proceeds.
B. Surface Tolerance: Finished paving surfaces shall not vary more than one-quarter (1/4") inch
measured with a ten (10') foot metal straightedge, except at grade changes. No birdbaths or
other surface irregularities will be permitted. Correct irregularities as directed.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321317 - Page 3
C. Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to
maintain strength of structures at maximum. Verify size, length and location of electrical
conduit.
D. Responsibility of the Contractor: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the structural
adequacy of the forms, ties, shoring, and bracing. Any requirements given herein are minimum
for appearance purposes only, not to be considered as structural design.
E. Test Data: Submit copies of all laboratory tests and reports of all materials.
1.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Review Date: Make a written request for review for Final Acceptance at least five (5) working
days in advance.
B. Completion: Work will be accepted upon satisfactory completion of all site concrete work.
C. Responsibility: Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of
the work.
1.9 FORM RELEASE AGENT WARRANTY: Furnish written warranty issued by form release agent
manufacturer that form release agent shall be non-staining and shall not interfere with applied
finishes such as paint, mastic or mortar applied materials.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
A. Comply with Engineers requirements for all aspects and comply as follows for the landscape
components
2.2 INTEGRAL COLOR
A. Product: The color conditioning admixture shall be a single component, colored, water
reducing , set controlling admixture, factory formulated and packaged in cubic yard dosage
increments, not multiple additives and pigments added separately into the mix. It shall comply
with ASTM C 494. Grace/Davis Liquid Colors, L.M. Scofield company, or approved equal.
1. Final color and finish to be selected through mock-ups, refer to finish schedule on the
drawings for preliminary color selections.
2.3 COLORING AGENTS: Only commercially pure mineral pigments shall be used to produce the
desired color and in no case shall exceed ten (10%) percent of the cement content by weight.
1. Refer to finish schedule for all colors and finishes.
2.4 EXPANSION J OINT MATERIALS
A. Expansion J oint: W.R. Meadows or equal, Ceramar flexible foam expansion joint 1/4 inch.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321317 - Page 4
B. Backer Rod: Closed cell foam backer rod of the size recommended by the Manufacturer for the
joint sealant.
C. J oint Sealant: Gun-grade, polyurethane with a Shore 'A' hardness of not less than 40 after 72
hours. Pacific Polymers, PRC, or approved equal.
D. Premolded J oint Filler: Closed cell plastic joint filler, containing no impregnated petroleum
products.
E. Bond breaker tape to be as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Color: To match adjacent concrete surfaces.
2.5 SAWCUT J OINTS: Concrete saw joint, 1/5 minimum and 1/4 maximum slab thickness x 1/4
width, accurately constructed true to alignment and location. Extend all saw cuts to the end of
each concrete panel. Do not overlap cuts into adjacent concrete panels. Refer to drawings for
locations..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Compliance with the Civil Engineers documents is required, the information herein is to be
considered supplemental.
B. Surface Drainage:
1. Provide for positive drainage on all concrete paving surfaces.
2. Report in writing any discrepancies or omissions on drawings and conditions on the site
which would prevent proper drainage.
3. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Properly correct
irregularities.
C. Anchors and Embeds: Use templates for all anchor plates, bolts, inserts and other items
embedded in concrete. Accurately secure so that they will not be displaced during placing of
concrete.
D. Electrical Conduit: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete.
Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures at maximum. Verify size, length and location
of electrical conduit.
3.2 FINISHES:
A. Broom Finish: Shall be obtained by drawing a stiff bristled broom across a floated finish.
Direction of brooming to be perpendicular to direction of walk or as otherwise shown on
Drawings.
B. Sandblast Finish:
1. Perform in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing the same work crew to
maintain continuity of finish.
2. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of the proper type and graduation to expose the
aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces to match sample panel as follow:
a. Light Cut: Approximately one-sixteenth (1/16) inch depth.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321317 - Page 5
b. Medium Cut: Approximately one-eighth (1/8) inch to three-sixteenths (3/16) inch
depth.
c. Heavy Cut: Approximately on-half (1/2) inch to three quarter (3/4) inch depth.
3. Blast corners and edge of patterns carefully, using back-up boards, in order to maintain a
uniform corner of edge line.
4. Use same nozzle, nozzle pressure and blasting technique as used for sample panel.
5. Maintain control of abrasive grit and concrete dust in each area of blasting. Clean up and
remove all expended abrasive grit, concrete dust, and debris at the end of each day of
blasting operations.
3.3 J OINTS:
A. Tooled Score J oints: Score joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the
groove so that a smooth uniform impression is obtained. All joints shall be struck before and
after brooming.
B. Expansion J oints and Edging: Expansion joints shall be formed provided at the location and
intervals as shown on the plans, and at all locations where concrete paving abuts buildings,
curbs, or other structures. Approved joint material shall be placed with top edge one-half (1/2")
inch below the paved surface, and shall be securely held in place to prevent movement. J oint
and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth
uniform impression. All edges shall be struck before and after brooming. After the curing
period, expansion joints shall be carefully cleaned and filled with approved joint compound to
one-quarter (1/4") inch below paved surface in such a manner as to avoid spilling on paved
surfaces or overflow from joint.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. General: All areas shall be maintained in a clean and orderly manner at all times. Debris,
excess product and other rubbish shall be removed daily.
B. Upon completion of work, immediately remove from the premises all surplus materials, tools,
equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the work.
END OF SECTION

WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 1

SECTION 321400
CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY:
1. This Section Includes:
a. Manually installed Interlocking concrete paver units set in aggregate and mortar
setting bed(s) as indicated.
b. Galvanized Steel paver restraint
c. Cast-in-place concrete edge restraints.
d. Sand setting bed and leveling course
e. Geotextile fabrics at joints and edges
f. J oint Stabilizer with Surface Sealer.
1. Reference information indicated on the Civil Engineers documents, including payment
procedures, pay items and additional detailing and construction requirements not
indicated in the landscape drawings. Contractor is required to comply with all drawing
and specification information
2. Engineers Section "Concrete Paving"
3. Lawns and Grasses - Section 329200
4. Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcovers - Section 0329300
1.3 UNIT PRICES
specifications
B. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change
Orders.
2. Civil Engineers Pay Item and Unit Price schedules also affect this work.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 214-77: Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compressive Test Results of Field
Concrete.
2. 318-77: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. ASTM C 136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
3. ASTM C 140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
and Related Units.
4. ASTM C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 2
5. ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.
6. ASTM C 979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
7. ASTM D 698, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
8. ASTM D 1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).
9. ASTM C 1645, Standard Test Method for Freeze-thaw and De-icing Durability of Solid
Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.
10. ASTM D 2940, Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Sub-bases for
Highways or Airports
C. Standard Specifications - For Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Texas Highway
Department, 1972.
D. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI):
1. ICPI Tech Spec Technical Bulletins in addition to the requirements of these
specifications.
E. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Perform all required tests and coordinate all efforts with the designated testing laboratory
in accordance as specified under Division 1.
2. Cooperate with testing laboratories to permit proper testing and inspection procedures.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. All submittal data shall be forwarded in a single package within sixty (60) days of award of the
General Contract.
B. Comply according to Division 1 and the Owners specification requirements.
C. Provide Material Submittals for the following items:
1. Submit manufacturer and product data with complete illustrations and/or descriptions for
the following:
a. Various paver types shown in the drawings.
b. Analysis of base courses, setting beds, sand and joint materials
c. Mix design of mortar beds
d. Edge restraints
e. Geotextile and filter fabric
f. J oint Stabilizers
g. Surface Sealer
h. Provide Shop Drawings:
1) Shop drawings coordinated with plan dimensions for fabricated edge
restraints with layout and dimensions keyed to a site plan. Show sections,
elevations, setting or installation details for the items. If stone curbing is
required, provide setting drawings with detail tickets for fabrication.
a) Steel or Metal fabrication
2. Submit samples for selection and approval of materials
a. Each type and color of paver unit indicated (5 each different type, color and
shape), provide full size units. If blended mixes are indicated, supply adequate
product in addition to the quantity requirement to enable evaluation of the color
blend.
b. J oint materials involving color selection.
c. Exposed restraints which involve color or finish selection
3. ICPI Certifications as noted under quality certification.
1.6 MOCK UPS
A. Samples: Approved samples shall be the standards for finishes in the work. Furnish one
approximately ten (10') foot by ten (10') foot sample of each pattern at the job site for review
and approval.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 3
1. The mock up shall be erected in a manner that it is possible to evaluate and determine
the aesthetics of the material and quality of installation, observe joint pattern, confirm
color and color blends, review coursing and potential trimming needs, suitability of edge
restraint and interfaces with adjacent materials and to evaluate surcharge of the bedding
sand layer.
a. Include proposed cleaning method, joint stabilizer and sealer on the mock-up(s).
b. Verify compatibility of paver sealers, joint sand sealers and components with each
other and with the pavers as a part of this mock up.
2. The approved mock up will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged.
Erect in a location that enables it to remain until completion of the work
3. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work
4. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up or deliver to owner
as attic stock at the owners option.
B. Sample Coursing Mock up:
1. Where plans indicate full pavers without cuts which indicates full runs from edge to edge
or pattern to pattern, provide preliminary coursing layout to evaluate actual dimension
requirements in laying up the work.
a. These coursing layouts are to be erected in time to evaluate dimensions of
adjacent surfaces or materials, subslabs, start points etc. and the potential that
they can or need to be adjusted to fit the full paver requirements.
C. Pre-installation Meeting:
1. Hold conference at the project site.
a. General paver expectations should be discussed.
b. Review sample coursing.
A. Source Limitations: Pavers to be manufactured by single source manufacturer with resources
adequate to provide products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by
City of New Braunfels, Texas.
C. Contractor Qualifications:
1. The installing contractor shall have successfully completed a minimum of 5 years of
concrete paver installation similar in design, material, and similar or larger extent
indicated on this project.
2. It is required that the installer hold a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete
Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. Certificate shall be in
effect a minimum of 30 days prior to commencing the project and continue through the
warranty period of the project. Certificates for the installer shall be Level 1 and site
Project Manager Level 2.
a. Level 1 or Level 2 Certified individual must be on site full time during installation.
b. If Level 1 is full time, then a Level 2 individual shall also be on site a minimum of
33 percent of full time per week.
3. Additional requirement is that the firm installing the work shall maintain current ICPI
Business Professional certification.
D. Paver Installation Subcontractor:
1. A copy of Subcontractors current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement
Institute Concrete (ICPI) Paver Installer Certification program.
2. J ob references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide
Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and email address.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 4
A. Specific reference to manufacturer's names and products specified in this Section are used as
standards; this implies no right to substitute other materials or methods without written approval
of the Landscape Architect.
B. Installation of any approved substitutions is Contractor's responsibility. Any changes required
for installation of any approved substitution must be made to the satisfaction of Landscape
Architect and without additional cost to Owner.
C. Approval by Landscape Architect of substituted materials and/or dimensional drawings does not
waive these requirements.
1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
E. Contractor shall order in a timely manner to comply with manufacturers ordering instructions
and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.
F. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers packaging
with identification labels intact.
2. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of
buildings adjacent to paving.
3. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped
packaging capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.
4. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall.
B. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
C. Weather Limitations for Pavers set in Mortar and Grout:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and
use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of
100 deg F and higher.
a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F or when wind velocity exceeds 8
mph and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F set pavers within 1 minute of
spreading setting-bed mortar.
1.11 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS: Owner reserves the right to take and analyze
samples of materials for conformity to Specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish
samples upon request by Owner. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the
site and replaced at Contractor's expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting
Specifications shall be paid by Contractor.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 5
1.12 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE:
A. Warranty: In addition to manufacturer's guarantees or warranties and the information contained
in the Division 1 specifications, Contractor shall be warrant all work for one year from the date of
Final Acceptance against defects in materials and workmanship.
1. Warranty shall include the repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from
defects in materials and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner.
B. Maintenance: Contractor shall include post installation pavement maintenance for a period of
45 calendar days after substantial completion which will include
1. A minimum of every other week site visits to the project to review the installation. If it is
determined more frequent visits are needed to resolve problems, include the additional
visits. Notify and meet with the owner to review and observe the project during these
visits. If the owner determines the work is suitable with out additional review trips, the
owner may elect to suspend the maintenance period. Such suspension must be provided
in writing.
2. Scope of work will include:
a. Resetting, adjusting and sanding of any problem areas.
b. Correcting and resetting edge pavers and restraints and if necessary reinstallation
of edge pavers to insure the problem is permanently corrected.
3. Construction occurring during the maintenance period shall comply with these
specifications.
1.13 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS FOR ATTIC STOCK: Provide 5 per cent of each color and textureof
the total installed square footage as additional material for use by owner for maintenance and
repair. Include the attic stock material and delivery in the proposal for the materials.
Coordinate and off load in required location at the owners preferred storage site.
A. Pavers for storage shall be from the same production run as installed materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING STONES:
A. Regional Materials: Provide concrete pavers that have been manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
B. Shall be as manufactured by Pavestone Company, 3125 State Highway 360, Grapevine, Texas
(817)481-5802 or approved equal.
C. Concrete Paver Products
1. Size and finish shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2. Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.
3. Thickness and pattern shall be as indicated on the drawings.
4. Paver Manufacturer shall provide the following:
a. Material Standard: Comply with material standards set forth in ASTM C 936.
b. Color Pigment Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 979.
5. Average Compressive Strength (C140): 8000 psi (55 MPa) with non individual unit under
7200 psi (50 MPa) per ASTM C 140.
6. Average Water Absorption (ASTM C 140): 5% with no unit greater than 7%.
7. Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 1645): 25 freeze-thaw cycles with no greater loss
than 200 g/m2 of paver surface area or no greater loss than 500 g/m2 of paver surface
area after 50 freeze-thaw cycles. Freeze-thaw testing requirements shall be waived for
applications not exposed to freezing conditions. No breakage and not more than 1
percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 6
A. No substitutions will be accepted.
2.3 EDGE RESTRAINTS
A. Provide edge restraints installed around the perimeter edge and planting sides of all interlocking
concrete paving units where there is not an adjacent concrete or other immobile surface serving
as a restraint as follows:
1. Shop Fabricated, Hot Dip Galvanized Steel Angle:
a. Angles and Sheets shall be thick x leg dimensions shown on the drawings.
b. Radii (if any) are to be factory shaped. Dimensions are to be coordinated with the
general contractor.
c. Drill for anchors prior to galvanizing.
d. Anchors to be stainless or galvanized.
e. Cuts or damaged areas shall be touched up in the field with a cold applied
galvanizing paint.
2. Lead Time: Coordinate fabrication duration and delivery of products with the installation
schedule. Factor lead time with installation schedule. Provide timely submittals to permit
proper fabrication in the schedule.
2.4 BEDDING AND J OINT SAND FOR SAND SET PAVERS
A. Provide bedding and joint sand as follows:
1. Washed, clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically
shaped, natural or manufactured from crushed rock.
2. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand for the bedding sand material that
does not conform to conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33.
3. Do not use mason sand or sand conforming to ASTM C 144 for the bedding sand.
4. Where concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, utilize sands that are as hard as
practically available.
5. Sieve according to ASTM C 136.
6. Bedding Sand Material Requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C
33 with modifications as shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand
ASTM C 33
Sieve Size Percent Passing
3/8 in.(9.5 mm) 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 85 to 100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85
No. 30 (0.600 mm) 25 to 60
No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 30
No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 10
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 1


TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 7

B. J oint Sand Material Requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as
shown with modifications in Table 2 below.

Table 2 Grading Requirements for J oint Sand ASTM C 33
ASTM C 144
Natural Sand Manufactured Sand
Sieve Size Percent Passing Percent Passing
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100 95 to 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 70 to 100
No. 30 (0.600 mm) 40 to 75 40 to 100
No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 35 20 to 40
No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 15 10 to 25
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 1 0 to 10
1. Note that J oint Sand may be coarser than that specified in Table 2 including material
shown in Table 1 providing the material sieve size is equal to and smaller than the paver
joint size. If the contractor elects to use C33 sand for joints, additional sweeping and
time allowed is required to completely fill the joints. Contractor is responsible for a fully
filled and interlocking joint installation.
2.5 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, low alkali.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.
D. Latex Additive: [Manufacturer's standard acrylic resin water emulsion, serving as replacement
for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer
for use with field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a
retarder.
E. Thin set Mortar: Latex-modified Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
d. Mer-Krete System, Parex-Lahabra, Inc.
e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, re-dispersible, vinyl acetate or
acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
2.6 ACCESSORIES: Provide accessory materials as follows:
A. Geotextile Fabric:
1. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation
applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent;
complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
a. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
c. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
d. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
2. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile fabric, manufactured for
subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 8
greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per
test methods referenced:
a. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
c. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
d. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
B. Cleaners
a. Only use cleaners as recommended by the Unit Paver manufacturer.
2.7 J OINT SAND STABILIZER AND SEALER
A. Material Description: Water based, single component, epoxy-modified joint stabilizing sealer
capable of penetrating and sealing the surface of the paver without causing discoloration or
reducing the static coefficient of friction to below accepted figures.
B. Manufacturer: The joint sand stabilizing material shall be Surebond SB-1300 as manufactured
by Surebond Inc., 2801 International Lane, Madison, WI 53704, Local Phone: 608-237-7554.
Fax: 608-237-7558.
C. The sealer will bind the joint sand and seal the surface of the paver without causing a glossy or
shiny surface effect. In addition:
1. Material shall conform to ASTM C1028 Static Coefficient of Friction requirements.
2. Material shall be solvent free and shall have a VOC of less than 100 grams per liter.
3. Material shall be designed to be installed after the joint sand has been installed.
4. The material, as delivered, will be liquid at typical ambient temperatures
5. The product shall be manufactured as a joint sand stabilizer and labeled as such.
6. The material shall be water based and shall not contain solvents.
D. The material shall comply with the following criteria:
1. Testing Requirements: Pavement sealer shall be tested in accordance with the following
standards and conditions, and the testing results shall meet or exceed the performance
requirements as specified herein.
2. Independent Laboratory: Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory
meeting the requirements of ASTM E 329-95 and certified by the United States Bureau of
Standards. Testing laboratory shall obtain all samples.
3. Permeability: The sealer shall conform to ASTM E 514.
4. Water Vapor Transmission: The sealer shall have a minimum water vapor transmission
rate of 60 grams/meter2/day at an average dry film thickness of 3.5 to 4.0 mils and a
relative humidity of 40% when tested as per ASTM D 1653.
2.8 Water:
A. Potable water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer and general contractors representative shall examine areas indicated to receive paving
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, the specifying individual and installing
contractor are to attend a review with the paver installer and general contractor present.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the
satisfaction of the person specifying the waterproofing system.
3.2 PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 9
A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
B. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. If any areas of
pavers are to be installed using the mortar set method, also remove additional items from
concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing compounds, sealing
compounds, form oil and laitance.
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
C. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of
brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
D. J oint Pattern: Reference the drawings.
E. Tolerances:
1. If slopes are 1 1/2 per cent or less, do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush
(lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of
paving.
2. If slopes are 1 per cent or greater do not exceed 1/16 inch unit to unit offset from flush
(lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 2 feet or inch in 10 feet from level or indicated slope for finish
surface of paving.
F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, install at to 1 inch maximum below
top edge.
2. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing
aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it
will not interfere with aggregate setting bed and strike non-paver side flush.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SAND SETTING BED:
A. The uncompacted sand leveling course shall be spread evenly over the area to be paved and
then screeded to a level that will produce from one (1") inch to 1 inch maximum thickness
when the paving stones have been placed and vibrated.
B. Plan work such that the final elevation of paving stones is approximately 1/8 inch higher than
adjacent paving to allow for minor setting that may occur within the sand base during vibrating
procedures, especially allow distance for traffic conditions.
C. Once screeded and leveled to the desired elevation, this sand leveling course shall not be
disturbed in any way.
3.5 LAYING PAVERS:
A. Install one edge of the edge restraint. Using a starter run of pavers, establish the actual width
of the area to receive pavers.
1. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all walks are to be constructed to full paver
dimensions.
2. Contractor may provide minor adjustment and arrange the steel edge restraint such that
its location allows minor field modifications and does permit the use of whole pavers.
3. See Part 1 item Sample Coursing Mock Up for scheduled verification of paver coursing
and layout. Provide coursing and notify Landscape Architect of required adjustments or
modifications needed to install full pavers in the areas indicated on the drawings.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 10
B. The paving stones shall be laid in the approved pattern as noted or shown on Drawings and as
per the approved mock-up panel.
C. The paving stones shall be laid in such a manner that the desired pattern is maintained and the
joints between the stones are as tight as possible. Use string lines or similar layout devices to
hold all pattern lines true
1. Provide maximum interlocking system,
a. Pavers with spacer bars shall be placed tight against the spacer bars.
b. Otherwise, pavers shall have a minimum of 1/16 inch to a maximum of 1/8 inch.
c. Any gaps exceeding 3/8 inch shall receive cut pavers as approved with no paver
smaller than 3/8 of total paver dimension.
D. The gaps at the edge of the paver surface shall be filled with pavers cut to fit using tolerances
noted above. Cutting shall be precision cut and shall be accomplished leaving a clean edge to
the traffic surface.
1. Cutting method shall utilize a wet masonry or stone saw for full and partial pavers with
minor cuts accomplished with diamond blade saws and grinders.
2. Cuts should result with a paver less than one-third (1/3) of original dimension.
3. Provide necessary safety equipment and dust masks when cutting pavers.
E. Vibrate pavers into the sand laying course using a vibrator capable of 3,000 to 5,000 pounds
compaction force wat 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on the face of the plate or
means as needed to prevent damage, chipping or cracks in the surface pavers
1. Perform a minimum of three passes across the paving with the vibrator.
F. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of vibrator, leaving
at least 36 inches of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges.
1. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-inch
width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying faces).
2. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are
adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches of laying face.
3. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that have not
been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not been placed with
non-staining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.
G. Unless joint stabilization is required proceed with filling joints and vibrating as follows. If joint
stabilization is required, proceed with installing mixed stabilizers with sand as noted in Articles
below.
1. After vibration, spread dry sand or spread slightly damp sand and allow it to dry. Proceed
after drying and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.
2. Surplus material shall then be swept from the surface or left on surface during
construction time to insure complete filling of joints during initial use at the option of the
Owner and General Contractor.
H. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
I. Repeat joint-filling process as a condition of the maintenance period at 30 days after installation.
3.6 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not
exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 11
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that
has reached initial set.
E. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat
trowel.
F. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of
G. Spaced J oint Widths: Provide nominal joint width as shown in the drawings with variations not
exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch.
3.7 REPAIRING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and
install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of
replacement.
B. Cleaning: Remove excess grout, stains and other damage from exposed paver surfaces; wash
and scrub clean. Replace pavers that cannot be cleaned.
C. Prior to joint stabilization and sealing pavers shall be cleaned by means of high pressure power
washing to remove surface dirt and concrete residue. Power washing shall be accomplished
only after confirming with the Pavestone or paver manufacturer.
1. Confirm pressure washing is recommended by the paver manufacturer and If approved:
a. Prepare test wash area for approval of Landscape Architect prior to commencing
work.
b. Pressure-wash using a water power washer with nozzle pressure as approved.
2. After washing, allow pavers to dry and reapply washed sand to all joints. Vibrate sand
into joints with at least one vibrator pass. Remove and dispose of excess sand.
3.8 SAND J OINT STABILIZER AND SURFACE SEALER:
A. Application Procedure: Perform Stabilizer/Sealer application per the Manufacturers written
instructions as follows:
1. After the pavers have been installed, and the dry jointing sand operation has been
performed and pavers are cleaned as outlined in previous portions of this Section verify
that all pavement has been compacted and that all joints are completely filled with sand.
a. Great care shall be taken to ensure that the joints are filled to the bottom of the
chamfer or 1/8 inch below the finished surface of the pavement when there are no
chamfers.
2. The surface shall be clean and free from any staining, oil, dust and any loose material
prior to the application of joint sand stabilizer. The surface of the paver and the joint sand
should be dry for its full depth prior to commencing work.
3. The joint sand stabilizer shall be applied evenly using an electrical sump pump delivering
not more than 5 gallons per minute. The pump should be fitted with a 3 foot long inch
inlet hose placed in the pail or drum of sealer and a 30 foot inch outlet hose fitted with
a trigger action spray nozzle to discharge the material on to the pavement. The operator
must flood the pavement working in one direction assisted by two operators who should
work the excess material into the sand joints using 24 inch rubber floor squeegees,
ensuring that all joints are adequately flooded and that no surplus material is left on the
surface. The joints should be re-flooded as necessary during the application process to
achieve binding of the sand to a depth of at least 1/2.
B. The treated area should be protected from rain or moisture and not be trafficked for 24 hours
after completing the application of the stabilizer. Work shall cease if inclement weather (rain or

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
321400 - Page 12
strong wind) will affect the stabilizing operation and shall not recommence until the joint sand
has dried sufficiently to allow penetration of the stabilizer / sealant.
3.9 CLEAN UP:
B. Confirm cleaning of stains on pavers with the manufacturer.
1. Generally, if the pavement has been stained, cleaning should be carried out with high-
pressure washing equipment delivering water at a temperature not exceeding 220
degrees F with fan shaped spray nozzles at pressures not exceeding 2,500 psi after
applying non-citric based de-greasers and detergents.
2. The nozzle shall be directed at the pavers from a height of 2 feet and at an angle of 45
degrees.
3. Care should be taken to prevent the jets from being directed into the joints so as not to
dislodge the joint sand as far as possible
C. Upon completion of work under this Section, Contractor shall remove from the premises all
surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the Work at his own
expense.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323113 - Page 1
SECTION 323113
CHAIN LINK FENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Chain-link fences.
1. Division 03 Section for cast-in-place concrete/
A. Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7
1. Minimum Post Size: Determine according to ASTM F 1043 for framework up to 12 feet
high, and post spacing not to exceed 10 feet for industrial /commercial fencing.
Coordinate fence spacing with fence profiles shown on the drawings.
2. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to CLFMI WLG 2445,
based on mesh size and pattern shown. Contractor is responsible for engineering the
fence, setting sizes etc. pertaining to any structural item and such shall be indicated on
fence shop drawings, which shall be signed by the contractors engineer.
3. The desired materials, heights and pipe/rail sizes information is indicated in the provided
design drawings. Modification to increase materials is permitted for structural reasons.
C. Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal
dry conditions.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link
fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Show accessories, hardware and footing details.
CHAIN LINK FENCES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323113 - Page 2
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Polymer-Coated Components: In 6-inch lengths for components and on full-sized units
for accessories.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated to comply
with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals:
1. Polymer finishes.
2. Gate hardware.
3. Gate operator.
B. Touch up paint: Provide minimum of 1 quart of touch up paint matching installed products along
with ordering information for additional material in the future.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Include 8 foot length of fence with end and line posts, rails, fabric, and all connection
hardware.
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and installer agree to
repair or replace components of chain-link fences that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge
of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements
indicated below:
CHAIN LINK FENCES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323113 - Page 3
1. Fabric Height: 6 feet.
2. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.148 (9 gauge).
a. Mesh Size: 2 inch
b. Polymer-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 1 over Zn-5-Al-MM-alloy-coated steel
wire.
1) Color: Black complying with ASTM F 934.
3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages
2.2 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line;
terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness
according to ASTM F 1043based on the following:
1. Fence Height: 72 inches As indicated on Drawings
2. Posts and Rails to comply with information shown on the drawings, increases due to
structural needs are permitted if indicated by the fence fabricators engineer.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Post Caps: Provide for each post.
1. Provide line post caps with loop to receive top rail.
C. Rail and Brace Ends: To be verified by fence installers engineer. Drawing indicates the
requirement, the fence engineer may elect to eliminate the brace if it is not required as long as
the project structural engineer is in agreement, provide at each, corner, pull, and end post.
D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1. Top Rail Sleeves: Offset loops per fabricator.
2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting bottom rails in the fence
line-to-line posts.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.
F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric.
Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric
is integrally woven into post.
G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other
means of adjustment.
H. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.
a. Polymer coating over metallic coating.
2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and
that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
CHAIN LINK FENCES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323113 - Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a
verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work,
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by
Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground
structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
1. Install fencing where indicated on the drawings. Do not encroach or pass ROW or
property lines for installation.
3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Post Excavation in Soil: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing
indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Coordinate with curbing and set top of foundation to allow
curbing to cover foundation.
B. Post Installation: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
3. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
4. Concealed Concrete: Top 5 inches at mow curbs to be installed below grade to allow
covering with surface material.
a. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored
into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill
annular space between post and sleeve with approved anchoring cement or non-
shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from
post.
5. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches deep
and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with approved anchoring cement or nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.
C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts as indicated on Drawings.
D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at equal spacing between columns. Maximum space is
10 on center. Reference profile drawings for steps in fences and retaining walls and provide
terminal post at low side of step. Height of post in step to be such that it will fully hole the high
CHAIN LINK FENCES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323113 - Page 5
side fabric and rails and the top of the post should align to the elevation that would have
occurred should it have been on the high side. Reference plans and details.l
E. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb
position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with
truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and
pull posts.
1. Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric 72 inches or higher, on fences with top
rail and at two-third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb
when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
F. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of
fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and
terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal
posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
G. Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.
H. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to public of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch to 2 inches or
further between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull
fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains
under tension after pulling force is released.
I. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate
posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c.
J . Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire
at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach
other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to
individuals and clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches
o.c.
K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite
the fabric side.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323129 - Page 1

SECTION 323129
WOOD FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Work Included:
Board on board cedar fencing, galvanized posts, treated wood rails.
Footings installed and coordinated with mow curb, walls and retaining walls
Finish Landscape Grading - Section 329119
Site Concrete Section 033053
Requirements shown in the Structural and Civil Engineers Specifications.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. The Contractor shall permit only experienced carpenters and carpenters' helpers in the
execution of this Work. Tolerances and measured allowances shall conform to at least
minimum standards of the trade.
B. Reference Standards:
1. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) - Grading Rules and Species of Timber.
2. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) - Standards for type of preservative,
retention and penetration.
3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
4. National Lumber Grades Authority
5. Westeren Wood Products Association, Grades for Western Red Cedar
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: :
1. Certification reports on lumber.
2. Catalogue cut sheets on connectors, hangers and other hardware.
3. Manufacturer's name and brand names of materials listed as products of more than one
approved manufacturer.
WOOD FENCING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323129 - Page 2
B. Samples: Approved samples shall be the Standards for finishes in carpentry work. Materials of
each dimension shall be submitted in no less than one (1') foot lengths.
1.6 MOCK-UP:
A. Provide 8 section of fencing with all components for mock up at owners designated location for
review and approval.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store materials under heavy waterproof coverings or where well protected from inclement
weather, and on lift sticks to permit proper ventilation between uses.
B. Structural timber shall be neatly stacked on skids above ground and shall be protected from the
sun when necessary to prevent warping.
C. Deliver hardware (fasteners, nails, bolts, etc.) to site in easily handled waterproof bundles with
identification tags wired or taped securely in place. Store hardware to prevent damage and
protect from deformation.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Observe conditions of lumber.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 LUMBER:
A. All members shall be uniformly graded as to color, texture, and size. No splits, checks, holes,
decay or other irregularities will be permitted.
B. Lumber shall conform to the following grades:
1. Lumber in contact with grade or as shown for rails shall be No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine,
treated lumber.
2. Face for fence and trim shall be Red Cedar, appearance grade knotty per WRCLA in
dimensions or sizes as shown. Rough sawn to dimensions indicated.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE: Pressure-treated wood products intended for residential and recreational
(consumer) applications are new generation waterborne preservatives. The preservatives shall
contain no components considered hazardous under Environmental Protection Agency
regulations.
A. Exposure shall be Exterior, Above Ground. Waterborne, pressure impregnated preservative as
approved.
2.3 HARDWARE:
A. All hardware required for fabrication including brackets, hangers, hinges, fasteners, and nails,
shall be hot dip galvanized. Screws, nuts, bolts, and washers shall be hot dip galvanized or
stainless.
B. When shown on the plans and in addition to hardware, structural members fabricated from
steel, concrete, or other materials shall be incorporated into the structure.
WOOD FENCING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323129 - Page 3
C. Posts and post connections shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.4 CONCRETE, REINFORCING AND RELATED ITEMS: For footings, refer to Section 033053.
2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and
that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. All fence work shall be true to line and grade as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Tolerance: Vertical and horizontal members shall be plumb and finished grade of fence shall
match finished grade of ground plane.
C. Alignment and profile shall conform with profile unless adjustments are needed for field
conditions. Maintain level top and vertical boards.
D. Refer to details on the drawings.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Workmanship shall be first class throughout. All lumber shall be accurately cut to a close fit and
shall have even bearing over the entire contact surfaces.
B. All joints shall be square and tight unless otherwise shown. No shimming will be permitted in
making joints. Work shall be free of hammer marks, dents, or other disfiguration.
C. Nails and other hardware to be seated flush unless otherwise shown.
D. Bolts and Washers:
1. Bolts and washers are required only for board fence on chain link fence.
2. Washers of the size and type shown on Drawings shall be placed under all bolt heads
and nuts. All nuts shall be finally tightened to provide proper bearing and excess bolt
lengths of more than one (1") inch shall be cut off.
3. After being finally tightened, all nuts shall be checked or burred effectively with a pointing
tool to prevent loosening.
3.3 POSTS:
A. Post Excavation in Soil: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Coordinate with curbing and set top of foundation to allow
curbing to cover foundation.
WOOD FENCING

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
323129 - Page 4
B. Post Installation: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
3. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
4. Concealed Concrete: Top 5 inches at mow curbs to be installed below grade to allow
covering with surface material.
a. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored
into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill
annular space between post and sleeve with approved anchoring cement or
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from
post.
5. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches deep
and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with approved anchoring cement or nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.
END OF SECTION

WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 1
SECTION 329113
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
B. Work Included:
1. Provide planting media amendment
2. Provide testing and/or certification of soils
3. Ripping existing soil to relieve soil compaction in planting and turf areas
4. Amending of existing soil for planting
5. Mixing and placing planting mediums
6. Transporting and storage of soils and planting mediums
7. Machinery and loading restrictions
C. Related Work in Other Sections:
1. Fine Grading - Section 329119
2. Irrigation Systems - Section 328400
4. Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcover - Section 329300
5. Landscape Establishment - Section 32935
1.2 RELATED WORK UNDER A SEPARATE CONTRACT:
A. Earthwork and setting subgrade according to the Civil Engineer.
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Certificates of inspection: Provide as required by law for transportation, with invoice. File
copies of certificates with Landscape Architect after acceptance of material. Inspection by
governmental officials at point of origin does not preclude rejection of materials at project site.
B. Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by
authorities having jurisdiction over such work and provide for all inspections and permits
required by Federal, State and local authorities in furnishing, transporting, and installing
materials.
C. Certificates of Inspection: Certificates of inspection required for transportation shall accompany
invoice for each shipment of materials. File copies of certificates with Landscape Architect after
acceptance of material.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. If herbicide contamination is suspected, then a radish/rye grass growth trial must be
performed.
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 2
2. For delivered material, test one grab sample for each fifty (50) cubic yards of bulk
material delivered to the site.
3. Initial testing will be at the expense of the Owner. Subsequent testing, if required, shall
be at the expense of the Contractor.
4. Deviations greater than plus or minus ten (10%) percent from control data may be
grounds for rejection of mixes tested. Non-conforming materials shall not be used.
Materials which do not conform to standards specified herein shall be removed from the
site.
5. Import soil shall comply with particle sizes described in Part 2 - Products
E. Test Reports and Recommendations: Test reports submitted shall include but not be limited to
the following:
1. Fertility (as expressed in measures of pH, salinity, nitrates, ammonia, phosphate,
potassium, calcium and magnesium);
2. Agricultural Suitability (sodium absorption ratio, and boron, sodium acetate extractable
calcium), contaminant due to various detrimental chemicals and metals;
3. Heavy metals (cadmium, lead, arsenic, aluminum);
4. Nematode Tests: Import soils only;
5. Soils lab may require additional tests due to field conditions.
6. Additions of any required Nutrient and Organic amendment recommendations for the site
shall be included with all test results.
F. Materials to be tested:
1. On-site soil
2. Organic Amendment
3. Import Landscape Soils
G. Testing Agencies: Shall be as approved and designated by the Landscape Architect. Soils
laboratory shall be capable of providing all tests outlined in the section including field
observation personnel, and recommendations for soil amendments, soil chemistry, and
placement. Testing shall be accompanied with recommendations for nutrient and additives
including type and rate of application.
H. Horticultural and Agricultural Testing: Wallace Laboratories, 365 Coral Circle, El Segundo, CA,
90245, (31) 615-0116
1.5 BIDDING
A. The amendments, quantities and procedures included herein are for bidding purposes only and
are based on a Wallace Laboratory report which was provided for several existing soil areas on
the Walnut site. These soils are considered representative of surface conditions at the time and
it is believed surface soils will have similar nutrient requirements.
B. Contractor is required to take additional samples to establish actual soil amendment needs and
rates. That construction period agricultural soil analysis is to be taken after the rough grading,
and will be the basis for the work.
1. Intent: The amendments and quantities included herein are approximate and are for
bidding purposes only. Following final soil analysis, the composition or rates of
amendments may change. Contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
C. Tests shall be paid for by the Owner.
1.6 J OB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain: See Planting - Section 329300.
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 3
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples and Product Data: Provide literature and samples for review and approval prior to
delivery to the site.
1. Organic Amendments: 1-pint sample.
2. Chemical Additives: Literature.
3. Import Soil
4. Soil analysis and recommendations.
B. Test Data: Submit all laboratory test data for all materials.
C. Work Schedule
1. Submit a proposed work schedule to the Owner for approval at least 30 days prior to start
of work under this Section. After approval, no modification shall be made to this schedule
without written authorization by the Owner.
2. In general, the work shall proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent
with climatic limitations for the work.
D. Submittal Schedule:
1. Soil testing and recommendations shall be taken, tested and the resulting test data
submitted within 15 days after the award of the contract and not less than 90 days before
landscape work commences..
2. Provide documentation indicating approved sources of import soil.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Labeling: Furnish standard products in unopened manufacturer's standard containers bearing
original labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer.
B. Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage
or impair the effectiveness of the product.
C. Deliver material to site when permitted by Owner and only when project is ready for related
work.
1. Furnish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels
showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer.
1.9 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS
A. Sampling: The owner reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity
to specifications at any time. Furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect.
B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's
expense.
C. Testing: Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications.
A. Acceptance: The Landscape Architect will accept the work upon satisfactory completion of all
soil preparation.
B. Notification: Notify Landscape Architect for review of soil preparation prior to proceeding with
planting operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 4
2.1 GENERAL:
A. FINISH GRADE TOPSOIL:
1. Soil may be required to establish finished grade in planting beds and lawn areas.
a. Generally Soil should be provided and conform to specifications under Section
3291119 Finish Landscape Grading.
2.2 TOPSOIL
A. Definition: Topsoil shall be defined as an on-site soil material that could be used in the planting
mixes for backfill of tree, shrub and groundcover planting pits provided it can be made to
conform to the provisions included under the title "Topsoil".
B. Imported Topsoil shall also conform to the specifications.
C. General Qualifications: Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free
of stones over 1 inch diameter, sticks, oils, chemicals, asphalt materials and residues, toxic
substances, concrete and other deleterious materials, as a planting medium for the project. It
shall not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable disease-causing organisms such as
insects and plant pathogens.
D. Topsoil shall be friable and have sufficient structure in order to give good tilth and aeration to
the soil. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.
E. Gradation limits
1. Soil shall be a sandy loam, loam, clay loam or clay. The material shall be as specified
within these specifications or if not specifically identified it shall be similar to the existing
site soil.
2. The definition of soil texture shall be the USDA classification scheme.
3. Gravel over -inch in diameter shall be less than 10% by weight.
4. 100 % of the material shall pass a 1 sieve.
F. Permeability Rate - Hydraulic conductivity rate shall be not less than one inch per hour nor more
than 20 inches per hour when tested in accordance with the USDA Handbook Number 60,
method 34b or other approved methods.
G. Fertility - The range of the essential elemental concentration in soil shall be as follows:
1.
Ammonium
Bicarbonate/DTPA
Extraction
Parts per million
(mg/kilogram) Dry
Weight Basis
phosphorus 2 - 40
potassium 40 - 220
iron 2 - 35
manganese 0.3 - 6
zinc 0.6 - 8
copper 0.1 - 5
boron 0.2 - 1
magnesium 50 - 150
sodium 0 - 100
sulfur 25 - 500
molybdenum 0.1 - 30

H. Chemistry - Suitability Considerations:
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 5
1. Acidity - The soil pH range measured in the saturation extract (Method 21a, USDA
Handbook Number 60) shall be 6.0 - 7.9.
2. Salinity - The salinity range measured in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA
Handbook Number 60) shall be 0.5 - 2.0 dS/m. If calcium and if sulfate ions both exceed
20 milliequivalents per liter in the saturation extract, the maximum salinity shall be 4.0
dS/m.
3. Chloride - The maximum concentration of soluble chloride in the saturation extract
(Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 150 mg/l (parts per million).
4. Boron - The maximum concentration of soluble boron in the saturation extract (Method
3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 1 mg/l (parts per million).
5. Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) - The maximum SAR shall be 3 measured per Method
20b, USDA Handbook Number 60.
6. Aluminum Available aluminum measured with the Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA
Extraction shall be less than 5 parts per million.
7. Soil Organic Matter Content - Sufficient soil organic matter shall be present to impart
good physical soil properties but not be excessive to cause toxicity or cause excessive
reduction in the volume of soil due to decomposition of organic matter.
8. Calcium Carbonate Content - Free calcium carbonate (limestone) shall not be present.
9. Heavy Metals - The maximum permissible elemental concentration in the soil shall not
exceed the following concentrations:

Ammonium
Bicarbonate/DTPA
Extraction
Parts per million
(mg/kilogram) Dry
Weight Basis
arsenic 1
cadmium 1
chromium 10
cobalt 2
lead 30
mercury 1
nickel 5
selenium 3
silver 0.5
vanadium 3

a. If the soil pH is between 6 and 7, the maximum permissible elemental
concentration shall be reduced 50%. If the soil pH is less than 6.0, the maximum
permissible elemental concentration shall be reduced 75%. No more than three
metals shall be present at 50% or more of the above values.
I. Phytotoxic constituent, herbicides, hydrocarbons etc. - Germination and growth of monocots
and dicots shall not be restricted more than 10%. Total petroleum hydrocarbons shall not
exceed 50 mg/kg dry soil measured per the modified EPA Method No. 8015. Total aromatic
volatile organic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene and ethylbenzene) shall not exceed 0.5
mg/kg dry soil measured per EPA Methods No. 8020.
2.3 SOIL SAMPLING:
A. The Contractor shall schedule a site visit with the Landscape Architect for the purpose of
obtaining soil samples for analysis and recommendations.
1. Samples shall be provided on a by-park and by street basis throughout the project.
a. Samples for parks shall be taken from three typical planting locations in each main
park area.
b. Samples for streets and medians shall be taken from three typical planting areas in
and every street area and median area.
c. Combine individual samples for each different park, street or median and label the
sample in an approximate full quart baggie.
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 6
d. Samples shall then be delivered by the Contractor to the designated soil testing
laboratory. Submit soils analysis and recommendations to the Landscape
Architect for acceptance. Soil analysis shall indicate quantities, chemical properties
and recommended manufacturer or supplier.
e. Provide a site map that coincides with the sample labels and location areas
2.4 ORGANIC AMENDMENTS
A. Compost Amendment: Acceptable products are finely ground tree and shrub trimmings and
vegetable products that have been decomposed and fully composted at least 120 days.
Approved supplier is Garden-Ville Horticultural Products, San Antonio, Texas or approved
equivalent. Products must be tested and submitted for review. Material should fall within the
following ranges and characteristics:
1. Humus material shall have an acid-soluble ash content of no less than 6% and no more
than 20%.
2. The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 7.5.
3. The salt content shall be less than 10 millimho/cm @ 25 C. on a saturated paste extract.
a. Higher amounts of salinity may be present if the soils are to be preleached to
reduce the excess or if the plant species will tolerate the salinity. Final
determination will be made during soil testing and recommendations.
4. Boron content of the saturated extract shall be less than 1.0 parts per million.
a. Higher amounts of boron may be present if the soils are to be preleached to
reduce the excess or if the plant species will tolerate the boron. Final
determination will be made during soil testing and recommendations.
5. Silicon content (acid-insoluble ash) shall be less than 50%.
6. Calcium carbonate shall not be present if to be applied on alkaline soils.
7. Types of acceptable products are composts, manures, mushroom composts, straw,
alfalfa, peat mosses etc. low in salts, low in heavy metals, free from weed seeds, free of
pathogens and other deleterious materials.
8. Composted wood products are conditionally acceptable [stable humus must be present].
Wood based products are not acceptable which are based on red wood or cedar.
9. Sludge-based materials are not acceptable if the soil already has a high level (toxic level)
of zinc, copper or other heavy metals based on soil analysis.
10. Carbon:nitrogen ratio is less than 25:1.
11. The compost shall be aerobic without malodorous presence of decomposition products.
12. The maximum particle size shall be 0.5 inch, 80% or more shall pass a No. 4 screen for
soil amending. The maximum particle size shall be 0.25 inch for hydro-seed application.
B. Maximum total permissible pollutant concentrations in amendment in parts per million on a dry
weight basis:
Item Parts Per Million
Maximum
Item Parts Per Million
Maximum
arsenic 20 mercury 10
copper 150 vanadium 500
selenium 50 cobalt 50
cadmium 15 molybdenum 60
lead 200 zinc 300
silver 10 nickel 100
chromium 300

2.5 CHEMICAL ADDITIVES:
A. The following additives may or may not be used depending on the outcome of the soils report.
1. Ground Limestone: Agricultural limestone containing not less than 85% of total
carbonates, ground to such fineness that 50% will pass #100 sieve and 90% will pass
#20 sieve.
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 7
2. Dolomite Lime: Agricultural grade mineral soil conditioner containing 35% minimum
magnesium carbonate and 49% minimum calcium carbonate, 100% passing #65 sieve.
"Kaiser Dolomite 65 AG" as manufactured by Kaiser, Inc. Mineral Products Department,
or equal.
3. Gypsum: Agricultural grade product containing 90% minimum calcium sulfate dihydrate.
4. Iron Sulfate (Ferric or Ferrous): Supplied by a commercial fertilizer supplier, containing
20% to 30% iron and 35% to 40% sulfur.
5. Sulfate of Potash: Agricultural grade containing 50% to 53% of water-soluble potash.
6. Single Superphosphate: Commercial product containing 20% to 25% available
phosphoric acid.
7. Ammonium Sulfate: Commercial product containing approximately 21% ammonia
measured as nitrogen.
8. Ammonium Phosphate: Commercial product containing approximately 18% ammonia
measured as nitrogen and 48% phosphoric acid.
9. Ammonium Nitrate: Commercial product containing approximately 17% ammonia
measured as nitrogen and 17% nitrate nitrogen..
10. Calcium Nitrate: Agricultural grade containing 15 % nitrogen and 21% calcium.
11. Urea Formaldehyde (Urea-Form): Granular commercial product containing 38% slow
release nitrogen with a minimum of 23% WIN (water insoluble nitrogen).
12. I.B.D.U. (Iso Butyldiene Diurea): Commercial product containing 31% slow release
nitrogen.
13. Soil Sulfur: Agricultural grade sulfur containing a minimum of 96% sulfur.
14. Iron Sequestrene: Geigy Iron Sequestrene 138 Fe (Iron EDDHA)
15. Gro-Safe: Herbicide absorbent as manufactured by American Norit Company of
J acksonville, FL (800) 641 9245).
2.6 WATER: Clean, fresh and potable, furnished and paid for by Owner.
2.7 SOIL MIXES
A. Backfill Mix for On-Grade Plant Pits: Thoroughly mix the following components into one (1 cy)
cubic yard of backfill mix:
1. Amount per Cubic Yard
a. 90% by volume of on-site soil
b. 10% by volume of organic compost
c. 1/4 pound ammonium sulfate
d. 1/4 pound of triple super phosphate
e. 1/2 pounds agricultural gypsum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. WEED ERADICATION:
1. Before commencing work remove all weed growth and vegetation in all planted areas.
a. Use mechanical and/or chemical means as required to provide the complete
removal of weeds and seeds that exist and may be introduced into the soil.
b. Keep areas completely free from weeds until amended and planting takes over the
work.
c. Should time elapse between preparation and planting, remove weeds again prior
to planting.
B. SOIL CONDIITONING AND PREPARATION
1. Existing Soil to be Amended: Inspect existing soil and do all work necessary to bring it to
standards specified under "General Qualifications" in Part 2 of this Secton.. Amend as
specified herein.
2. Areas of planting to be amended
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 8
a. All areas receiving planting that is not turf shall receive full soil conditioning,
preparation and amending.
b. All areas to receive turf grass shall receive soil preparation and conditioning except
no organic materials will be required during conditioning.
3.2 SOIL PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Moisture Content: Do not work soil when moisture content is so great that excessive
compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not
break readily. Apply water, if necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for
tilling and planting.
2. Clearing of Debris: Clear all planting areas of stones 1 in. diameter and larger, weeds,
debris and other extraneous materials prior to amending existing soil.
B. Preparation of Existing Soil:
1. Verification of Existing Grades: Verify that grades are within 1 in. plus or minus of the
required finished grades. Report all variations to the Landscape Architect.
2. Clearing of Debris: Clear all planting areas of stones 2 in. diameter and larger, weeds,
debris and other extraneous materials prior to amending existing soil or spreading
imported topsoil.
3. Cultivation: Rip or cultivate all planting areas to a depth of 12 inches immediately prior to
amending existing soil. Rototill to reduce soil clods to a maximum diameter of one (1")
inch in the top six (6:) inches.) Do not rototill within the existing tree areas.
3.3 SOIL CONDITIONING
A. Amending of Existing Soil:
B. Verification: Do not commence amending of existing soil prior to acceptance by Landscape
Architect of soil preparation.
C. Application Rate: Apply to all planting areas at the following rates per 1,000 square feet:
1. 6 cubic yards organic amendment as specified
2. 5 pounds ammonium sulfate (21-0-0)
3. 4 pounds triple super phosphate (0-45-0)
4. 10 pounds agricultural gypsum
5. (Other Chemical additives per soils report, if any)
6. Areas to receive Sod: Delete organic component, provide incorporated chemical
amendments as specified.
D. Incorporation of Amendments: Incorporate homogeneously and thoroughly with top 6 in. of soil
layer and bring amended soil to finish grades and elevations shown on Drawings. Do not work
soils under muddy conditions.
E. Surface broadcast amendments at 1/3 the specified rate in the existing tree areas prior to hand
soil conditioning or raking, do not otherwise incorporate.
3.4 DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS
A. Surface Drainage:
1. Discrepancies: Provide proper surface drainage of planted areas. Submit in writing all
discrepancies in the Drawings or Specifications, or prior work done by others, which
Contractor feels precludes establishing proper drainage.
2. Correction: Include description of work required for correction or relief of said condition.
B. Detrimental Drainage, Soils and Obstructions:
SOIL PREPARATION

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329113 - Page 9
1. Notification: Submit in writing all soils or drainage conditions considered detrimental to
growth of plant materials. State condition and submit proposal and cost estimate for
correcting condition.
2. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction
before proceeding with work.
3. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are
encountered in the performance of work under this section, submit cost required to
remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6 in. below the required soil depth.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
B. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to
Final Acceptance to the satisfaction of Landscape Architect.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 1

SECTION 329119
FINISH LANDSCAPE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Work Included:
1. Preparing subgrades for planting and for installation of turf grasses.
2. Machinery restrictions.
3. Furnish imported topsoil.
4. Transport or move suitable excavated site top soil from stock pile area (adjacent or near
site) as determined to be available by the general contractor.
5. Subgrade preparation and spreading topsoil.
6. Final finish grading.
1. Earthwork Sections and Requirements of the Engineers Specifications
2. Items pertaining to grading as required and referenced in the Engineers TXDOT ITEMS
Specifications.
3. Subgrade, sub base and excavation or backfill for paving, trails walks, walls and other
non-planting construction shall comply with the Engineers Documents.
4. Landscape Drainage & Subdrainage - Section 334617
5. Protection of Existing Trees Section 015639
6. Landscape Irrigation Systems - Section 328400
7. Soil Preparation Section 329113
9. Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcovers - Section 329300
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
1. The work in this Section is affected by the Unit Prices for Landscape Grading specified in
Division 1 Unit Prices.
B. Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include items encountered for the proper excavation
and backfill as specified here in or included in the Engineers specifications.
1. Excavation for encountered general rock and rocky soil shall be included in the unit price
and will include not less than 12 inches outside excavations and the depth plus 6 inches
beyond the minimum required dimensions where rock must be excavated to complete the
required work for indicated planting, structure, subslab or paving in the landscape
architectural drawings.
a. Contractor is responsible for understanding the soil and soil type generally present
in the area of this project. Contractor shall review and use provided geotechnical
reports and information and apply such knowledge and information in the
preparation of unit prices.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 2
2. Excavation for Hard Rock, which shall be defined as un-stratified rock material in beds,
ledges and masses, or conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material that exceed
2 cubic yards of mass for bulk excavation for landscape areas, footing, trench, and pit
excavation which cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the
following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, or
ripping by conventional late model bulk excavation equipment not less than 230 hp and
capable of developing 47,992 lbf break out force shall be based on a per cubic yard
removal price stated in the unit prices.
a. Alternatively, such hard rock items shall be identified by the contractor and such
planting or structure may be relocated to other site areas, moved or other courses
of action may be taken if approved. These alternatives shall occur during the
excavation process and selection of alternative plan of action made in a timely
manner (within 72 hours) at the discretion of the landscape architect or owners
representative.
1) Notify the landscape architect and owners representative for how to proceed
should such Hard Rock obstructions be discovered and provide a site
location map showing and generally outlining the areas.
C. Unit prices for fill shall be provided as price per in place and compacted cubic yard.
1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS:
A. Finished grading shall be defined as placing and grading of additional soil which will be required
to bring the grade to the required grades for planting as indicated in the landscape architects
drawings.
B. The Contractor, under this Section, shall receive the site at the engineers finished grade which
is at roughly finished grade provided under a separate contract, for planting and lawn areas.
C. On-Grade: This contractor shall receive this project at rough grade as provided in the earth
work section of the engineers specifications for on grade specifications. Verify subgrades
elevations that are to be provided with the general contractor and review the earthwork
specifications. The material and grades hat will be provided by the earthwork contract are the
grades that this contractor will commence his operations.
D. Additional soil and topsoil fill materials shall generally be defined as topsoil as specified herein
unless otherwise specified.
E. After the earthwork and finish grading work is accomplished, final finish grading shall proceed
and then be followed by Soil Preparation specified in Section 329113.
1. Prior to finish grading, contractor shall be required to rip soil to alleviate compaction if it
exists prior to final finish grading and soil preparation for the area.
2. After ripping and finish grading the use of heavy machinery shall be kept to a minimum
where practicable and as directed,
3. If more than 30 days elapse between ripping to relieve compaction and commencement
of soil preparation, soil shall be re-ripped as a part of this contract.
F. Refer also to grading information in the engineers specifications, drawings and in the
geotechnical engineers reports for this site.
A. Firm performing this section shall have completed work similar in scope and size for a minimum
of 5 years prior to commencing this work.
1. Firm shall have the manpower, operators and equipment or access to equipment and
operators such that the general contractors schedule can be met or exceeded in the time
allowed in the coordinated work schedule for the execution portion of this work.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Soil Testing and Reports:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 3
1. Agricultural laboratories report including analysis and recommendations for soil used in
grading and fill operations including on site, stock piled or imported soil for planting uses
or in planting areas. Analysis shall include as a minimum, soil pH, sieve/grading and full
chemistry with metals as well as anticipated infiltration rates of soil. Where import soil is
planned, include a report for existing as well as the import and recommendations from
the lab about the compatibility of the import with the site soil.
a. Reference Soil Preparation Section 329113 for qualified laboratory selection
information regarding soil type and other requirements.
2. Geotechnical laboratories analysis and recommendations for soil used in fill, support or
backfill for foundation or structural fill conditions.
a. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
b. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 as
required by the engineer.
c. Testing for compaction in general landscape areas can be required should the
areas not be ripped within 45 days of start of soil preparation. Testing shall be
evaluated and reviewed under the discretion of the owner and landscape architect.
B. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during grading operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction and within the
coordinated construction access and use plans provided as a part of the General
Conditions Division 1 as agreed to by the Engineer and the Owner.
a. General Contractor shall maintain traffic control and barricades necessary to route
traffic around or through the work zone as required by the Engineer and Owner.
B. Adjoining Property: Authority for performing grading indicated on property adjoining Owner's
property must be obtained by the adjacent property Owner through the public authority before
commencing this Contract.
C. Protect adjacent owners property including improvements, utilities, landscape, and irrigation
system if any. Any damage shall be repaired at the contractors expense with no cost to both
the owner and the adjacent property owner.
1. If irrigation system on adjacent property is encountered, contractor shall relocate to cover
planting fully and if automatic shall install and protect such that the system remains
automatic and provides adequate irrigation coverage on the adjacent properties
landscape. Make such provisions and irrigation relocations within 48 hours of encounter
and include the work in this contract at no additional charge to either the owner or the
adjacent property owner.
a. Review systems, structures and utilities in the presence of the owners project
manager prior to commencing work. Pothole as necessary to confirm site
conditions.
b. Document site conditions with written reports and photography as necessary.
c. Restore property to conditions as good or better than that encountered at the start
of this contract.
2. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until documentation is complete and
afterwards as agreed and directed by the owners representative.
D. Contact the appropriate Utility Location service(s) having responsibility for utilities in the area
and locate utilities prior to commencing work. Comply with requirements and restrictions.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 4
1. When uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities and services
are encountered during site work operations, notify the applicable utility company
immediately to obtain procedure directions. Cooperate with the applicable utility
company in maintaining active services in operation.
E. Control dust caused by the work. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control
regulations of governing authorities.
F. Install and maintain erosion and sediment control method and devices outlined by the engineer
and required by the local Storm Water Pollution Prevention districts requirements
G. Where existing plants are shown to remain and protected refer to and observe requirements of
Division 1 Specification pertaining to tree protection and Existing Plants to Remain.
1. Respect restrictions of tree protection fence areas and tree protection zones:
a. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
b. Parking or maintaining vehicles or equipment.
c. Foot traffic.
d. Erection of sheds or structures.
e. Impoundment of water.
f. Excavation or digging unless otherwise indicated.
g. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
otherwise indicated.
h. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
i. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near
protection zones.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 EQUIPMENT: Machinery and hand tools at the contractors option which are suitable to
accomplish the work using qualified workmen and operators in the time frame indicated in the
coordinated General Contractors schedule and to the extent shown in the drawings.
2.2 GENERAL FILL SOIL:
A. General Qualifications: Fill for on grade applications shall be similar to existing on site soil,
clean, dry soil of a loamy character, well drained and well graded with a plasticity index not to
exceed 20 or fall below 8. Fill material shall contain no oils, alkalis, acids, rubbish or other
deleterious materials.
B. Additional Requirements:
1. Provide import soil as fill if existing available on site soil materials, materials from
excavations or stock piled soils are insufficient to bring areas to suitable levels.
2. Test soil being proposed for agricultural suitability if used in planting and for the
requirements of the geotechnical engineer if used in structural or paving applications.
C. Engineers and Geotechnical Requirements: All general fill soil not specific for planting which is
primarily used for structural fill at landscape pavements or structures shall comply with the
specification and material requirements of the engineer.
2.3 TOPSOIL FOR ON-GRADE PLANTING APPLICATIONS:
A. Topsoil material that may be required for finish and fine grading operations shall conform to the
requirements included within this Section.
B. General Qualifications: Topsoil shall be considered as imported material conforming to the
following minimum criteria:
1. Natural, friable, loamy soil, typical of local topsoil which produces heavy vegetative
growth, free from subsoil, weeds, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than one (1") inch, toxic
substances, debris, or other substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Do not
deliver in muddy condition.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 5
2. Acidity/Alkalinity: pH 6.0 to pH 7.5.
3. Grading Analysis: 100 percent passing a two (2") inch sieve, 90 percent minimum
passing the number 4 sieve, 80 percent minimum passing the number 10 sieve.
4. Sand, Silt, and Clay Content:
a. Loam and Sand content 75 to 85 percent
b. Silt 10 to 15 percent
c. Clay 5 to 10 percent
5. All topsoil shall be free from all herbicides and insecticides which might adversely affect
subsequent growth of turf or plantings or which might otherwise contain materials toxic to
humans and pets.
C. Non-Conforming Material: The Contractor shall not be permitted to use on-site material which
does not conform to the above minimum criteria for fine grade operations. At the discretion of
the Landscape Architect, such material can either be amended to meet the minimum
requirements or shall be removed from the site and replaced with suitable material as specified
herein.
D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the existing topsoil conforms to these
specifications. Topsoil determined to be non-conforming subsequent to the award of a contract
shall not be means for extra compensation unless otherwise provided for herein.
E. SOIL REPORTS:
1. Agricultural Soil Analysis: Contractor is required to take soil samples and deliver them
to an approved laboratory for analysis and recommendations and to determine the
agricultural suitability as well as compliance with these specifications in areas where soil
is used for planting. Reference also Specification Section 329113.
2. Engineering Soil Analysis: Contractor shall work with the geotechnical lab and the civil or
structural regarding the need for soil reports and compliance with materials for fill or
backfill operations for paving and structures indicated in the landscape architects work
and drawings.
2.4 SAND: Shall be clean sand meeting the requirements of ASTM C-33. Sample shall be
submitted for approval. Sand shall not be permitted for fill purposes if the depth exceeds two
(2") inches to achieve the finished grade.
2.5 GEOTEXTILES, FILTER FABRICS AND DRAINAGE MAT
A. Reference the Engineers drawings and specifications and Section 334617 Landscape
Drainage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Work shall be performed by personnel trained and experienced in the preparation and
installation of similar projects as noted in Part 1 Quality Assurances.
B. Contractor shall employ a superintendent/project manager to direct and coordinate the
materials, equipment, personnel and schedule with the general contractors representative.
3.2 EXCAVATION:
A. Make excavations to 4 below the relative dimensions and elevations indicated on Drawings.
B. Excavated material determined suitable for use as fills or topsoil may be stored on the site in
locations as directed. Excavated material unsuitable for fills shall be disposed of, legally, off
site.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 6
C. Where unmarked utility lines or other underground obstructions or piping may be uncovered
within the work area, notify the Landscape Architect or the agencies or service utility companies
having jurisdiction thereof, and take necessary measures to prevent interruption of service (if
live). Should such lines or services be damaged, broken, or interrupted through the
Contractor's own negligence, those services shall be repaired immediately and restored by him
at his own expense. Abandoned lines, meters, and boxes, obstructions or piping shall be
removed, plugged, or capped in accordance with the requirements and approval of the agencies
affected, or as directed by the Owners Representative.
D. Maintain all excavated areas free from water throughout progress of the work. All surface or
subsurface seepage encountered shall be run to temporary sumps located where required or
directed. From the sumps, water shall be pumped out and legally disposed of in a manner that
will keep the entire site reasonably dry and in an accessible and workable condition at all times.
3.3 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL:
A. Finished subgrade for import soil shall be set such that the grade will be parallel everywhere to
proposed finished grade. Then the subgrade soil shall be ripped to a depth of 12 inches on 12
inch centers immediately prior to spreading import soil. All stones over one and one-half (1
1/2") inches in any dimensions, sticks, rubbish and other extraneous matter shall be removed
during this operation. No heavy equipment or track equipment that will yield additional
compaction to the subgrade shall be moved over planting areas after the subgrade soil has
been prepared before topsoil is spread.
B. After the subgrade soil has been ripped and prepared, suitable site stock pile soil if available
and/or imported topsoil shall be spread evenly in lifts of four (4") inches until required finished
elevations are reached in lawn and planting areas.
1. Spreading shall be accomplished by an approved method and then rolled to 85%
compaction in planting areas.
2. Compaction in paving areas shall be accomplished as determined by the structural
engineer or geotechnical engineer.
3. No topsoil shall be spread in a frozen or muddy condition or over muddy or frozen
subsoil.
a. Add moisture as required to achieve compaction as required by the engineer.
C. The finished surface of the topsoil shall conform to the finished grade and shall be free from
hollows or other inequalities, stones, sticks, and other extraneous matter.
3.4 INITIAL ROTO-TILL:
A. As soon as the subgrade soil has been ripped and topsoil is spread to rough grade, roto-til the
entire planting or turf area to a depth not less than 6 inches to blend the ripped soil and mix in
the final fill
3.5 FINISH GRADING:
A. After tilling is completed, fill all low spots and cut irregularities to the acceptance of the
Landscape Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for minor adjustments to the finished
subgrade if such treatment is required in the opinion of the Landscape Architect.
B. During the finished grading operations, all swales and additional swales that may be required to
drain areas where there are existing plant materials, shall be finished. In general, all grade
adjustments shall be made so the soil slopes with positive drainage to inlets or overland, and
there are no areas that will have standing water.
C. The Contractor shall organize grading operations such that soil preparation and landscaping
follow final grading in quick succession to prevent excessive weed growth in planting and lawn
areas.
D. Restore adjacent properties which are damaged or receive soil covering to appropriate grades
and to the condition prior to damage by this contractor.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329119 - Page 7
3.6 CLEAN-UP
B. Clean up and remove all equipment, deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area
prior to Final Acceptance.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9 2010
329200 - Page 1
SECTION 329200
LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sodding.
2. Erosion control material(s).
3. Watering and maintenance
1. The Engineers Specifications Site Clearing and "Earthwork" for topsoil stripping and
stockpiling excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.
2. Section 328400 Landscape Irrigation
3. Section 329119 Finish Landscape Grading
4. Section 329113 Soil Preparation
5. Section 329300 Trees, Shrubs, Perennials, Vines and Groundcover (Planting)
6. Section 329350 Landscape Establishment
7. Section 334617 Landscape Drainage
1.3 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
B. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices for turf grass specified in Division 1 Section "Unit
Prices."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
a. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application
instructions specific to this Project.
b. Erosion control fabric.
c. Sod: Provide source of sod to be used, growers certification of the sod material,
and comply with description under Part 2 Products.
B. Certifications:
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 2
1. Certification of sod: Include identification of source and name and telephone number of
supplier
a. Seed material shall be labeled and certified according to the Federal Seed Act
1998 or the most current revision.
b. Sod material shall be true to variety and if originally grown from seed that original
seed shall have been certified prior to installation.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.
D. Soil Test Reports: Reference Section 329113 Soil Preparation.
E. Establishment Period and Maintenance:
1. Provide logs of establishment period as stated in Section 329350.
2. Develop recommended general procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance
of turf during a calendar year based on Establishment period experience which has been
reviewed by the landscape architect and incorporates their additional comments if any.
3. Provide final maintenance recommendations comments 5 days prior to the expiration of
required initial maintenance periods.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer and firm whose work has resulted in
successful turf grass establishment.
1. Professional Membership: Firm and key personnel shall be a member in good standing
of the Texas Turfgrass Association CPTM (Certified Professional Turf Manager) program
or optionally may be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare
Network, The Texas Nurserymen and Landscape Contractors Association or the
American Nursery and Landscape Association. Maintenance personnel must be CPTM
certified if this project includes turf grass in excess of 3 acres.
a. Person shall hold current certificates through the completion of the project and
shall hold the appropriate certificate for the project (Texas Certified Landscape
Professional, Certified Landscape Technician or similar equivalent) and be
qualified in planting, fertilization, soil preparation and general irrigation).
b. A minimum of one person that is current with association membership and testing
shall be on site not less than 30 percent of the time the project is under
construction generally operating as the projects on site project manager. The
project manager will have a minimum of 10 years of landscape experience
including turf grass installation and maintenance.
2. Experience: Installers jobsite supervisor (either the project manager or another person
with the firm) who may also be certified shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience in
landscape installation. I
a. Installers experienced supervisor will be on site the full-time that the project is
being installed.
3. Experience and Quality qualifications are in addition to requirements in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Reference Standards comply with Latest Edition at time of Bid for the following::
1. Hortus Third, Liberty Hyde Bailey Hortorium, 1976 or latest edition.
C. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory recognized by the USDA or
State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
1. Soil Testing, Analysis and Recommendations: Reference Soil Preparation Section
329113.
D. Inspections:
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 3
1. Make written request for inspection after fine grading and prior to seeding operations
2. Make written request for inspection after grass installation operations have been
completed in combination with the substantial completion meetings for other landscape
planting and irrigation of the project. Such inspection is for the purpose of establishing
the Maintenance Period.
3. Submit written requests for inspections to the Landscape Architect at least seven (7)
days prior to anticipated inspection date.
E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference with the General Contractor and Owner at the
project site or Owners office at 90 days prior to commencing work. Provide 7 days notice for
coordination of the meeting. Meeting is required to occur after submittals are approved but prior
to 90 days of anticipated start of construction.
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver Seed and Other Packaged Materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis or product, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of
conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
B. Product Storage:
1. Protect products from weather or other conditions that would damage or impair the
effectiveness of the items.
C. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in
Turfgrass Producers International (TPI's) "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."
1. Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting.
2. Do not schedule more sod than can be planted within 24 hours of delivery. Review sod
not installed within the schedule time frame and dispose of unsuitable material.
a. Remove and dispose of sod materials that are damaged, beginning to decay or
showing advanced heat stress and otherwise unsuitable sod material.
3. Protect sod from breakage and drying during shipment and on the project site.
D. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of soil amendments with appropriate certificates.
1.7 PROJ ECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: For protection of existing plants to remain refer to Section 329300
Planting.
B. Climate Restrictions: Do not install lawns during rainy weather.
C. Protection Of Existing Lawns To Remain:
1. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment on
existing lawn areas to remain except as actually required for construction in those areas.
2. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers as necessary to protect existing lawns to
remain form damage during construction.
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 4
3. Provide a blend (including grade, contouring and material) of existing and new turf
together so the look is a seamless appearance.
4. Notify Landscape Architect in any case where Contractor believe that grading or other
construction called for by Contract Documents may damage existing lawns to remain.
5. If existing lawn areas to remain are damaged during construction, Contractor shall
replace such lawn areas of the same quality as those damaged at no cost to Owner.
Determination of extent of damage and value of damaged lawns shall rest solely with
Landscape Architect.
1.8 TIMING OF INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Within 3 calendar days after the completion and acceptance of soil preparation and finish
grading in any area and prior to any weather conditions that would affect graded areas.
Regrade as required if rainfall occurs between fine grading and installation of grass or turf
materials.
B. Temporary Irrigation:
1. Non-irrigated areas on this project:
a. Provide temporary irrigation until material is established.
C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's
1.9 MAINTENANCE THROUGH ACCEPTANCE AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
A. Turf and Lawn, Establishment and Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled
employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Landscape Establishment Section
02935 until Substantial Completion as a part of installation contract at no additional cost to the
owner. When the project is accepted at substantial completion the Landscape Establish
maintenance time frame will start and will be in effect. Contractor is responsible for
maintenance between installation and Substantial Completion.
1. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until
establishment and acceptance.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: If requested by the Owner at or during the Establishment
Period, the contractor shall provide a proposal for turf management and maintenance, in the
form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement starting on date initial
establishment service is concluded. State terms of agreement for services, obligations,
conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
1. Review scope and terms with the landscape architect and owner prior to submitting the
final proposal to owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TURFGRASS SOD
A. Turfgrass Sod: Approved sod complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in
TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,
color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted.
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 5
B. Turf shall be dense and well rooted prior to stripping from the field. Variety of grass(es) for turf
shall be Common Bermuda.
1. Sod shall be dense with the grass having been mowed at one (1") inch height before
lifting from field. All grown on fumigated soil.
2. Sod shall be in vigorous condition, dark green in color, free of disease and harmful
insects.
3. Comply with Part 1 Delivery Storage and Handling.
4. Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject any sod deemed unacceptable for
installation.
2.2 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination
or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. Do not
use on seeded areas.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth
that has already germinated. Product must be compatible with newly installed lawns or recently
germinated seed grasses to be accepted. Comply with product label use and restrictions.
2.3 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS:
A. Reference Landscape Grading Section 329119
2.4 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER: Refer to Section 329113 Soil
Preparation and Section 329350 Landscape Establishment.
2.5 TOP DRESS SOIL MIX:
A. Soil blend of sharp sand, loam topsoil and fine ground compost.
2.6 GRASS-PAVING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 02795 Grass Paving and to Section 02910 for Soil portion of paving fill.
2.7 WATER:
A. Clean, free from harmful substances including petroleum products, acids, alkalis, and pesticides
that would make it unsuitable to aid in the vigorous growth and development of turf grass. If
source of water is not potable water from a public source, the water source must be approved
prior to use.
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Verify that fine grading and soil preparation are completed, have been reviewed and
accepted by the owners representative and landscape architect.
2. Confirm no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting
area.
3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Landscape Architect and replace with
new planting soil.
3.2 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. After Soil Condition is completed, compaction is relieved, commence preparation to install sod:
B. Sod Bed:
1. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
2. Grade and rake grass and turf planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with
loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish
elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grade and
tolerances. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.
C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.3 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or staples for erosion control which
are spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod
strip to prevent slippage.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting,
water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2
inches below sod.
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 7
3.4 TURF RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing turf.
B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or
equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is
required.
2. Install new planting soil as required.
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.
D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and
other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new
planting soil.
E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.
F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as
required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf,
and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm).
I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix
thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet
finish grades.
J . Apply sod as required for new turf.
K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
3.5 MAINTENANCE:
A. Maintain turf weekly until acceptance and the start of the 90 day establishment period according
to Specification 329350 Landscape Establishment.
3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.
LAWNS AND GRASSES

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329200 - Page 8
Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify
Owner before each application is performed.
B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat
already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted
areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and
remove after plantings are established.
C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
END OF SECTION

WALNUT AVENUE
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 1
SECTION 329300
TREES, SHRUBS, PERENNIALS, VINES AND GROUNDCOVER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 The Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract including the City of New Braunfels
1.3 SUMMARY
1. Protection of existing trees to remain.
2. Pruning and fertilizing existing trees to remain.
3. Excavation of plant pits and beds.
4. Plant materials and related items.
5. Finish grading of planted areas.
6. Steel edging.
7. Mulch
8. Warranty and replacements
1. Tree and Plant Protection City of New Braunfels Special Specifications and Special
Provisions - Section 25
2. Sprinkler Irrigation - Section 328400
3. Soil Preparation - Section 0329113
4. Lawns and Turf Grasses Section 329200
5. Landscape Establishment Section 329350
6. Landscape Drainage Section 334617
1.4 UNIT PRICES
specifications.
B. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change
Orders.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants on similar projects.
of the Professional Landcare Network, The Texas Nurserymen and Landscape
Contractors Association or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
construction generally operating as the projects on site project manager or similar
TREES, SHRUBS, PERENNIALS VINES AND GROUNDCOVER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 2
name as the installer firms may elect to title the individual. The project manager
will have a minimum of 10 years of experience.
being installed.
B. Reference Standards comply with Latest Edition at time of Bid for the following::
1. "Grades and Standards", Texas Association of Nurserymen Specifications, Austin, Texas
78704 or the latest edition;.
2. "American Standard for Nursery Stock", May, 2004 American National Standards
Institute, Incorporated, (A.N.S.I. Z60-1-2004). or latest edition.
3. Hortus Third, Liberty Hyde Bailey Hortorium, 1976 or latest edition.
C. Source - Quality Control:
1. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by Landscape Architect at place of
growth and upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approval shall not impair
the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the Work. Submit written request
for inspection of plant material at place of growth to Landscape Architect. Written request
shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. Landscape
Architect reserves right to refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment a sufficient
quantity of plants is not available for inspection.
a. In general, there should be approximately 60 percent greater quantity available to
review than the quantity shown on the drawings if the material is easily determined
to be acceptable from photographs. Greater quantities may be needed if material
is not readily acceptable from photographs.
2. All plants inspected at the nursery by the Landscape Architect shall be tagged with
serialized self-locking tags. Trees delivered to the site without these tags or with broken
tags shall be sufficient reason for rejection.
3. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by
Landscape Architect. If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a
proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with
corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Such proof shall be substantiated and
submitted in writing to Landscape Architect at least thirty (30) days prior to start of Work
under this Section. These provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of
obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other
arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials.
D. Reference 2.1 K for a general list of acceptable growers and Part 4 Schedule for examples of
suitable material quality that will be expected on the project.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain:
1. Operations: Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park
equipment under the branches of all existing plants to remain except as actually required
for construction in those areas.
2. Barriers: Provide barricades, fences or other barriers as necessary at the drip line to
protect existing plants to remain from damage during construction.
3. Notification: Notify Landscape Architect when Contractor feels other construction
activities may damage existing plants to remain.
B. Replacement of Damaged Plants:
1. Replacement: Replace existing plants to remain which are damaged during construction
with accepted plants of the same species and size as those damaged at no cost to
Owner.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 3
2. Landscape Architect shall determine extent of damage and value of damaged plants.
C. Inspections: Make written request for inspection after planting operations have been
completed. Such inspection is for the purpose of establishing the Maintenance Period.
D. Submit written requests for inspections to the Landscape Architect at least seven (7) days prior
to anticipated inspection date.
1.7 SUBMITTALS:
A. Furnish required copies of photographic documentation, manufacturers' literature, samples,
certifications, or laboratory analytical data for the following items:
1. Material Samples and Literature: Submit requested items not less than 14 calendar days
after award of contract and not less than 60 days after award of the general contractors
contract.
2. Attach product name, address of manufacturer and/or supplier and appropriate literature
to each sample. Literature or Product Data shall consist of manufacturer's current
specifications, with catalog cuts, data sheets and installation instructions.
B. Plant Material Submittals: Submit documentation within 14 calendar days of award of contract
that all plant materials have been located and are ready to be secured. Arrange specific review
procedure of plant materials at time of submission. Submittals and review shall be organized as
follows:
1. Preliminary Review: Within 21 calendar days of award of contract and not less than 90
days prior to installation plants are to be submitted for review and approval. Submit
representative photographs for review of all plant materials in the required sizes and in
available quantity for all plant materials.
2. Form of Submittal:
a. Submittal shall include a photo JPG or optional PDF print out of the photo. A
minimum of 2 digital photographs illustrating each specified plant at not less than
300 dpi (dots per inch) image quality with additional text and information as
required below:
1) One photograph of the group or field of plants
2) At least one photograph of a proposed individual plant (or several specimen
plants) The intent for the Landscape Architect to be able to clearly
understand the range of character and quality being proposed.
3) Sheets are to be digitally formatted on sheets at 8 x 11
b. The provided text information on the submitted PDF is to include
1) Name and address of the supplier,
2) Measured dimensions of
a) The plant and container or root nall size of the plant in the photograph
b) The container size or root ball size and dimensions
c) Botanical and English name of the plant.
3) Tree photographs
a) Shall include a person, marked rod or other device to determine scale
b) Shall be taken from not less than 2 directions.
4) A clear statement of the quantity available for selection at each different
nursery source and for each different plant or size of plant that is and will be
available when the anticipated trip to the nursery will occur.
a) If sufficient quantity is not available then the submittal is not
acceptable and resubmittal is required.
c. Plants delivered are to reasonably match the provided photographs.
d. Submittal is to be provided as both paper copy and digital file.
3. Nursery Review and Tagging: The Landscape Architect may elect to review any of the
material at the place of growth. Upon review and acceptance of plant material
photograph submittals, specific items will be selected for field review by the Landscape
Architect. The Landscape Contractor shall arrange the review and he shall accompany
the Landscape Architect for all reviews and tagging plants at their place of growth and
upon delivery for conformity to specifications.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 4
4. Photograph Acceptance and Nursery Review: Acceptance of material through
photographs does not preclude rejection of unsatisfactory material upon delivery. The
Landscape Architect reserves the right to refuse review from photographs or at the
grower if, in his judgment suitable material or sufficient quantities are not available.
Contractor shall insure a sufficient quantity of plants will be available whenever trips are
arranged to a nursery for the purposes of tagging material for the project.
5. Unavailable Material: If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a
proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with
corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no later
than ten (10) calendar days after award of contract.
6. Distant Material: Submit photographs with a person adjacent to plants for preliminary
review. Such review shall not impair the right of review and rejection during progress of
the work.
7. Special Conditions: The above provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the
responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if there could be sufficient time
for contract growing or arranging other special growing conditions or making other
arrangements which must be made in order to supply specified materials.
C. Allied Planting Items and Accessories:
1. Mulch (manufacturer's literature and sample)
2. Gravel Mulch (Sample)
3. Tree and Shrub Planting Fertilizer (certification or laboratory analytical data).
4. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (manufacturers literature)
5. Staking and Guying materials (manufacturers literature and material samples, including
stake paint color swatch)
6. Steel Edging (manufacturers literature)
7. If required by these specifications, City Requirements or Planting Details, include the
following items:
a. Wrapping Material (manufacturer's literature or sample).
b. Tree Paint (manufacturer's literature).
1.8 PLANT MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. The Landscape Architect suggests the following considerations for the Contractor to evaluate in
product handling:
1. During hot weather and when practical, the Contractor may be required to transport plant
materials between sunset and sunrise if transported in an open trailer or unrefrigerated
box.
2. Dug material should be maintained and watered as required at the nursery to guarantee
their vitality and health until shipping.
3. Protect all trunks, stems, branches and root balls during tree tying, wrapping and loading
operations from damage.
4. Load balls or containers onto transport vehicle and secure in a manner that protects the
structural integrity of the root balls.
5. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe transportation of plants to the site
and their condition upon arrival. Trees damaged, dehydrated or abused during transit
and storage will be rejected.
6. Plant materials should not be stored on concrete or left exposed to the sun.
7. Protect the balls and water regularly until planting. If trees are left in storage over the
weekend or holiday provide a means of periodically watering and inspecting root ball
protection.
8. Do not store plants on paving or hard surface areas during hot weather or in any
condition that would result in excess heat on the plant or its roots.
B. The Landscape Architect may inspect any phase of this operation and may reject any plant
material improperly handled during any phase of this operation.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 5
C. Nothing in this Section shall be interpreted as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility of
providing healthy, viable plants, nor shall it have any effect upon the terms of the warranty
specified herein.
1.9 CONTRACTORS CONTRACT GROWN MATERIAL:
A. Contractor shall provide source and means of contract growing material where necessary due
to likely unavailability of quantities of any materials shown on plans. Material shall meet or
exceed all specifications. Contractor shall notify of intent to contract grow, list proposed items
and provide growing schedule shall be submitted within 30 days of bidding. Submittals for
reviews shall occur in a timely manner to allow growing stock to be reviewed and approved.
B. Contract grown material shall be bound by the same warranties and guarantees as all other
plant material under this contract.
1.10 Work under this Section will be accepted by Landscape Architect upon satisfactory completion
of all work, including landscape establishment, but exclusive of replacement of plant materials
under the Warranty period.
A. At the end of the ninety day establishment period and upon Final Acceptance, the Owner will
assume responsibility for maintenance of the Work.
1.11 WARRANTY PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS:
A. Contractor shall warrant that all material planted under this Contract will be healthy and in
flourishing condition of active growth one year from date of Final Acceptance.
1. Shrubs, groundcovers and vines shall be warranted for one (1) year under the same
conditions.
2. Trees 5 3/4 caliper or less shall be warranted for one (1) year under the same
conditions.
3. Trees 5 3/4 caliper and larger shall be warranted for two (2) years under the same
conditions.
B. Any delay in completion of planting operations which extends the planting into more than one
planting season shall extend the Warranty Period correspondingly.
C. Replace, without cost to Owner, and as soon as weather conditions permit, all dead plants and
all plants not in vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the Owner during and at the end
of Warranty Period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and shall
bear foliage of a normal density, size and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent
specimens of the same species and shall be subject to all requirements of this specification.
D. Contractor shall not be held responsible for failure due to neglect by Owner or vandalism during
Warranty Period. Report such conditions to the Landscape Architect in writing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS:
A. Plants shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practices under climatic
conditions similar to those of project for at least two years unless specifically otherwise
authorized by Landscape Architect in writing. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants
shall be exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in development and
appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry.
B. Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf.
They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae, and shall have healthy, well
developed root systems. They shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions that
would prevent thriving growth.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 6
C. Plants shall be true to species and variety and shall conform to measurements specified except
that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by Landscape Architect. Use of such
plants shall not increase Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the ball of earth or
container size shall be increased as specified under "Applicable Standards" and subject to the
approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread
dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Caliper measurement
shall be according to AAN standards for single, clumping, multi, low-branched etcetera.
1. In general the caliper (diameter of trunk) shall be taken at a point on the trunk six (6")
inches above natural ground line for trees up to four (4") inches in caliper and at a point
twelve (12") inches above the natural ground line for trees over four (4") inches in caliper.
The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the
measurements after pruning, where pruning is required. Plants that meet the
measurements specified, but do not possess a normal balance between height and
spread shall be rejected.
2. Where a range of caliper, height or width may be indicated in the drawings, at least 60
per cent of the material must meet or exceed the higher range given.
E. Container stock, when specified, shall have grown in the containers in which delivered for at
least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years.
F. Plant material must have the following growing characteristics:
1. Free from root-bound / circling root conditions.
2. Root flair in the container or in field grown nurseries shall be at container grade or soil
grade without excess soil above the root flair.
3. No plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth either when shipped, off loaded or
removed from containers. Such conditions shall be rejected by the contractor
immediately.
4. Container stock shall not be pruned before delivery.
5. Field grown plants recently transplanted into containers will not be accepted.
G. Trees which have damaged or crooked leaders, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be
rejected. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs
over three-quarter (3/4") inch which have not completely calloused, will be rejected.
H. Balled and Burlapped trees, when accepted, shall have a minimum root ball size of ten (10x)
times the caliper measurement.
I. Nursery grown B&B material shall be pruned and thinned at the place of growth immediately
prior to digging as required for packaging and safe moving. Method of pruning shall be as
approved in the field by the Landscape Architect. Do not remove self-locking tags during this
pruning prior to delivery to site.
J. Field collected or plantation grown stock shall conform to the applicable standards under
reference standards.
K. Tree and Nursery quality source examples:
1. Plant material specified under this contract shall be equal to or better in form, size and
quality to grade A or first quality material which would be typically available in the desired
form, character and grown under accepted horticultural practices for the following
materials and suppliers:
a. TREES
1) Marian Gardens Nursery, Groveland, Florida,
2) Glenfora Farms, Glenflora, Texas,
3) Bold Springs Nursery, Monroe, Georgia,
4) Select Trees, Athens (Bishop) Georgia
5) Cherry Lake Nursery, Groveland, Florida and
6) Twin Lakes Nursery, Canton, Texas.
7) Deep Fork Tree Farm, Arcadia, Oklahoma
8) Marshall Tree Farm, Morriston, Florida
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 7
b. SHRUBS AND OTHER PLANTS
1) Monrovia Nursery, Monrovia, California
2) Tawakoni Plant Farm, Lake Tawokani, Texas
3) Greenleaf Nursery, El Campo, Texas
c. OTHER ORNAMENTAL GRASS SOURCES
1) Bluestem Nursery, Arlington, Texas
d. PERENNIALS AND ANNUALS
1) Greenlake Nursery, Dallas, Texas
2. Quality level of material that could be supplied by these nurseries shall be the basis for
acceptance of plant material submitted for approval for this project.
3. The above list is not exclusive and does not limiting the contractor to other nursery
sources. The list is only to serve as a guide for level of quality expectations for the
project. Not all plant material at the listed nursery is grade A and would not be selected,
however grade A material available at the nurseries would be selected. It is also likely
that not all material in the plant list will be available from the listed nurseries.
2.2 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS:
A. Pre-Plant Fertilizers: Shall consist of the materials indicated in the soils reports and shall be
incorporated by percent nutrient and weight, material shall be mixed by a commercial fertilizer
supplier. Refer to Soil Preparation Section 329113.
2.3 MULCH: Fine shredded hardwood mulch as provided by Garden-Ville/Horticultural Products,
San Antonio Texas or approved equivalent.
2.4 TREE STABILIZATION:
A. GUYING MATERIALS: Contractor shall use guying materials necessary to meet the
requirements herein only if transplanted tree requires stabilization. Suggested materials:
1. Arrowhead Anchor by Laconia Earth Anchors, Warwick Rhode Island, (401) 739-8541.
Anchors shall be #4MI-4CA-36, four (4") inch anchor assembly with 36 inch length of 3/16
inch air cord from anchor to top thimble. Provide additional 3/8 inch X 6 inch turnbuckle
at grade. Size provided may be upgraded based on load or soil conditions, reference
manufacturers literature for loads and soils.
a. If needed, contractor may also order appropriate drive tools for the anchors from
the same manufacturer.
2. Tree Connection Hardware:
a. Guying Cable: 1 X 19 Aircord, minimum 3/16 or larger depending on load. Size
determined by contractor.
b. Turnbuckles: Galvanized, size as specified.
c. Cable Clamps: Galvanized or copper, size as required.
d. Plastic Guy Covers: 3/8 inch inside diameter X three (3') feet long white PVC
tubing.
e. Tree Connection to be cable and black rubber hose.
B. STAKING MATERIALS: Contractor shall use staking materials necessary to meet the
requirements of the specifications, subject to approval.
1. Tree Stakes: Steel T-Post 7' long weighting 1.33# per foot.
2. Paint for Stakes: Two coats of Warm Gray paint as approved.
3. Ties: Inch I.D. black rubber hose with 3/16" wall thickness.
C. Tree Connection material: Two strands of #12 gauge solid galvanized annealed wire. (Double
the wire such that there will be two passed through the rubber hose at the tree, four around
post. Reference drawings.
D. Field Fabricated Root-Ball Stabilization Materials:
1. Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross
grain, and other defects, 2-by-4-inch nominal by length required to cross root ball.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 8
2. Laconia Ground Anchor, size and cable as required with stainless or galvanized aircraft
cable and crossing cable and galvanized turnbuckles. Contractor to size materials based
on Laconia ground anchor cabling chart and anticipated loads.
2.5 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for project conditions and application.
1. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Material applied shall be determined to be suitable for the pest or weed types and
varieties to be controlled.
3. Application method and material must be safe for the public and the desirable plant
material where it is applied and it must be approved as legal for application by the USDA,
EPA or applicable government agency.
4. Restrictive use guidelines and precautions shall be adhered to and application shall be
only be by a person certified as a commercial chemical applicator.
B. Herbicide
1. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the
germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the
mulch layer.
a. Provide pre-emergent similar to Ronstar or equivalent or organic material for
control of weeds. Application shall be according to the manufacturer.
Determination of type of material to be made by the contractors horticulturist or
certified chemical applicator.
2. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed
growth that has already germinated.
3. Refer to Section 329350 for additional information.
C. Insecticides: Provide treatment for insects using labeled chemicals suitable for the control and
treatment of harmful and damaging insects as the insects are observed using approved USDA
chemicals installed by a Horticulturist, Arborist or Certified Pesticide applicator according to the
law governing their application.
2.6 ANTI-DESSICANT ANTI-TRANSPIRANT: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture
retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled
containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.7 WATERING / INSPECTION TUBES:
A. Shall be 4 inch Sewer and Drain Perforated PVC, (factory perforated drainage pipe).
1. Provide filter fabric cover / wrap from bottom to top of pipe.
2. Install grate on top of pipe using NDS #90 Black flush style grate / cap. NDS (877) 301-
5242, or internet at http://www.ndspro.com.
2.8 SOIL SEPARATOR / FILTER FABRIC (FOR PIPE WRAP):
A. Material shall be Mirafi or equivalent geotextile filter product capable of retaining soil while
allowing water to pass. Material opening size and strength of fabric shall be compatible with soil
used in backfill surrounding the filter membrane. Reference Mirafi Geotextile Filter Design
manual and confirm product selection with soil and backfill. Generally, sandy and gravel sand
containing soil will require a filter weave (woven fabric) material while clay and silt soils will
require a non-woven (N-series) product.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 9
2.9 ROOT BARRIER:
A. Deep Root WB 36/30: 36 x 300 .0.03 (30 mil) geo membrane or equivalent continuous sheet
panel. Run to be full length of area indicated. Size 36 deep.
B. Provide seal and splicing materials as recommended by manufacturer, material should be
installed continuous.
2.10 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC:
A. Fabric to be heavy jute mesh of a uniform open plain weave using un-dyed and unbleached
single jute yarn. The netting should not be wider than 48 inches (plus or minus one inch). The
material should weigh approximately 1.2 pounds per linear yard and have approximately 78
warp ends per width of cloth and 41 weft ends per linear yard. Openings of approximately to
inch square.
B. Anchor pins and staples may be used to secure the net. Anchor pins should be 0.12 inch
diameter or heavier galvanized wire 10 minimum length and hook or J type bends. Staples
shall be .09 inch diameter or greater with U shaped legs at least 6 long. Increase lengths for
sandy soils adequate to maintain the net in place.
C. Fabric to comply with requirements of the Natural Resources Conservation Service.
D. Color: Natural Tan / Brown.
2.11 PLANTING MIX: (REFER TO SECTION 329113)
2.12 STEEL LANDSCAPE EDGING:
A. Standard commercial steel landscape edging with smoothed top and stamped cut loops for
insertion of cut stakes, factory powder coat paint finish. Material shall be equivalent to J. D.
Russell Company Dura Edge Heavy Duty (800) 888-6872 or Sure Loc Corporation Sur-Loc
Steel Landscape Edging (800) 787-3562, as approved. Size shall be 1/4" x 4" x 16 foot lengths
for turf, shrub or ground cover edging separators.
B. Provide manufacturers stake assembly system and additional stakes if shown according to the
drawings.
C. Edging and Stake Color:
1. Black.
2.13 VINE TIES:
A. Provide
1. Submittal for wall condition with vines and indicate diamond pattern of wire runners to be
approved.
2. For Masonry Walls:
a. Masonry: Provide 3/16 Galvanized expansion anchors with eye bolts with
stringers of stainless 18 gauge wire in pattern approved.
b. Wood: Provide 3/16 stainless screw eye and stringers of stainless 18 gauge wire
in pattern approved.
3. Ties: Twist-em F-29 vine tie system positioned as needed with epoxy adhesive on
supplied vine anchor discs.
2.14 WOOD
A. Pine or Fir with Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterborne
preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc
arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 10
2.15 TREE PROTECTION FENCE FOR EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN:
A. Trees to remain shall be protected by means of temporary fencing placed at the drip line of the
tree.
B. No parking, storage or access shall be permitted beneath the drip line of the tree except as
specifically required for the completion of this work.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the existing trees to remain.
D. Materials shall include:
1. T Posts, 8 length driven 36 inches into the ground with continuous 4 tall orange safety
fencing. Provide top and bottom stringer using 12 gauge galvanized wire. Place posts a
maximum of 8 feet on center. Tie fabric to stringers using wire ties or similar zip ties or
hog rings.
2. Products for maintenance and repair to match the above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting
installation and performance.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Landscape Architect and replace with
new planting soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing
plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Verify areas that are to receive planting have been accepted for compliance with requirements
and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section.
1. Verify Rough and Fine Grading is approved and that surface drainage is appropriately
sloped.
a. Any discrepancy in the drawings or specifications, obstructions on the site, or prior
work done by another party which Contractor feels precludes establishing proper
drainage, shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect in writing.
b. Do not proceed if grading is not acceptable to accomplish the proper surface
drainage of the areas being planted.
2. Verify Soil Preparation is complete and approved.
3. Verify items that must be installed in or through landscape areas are in place and
accepted.
4. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 11
E. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to
protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
3.3 LAYOUT OF PLANTING AREAS:
A. As agreeable to the Landscape Architect, use color coded flagged wooden lath with paint and
surveyors ribbon, metal pin flags (wire stakes) or similar marking stakes.
B. Materials are to be marked and color-coded for each different species, class or size of
specimen and mass plant material in the area to be reviewed. Stake location of each tree and
major specimen shrubs. Provide surveyors colored paint or a gypsum powder outline of shrub
and groundcover bed materials for review and approval.
1. Layout as much area as possible and prepare as much area as possible for review at any
one time.
2. For curved beds, layout according to drawing dimensions or free form according to
drawings. Supply sufficient length of inch PVC such that adjustments and curves can
be recreated or adjusted and remarked in the presence of the landscape architect.
C. Coordinate layout review with the Landscape Architect for coordination and review of stake out
of material in a timely fashion. Coordinate such that staking and layout occurs after grading and
soil preparation such that the lines or stakes will not be disturbed.
D. The landscape architect will review the location of plants in the field and may elect to adjust as
needed to exact position before holes are dug, edging and beds are set and planting begins.
3.4 SETTING SUBGRADE FOR PLANTING AREAS AND VERIFICATION OF FINISHED GRADE:
A. Verify that required grades are set at required grade as specified in Sections 02311
Landscape Finish Grading and Section 02910 Soil Preparation.
B. Do not work subsoil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, or
when it is so dry that clods will not break readily. Apply water if necessary to bring soil to
optimum moisture content for tilling and planting.
3.5 DRAINAGE, DETRIMENTAL SOILS AND OBSTRUCTIONS:
A. Field test drainage of plant beds and pits by digging with a hand style post hole digger or similar
device to a depth of 18 inches in shrub areas and 36 inches in tree areas or to maximum root
ball depth plus 12 inches for specimen tree areas. After excavating filling with water once allow
30 minutes to saturate surrounding ground and fill with water to within 4 inches of the top of the
hole, and mark the hole. Provide the field test at a minimum of 2 locations per 10 trees or 5000
square feet of shrub/groundcover mass area.
1. Conditions permitting either the retention of water in tree pits or in planting beds for more
than twenty four (24) hours or percolation rates of less than one (1") inch per hour shall
be brought to the attention of the owners representative.
2. It is the Contractors responsibility to provide testing and also to verify the proper and
adequate drainage in all plant pits and beds exists
3. Should drainage problems exist, notify the owners representative. Provide suggested
remedies for review. The landscape architect and owner shall evaluate the condition and
make a determination how to best correct the issues.
a. If needed, such corrections shall be made at either a negotiated or unit price basis
as is determined by the owner and the site condition.
B. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions Contractor considers
detrimental to growth of plant material.
C. If rock, hardpan, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are
encountered in the excavation of plant pits and beds, alternate locations may be selected by
Landscape Architect. Where locations cannot be changed, submit cost required to remove the
obstructions to a depth of not less than six (6") inches below the required pit or bed depth.
Proceed with work after approval.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 12
3.6 WATERING AND INSPECITION TUBES:
A. Wrap perforated pipe with filter fabric and permanently secure the fabric to the pipe.
B. Place the wrapped perforated drain pipe where shown in the drawings, extending to the bottom
of the root ball or to the bottom of augured sump as indicated. Handle pipe in accordance with
manufacturer's latest printed instructions. Do not allow soil to enter the pipe.
C. Install fabric wrapped pipe approximately vertical at the edge of pit as shown with pipe tops at 6
to 12 inches above grade until planting backfill is complete.
D. Set pipes to grade and install watering inspection cover..
3.7 DRAINAGE AND SUBDRAINAGE MATERIALS: Refer to Section 02635 Landscape Drainage.
3.8 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC:
A. Install fabric on slope where and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Bury top edge of fabric in shallow trench one (1') foot back from lip of slope and anchor with
twelve (12") inch metal stakes. Anchor bottom edge in the same manner.
C. Allow four (4") inch overlap at seams for shrinkage. Stitch seams at eight (8") inch intervals with
hog ring staples.
D. Fabric shall be neatly placed with straight seams and no unsightly wrinkles after shrinkage.
3.9 PREPARING PLANT MATERIALS FOR PLANTING:
A. Do not bind or handle any plant with wire or rope at any time so as to damage bark or break
branches. Lift and handle plants which are fully supported only from bottom of ball.
B. Ball and burlap (B&B) plants shall have firm balls of earth. Plants moved with a ball will not be
accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operations. Pre-dug stored
B&B material shall be inspected and approved at the storage site.
C. At Contractor's option and expense, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf
immediately before digging with antidessicant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches,
twigs, and foliage.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF PIT PLANTED MATERIAL:
A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root
flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root
emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still
meets size requirements.
B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break. Lightly scarify rootball and tease roots to loosen edges.
C. Plant Pit Excavation:
1. Dig roughly circular tree and shrub pits to the dimensions as shown on the drawings but
not less than 3 times the root ball diameter and the depth plus 2 inches.
2. Excavate container grown shrub and groundcover pits to not less than 2 times the
rootball and the depth of the rootball plus 2 inches.
3. Excavate bottom of the pit along its edges deeper than the center and maintain
compacted soil in the center to permit internal drainage to pit sump areas.
a. Re-verify root crown or root flair (natural soil level of roots, not necessarily the
nursery soil level) elevation when excavating, accommodate actual root flair
elevation while excavation is in process.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 13
b. Plants which are set too low for the root flair to be at the prescribed elevation are
to be reset at contractors expense without impacting warranty periods. Provide
matching replacements if trees cannot be properly set without damage.
4. Rock greater than 1 inch in dimension or other extraneous trash and debris removed in
excavations may not be used in backfill. Topsoil may be retained and subsoil if suitable
for planting may be retained and used in backfill if it meets the soil quality requirements.
5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when areas are not occupied by
installers personnel and at night or weekends.
D. Mix soil, fertilizer and organic amendments as specified adjacent to each plant or tree pit.
E. Secure inspection and watering pipes at edge of excavation throughout process and hold
approximately vertical, do not fill with soil.
F. Scarify the walls and bottom of all plant pits immediately prior to the placement of plant and
backfill mix. The Contractor shall remove all glazing caused by an auger or mechanical tool
G. If subdrainage is shown, provide and install subdrainage, fabric and drainage as specified in
Section 02635.
H. Fill bottom of plant pits with soil mix to compacted depth to receive plant root ball, so top of root
flair will be from 1 to 2 inches above finished grade after completion of backfill and any
anticipated settlement.
I. Carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides,
but do not remove from under root balls. Remove sides of boxes and pallets, if any, before
setting. Carefully remove rootball from container without damaging rootball or the plant. Do not
use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. Place
B&B plants carefully in the prepared planting pit. Do not disturb root ball or untie twine or roping
until backfill settlement is complete and tree is staked, if applicable
J. Carefully lower plant into pit, position in center of pit, plumb and adjust elevation verify face or
orientation of tree canopy is appropriate. Insure Landscape Architect determines the
appropriate orientation or faces all specimen trees and other trees as determined necessary..
K. Prune away any girdled roots and tease root hair masses.
L. Carefully fill pit and compact by watering in succession after filling with soil to support root ball,
maintain plumb and center during backfilling. Maximum compaction should be approximately
85% standard density.
1. Fill planting pit by flooding each eight (8") inches of backfill for balls greater than twenty
four (24") inch diameter.
2. Thoroughly saturate back fill at the half way point until no more water is absorbed and air
or other voids are filled.
M. Continue backfill to grade, water again and place final soil layer.
N. Smooth planted areas to conform to specified grades after full settlement has occurred.
Contractor shall bear final responsibility for proper surface drainage of planted areas.
O. Water all plants immediately again after planting.
P. Apply pre-emergent weed control material in areas to receive mulch.
Q. Spread mulch in required areas to the compacted depth of 2 inches. Keep a mulch free zone at
the root flair adjacent to the trunk for an approximate 6 inch distance around the trunk.
R. Vines: Spread out vine stems, prune broken and dead foliage, anchor to vine trellis or anchors
according to the approved shop drawings.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF EDGING:
A. Coordinate edging with irrigation equipment layout and staking. Irrigation contractor will be
required to set heads to edging and valve boxes must be clear of edging.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 14
B. Verify bed alignment as noted above and stage steel edging on stakes above grade ready to be
set as agreed or where shown on drawings. Prior to final placement of stakes contact the
Landscape Architect for approval of bed layout.
1. Failure to do so may result in relocation of steel edge at the Landscape Architects
direction and at no additional cost.
C. Set steel by anchoring in provide loop slots. Provide additional stakes as often as necessary to
have smooth radius or straight tangents. Drive stake to one (1") inch below top of edging.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF BED PLANTED MATERIALS:
A. Verify full soil preparation has been provided including any special soil fill is completed at mass
bed planted areas, that grades are set as noted above and that the areas are accepted and
ready to be planted.
B. Verify root flair on plants, measurements to planting elevations will be made to the root flair. If
necessary remove excess soil to expose root flairs prior to installation of plants.
C. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break. Lightly scarify rootball and tease roots to loosen edges.
D. Excavate in planting mix for individual plant and install as required. Set plant plumb and brace
rigidly in position until planting soil mix has been tamped solidly around the ball and roots.
E. Water thoroughly, saturating root ball, and surrounding soil such that air pockets and voids are
displaced before installing remainder of the planting soil to top of pit. Top of root ball shall be 1
inch minimum to 2 inches maximum above finished grade.
F. Smooth planting areas to conform to specified grades after full settlement has occurred.
Contractor shall bear final responsibility for proper surface drainage of planted areas.
G. Water all plants immediately again after planting.
H. Apply pre-emergent weed control material over entire area to receive mulch.
A. Spread mulch in shrub and ground cover areas to the compacted depth of 2 inches. Keep a
mulch free zone at the root flair adjacent to the stems for an approximate 2 inch distance
around them.
3.13 SURFACE DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS: Contractor shall bear final responsibility for
proper surface drainage of planted areas. Any discrepancy in the drawings or specifications,
obstructions on the site, or prior work done by another party which Contractor feels precludes
establishing proper drainage, shall be brought to the attention of Landscape Architect in writing
for correction or relief of said responsibility.
3.14 PRUNING:
A. Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve
the natural character of the plant. Prune by removing entangled branching and by removing
crotches and circling or girdling roots. Avoid removing branch tips wherever possible. Pruning
to be done under observation of the Landscape Architect.
1. Follow particular horticultural guidelines for specific plant pruning (roses for example).
B. Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches. Use only clean, sharp
tools.
C. Prune transplanted or collected B&B material by removing a percentage of interior branching
proportional to the root loss during digging (up to 1/3) in addition to place of growth as may be
directed by Landscape Architect.
D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds unless specifically required by the City or Arborist
involved in the work.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 15
3.15 TREE STABILIZATION
A. Trees capable of remaining upright during site conditions do not require staking. The contractor
may elect to either stake or guy trees depending on size and condition. Contractor will be
responsible for maintaining trees in a vertical plumb and upright position for the duration of the
establishment period as a minimum whether or not they are staked or guyed. Maintenance of
plumb and staking or guying is to be accounted for in the contract price.
B. Trees which do not remain upright and the result is cracked or damaged rootballs shall be
replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner.
C. Contractor is to coordinate with owner and landscape architect to advise when stakes must be
removed as a part of maintenance to prevent damage to trunks and bark.
D. Install trunk stabilization at trees as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less
than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes
and drive at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to
approximately 1/3 minimum of the tree height above grade. Set vertical stakes and
space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.
2. Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three
stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes
equally around trees.
3. Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless
otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long,
driven to grade.
4. Support trees with specified wire and hose wrap as protection at contact points with tree
trunk. Allow enough slack in the wire and stake to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Secure
wire ends to stake and bend so not to damage public. Paint stake.
5. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method:
a. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at
least 36 inches below grade. Provide ground anchor and turnbuckle for each guy
wire and tighten securely.
b. Support trees with strands of cable sized to support required load, connected to
turn buckle at the ground anchor thimble and through hose at contact points with
tree trunk and either clamping at the tree or return to turnbuckle. Tighten
turnbuckle but allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
c. Attach white tubes to each guy wire, from surface to 42 inches above finish grade.
E. Root-Ball Stabilization Method: Install at or below-grade stabilization system to secure each
new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Hold-Down Method: Place 4 ground anchors into subsoil on 2 opposite locations
place 2 horizontal wood hold-downs (2x) across top of root ball and run suitable size
cable across to opposite ground anchor. Tighten turnbuckle to secure rootball by
securing hold down under cable.
3.16 TRAINING OF VINES (AND ESPALIERS):
A. Place as many anchors as required to support the plants and its branching structure as directed
by the Landscape Architect.
B. Tie branches to anchors with green vinyl ribbon ties.
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 16
3.17 TREE PROTECTION FENCE FOR EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN:
A. Trees to remain shall be protected by means of temporary fencing placed at the drip line of the
tree.
B. No parking, storage or access shall be permitted beneath the drip line of the tree except as
specifically required for the completion of this work.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the existing trees to remain.
D. All existing trees to remain within the contract area shall be protected against damage during
construction operations by fencing as described above, subject to the approval of the Owner.
The tree protection shall be placed before any excavating or grading is begun and maintained in
repair for the duration of the construction work unless otherwise directed. No material shall be
stored or construction operation shall be carried on within a distance as shown of any tree to be
saved or within the tree protection fencing. Tree protection shall remain until all
E. In general, tree protection fences are required to alert those working on the project that
equipment and machinery are not to be stored or operated in the feeder root zone. The fences
and barricades shall be placed not closer than nine (9x) times the caliper of the tree to the tree,
or at the drip line (if possible). The exact location of fences or barricades shall be determined
by the Landscape Architect.
work is
completed.
F. Any damage done to existing tree crowns or root systems shall be repaired immediately by an
approved arborist at the Owner's direction. Roots exposed and/or damaged during demolition
and/or grading operations shall be cut off cleanly inside the exposed or damaged area, the cut
surfaces painted with an approved tree paint, and the topsoil and mulch placed over the
exposed root area immediately. The Owner shall have his representative present on the site to
observe these operations.
G. Trees designated to remain which are damaged and/or killed during construction shall be
replaced by new trees equivalent to the caliper inch size of the removed tree. Tree species
shall be at the discretion of the Landscape Architect or Owner. The minimum tree caliper size
acceptable as a replacement will be a 4 caliper tree.
3.18 PRUNING OF EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN:
A. All existing trees to remain within the project area shall be pruned as a part of this contract.
Pruning shall done be at the direction of a licensed arborist.
B. Pruning shall consist of the removal of dead or damaged limbs, crossing branches and any
limbs which are in contact with any surrounding building. Additional pruning may be required if
so directed by the arborist.
C. Coordinate all pruning operations with the City of New Braunfels Urban Forester.
3.19 CLEAN UP:
B. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to
Final Acceptance.
3.20 INSPECTIONS:
A. Make written request for inspection after planting operations are completed.
B. Submit requests for inspections to the Owner at least two (2) days prior to anticipated inspection
date.
END OF SECTION
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 17
PART 4 - PHOTOGRAPHS / EXAMPLES OF SUITABLE MATERIAL
4.1 PLANT MATERIAL SUITABILITY;
A. Refer as follows for examples of plant material with appropriate character and quality. The
following photographs are to serve as a guide to contractors about the expectations of the
quality of plant material for this project and will be used to judge submitted material.
WILD AGERATUM 1 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 18
ASIAN JASMINE 1 GAL
JERUSALEM SAGE 1 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 19
CATMINT 1 GAL
HARDY ROSEMARY 3 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 20
GULFSTREAM NANDINA 1 GAL
POKOMOKE
MINIATURE CRAPE 1 GAL

TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 21
LINDHEIMER MUHLY 1 GAL
GULF MUHLY 1 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 22
FLORIDA JASMINE 3 GAL
RED SALVIA GREGGII - 1 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 23
KNOCKOUT ROSE RED 3 GAL
ROSE CREEK ABELIA 3 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 24
BIG BLUE LIRIOPE 1 GAL
PINKIE INDIAN HAWTHORN
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 25
SMOOTH SUMAC 5 GAL
RUSSIAN SAGE 1 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 26
LOUISIANA IRIS 1 GAL
TRUMPET VINE 5 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 27
TEXAS ASH 3 31/2 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 28
HIGHRISE LIVE OAK 4 4-1/2 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 29
SHUMARD RED OAK 4- 4-1/2 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 30
BIG TOOTH MAPLE 5 5-1/2 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 31
NATCHEZ CRAPE MYRTLE 100 GAL
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 32
SHOAL CREEK VITEX 10 12
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 33
FRUITLANDS TEA OLIVE 12-14
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 34
MEXICAN PLUM 4 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 35
TEXAS RED BUD 3 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 36
BALD CYPRESS 6 CALIPER
TOCM HDR208-001 JUNE 9, 2010
329300 - Page 37
CEDAR ELM 3-1/2-4 CALIPER
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 1
SECTION 329350
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
B. Work Included: Provide 90 Day Landscape Establishment, complete as specified.
1. Related Work in Other Sections:
a. Irrigation Systems - Section 328400
b. Soil Preparation - Section 329113
c. Lawns and Grasses Section 329200
d. Trees, Shrubs, Perennials, Vines and Groundcover- Section 329300
1.2 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.
1. Perform all work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required
by authorities having jurisdiction over such work.
2. Provide for all inspections and permits required by Federal, State, or local authorities in
furnishing, transporting, and installing of all agricultural chemicals.
B. Applicable Standards: Apply standards as described in the following:
1. American Standard for Nursery Stock", 1980 Edition, American National Standards
Institute, Incorporated, (A.N.S.I. Z60-1-1980).
2. Standardized Plant Names", 1942 Edition, American J oint Committee on Horticultural
Nomenclature.
3. N.A.A.: "Pruning Standards for Shade Trees", 1979.
C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants on similar projects.
of the Professional Landcare Network, The Texas Nurserymen and Landscape
Contractors Association or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
construction generally operating as the projects on site project manager or similar

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 2

name as the installer firms may elect to title the individual. The project manager
will have a minimum of 10 years of experience.
of the Texas Turfgrass Association CPTM (Certified Professional Turf Manager) program
or optionally may be a member in good standing of the Professional Landcare Network,
The Texas Nurserymen and Landscape Contractors Association or the American Nursery
and Landscape Association. Maintenance personnel must be CPTM certified if this
project includes turf grass in excess of 3 acres.
being installed.
6. Irrigation personnel shall be qualified and licensed as required by the State of Texas.
7. Labor Force: The landscape establishment firm's labor force shall be thoroughly familiar
and trained in the work to be accomplished and perform the task in a safe, competent,
efficient manner acceptable to the Owner.
8. Supervision: The foreman shall directly employ and supervise the work force at all times.
Notify Owner of all changes in supervision.
9. Identification: Provide proper identification at all times for landscape establishment firm's
labor force.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to commencing the landscape installation, submit to Landscape Architect for approval, two
(2) copies each of the following items:
1. Proposed format for recording and logging the landscape establishment period.
2. Planned schedule of establishment operations.
B. All licenses and insurances required by the government pertaining to this work.
1. Listing and Rate of Application/Use for all chemical or organic materials proposed to be
used during the establishment period including as a minimum:
a. Fertilizers
b. Chemical agents for weed or pest control
c. Pest control measures
d. Cleaning or other maintenance chemical or organic material.
1.5 MONTHLY LOG AND REPORT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Log Reports and Submittals to accompany monthly invoicing for the projects landscape.
Billing will not be complete without logs and reports.
B. During the landscape establishment period at monthly intervals submit to Landscape Architect
and Owners Representative, not less than two (2) copies each of the following items:
1. Written application recommendation by a licensed agricultural pest control advisor for any
proposed weed, pest and disease control which is intended to be used where restrictions
are required by the Director of Agriculture.
2. Provide monthly records of all fertilizers, herbicides, insecticides and disease control
chemicals used for the project.
3. Provide monthly status of irrigation system controller operations and run times per valve.
Note required adjustments from previous month.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 3

4. Provide listing of irrigation system controller timing settings by zone and adjustments
made.
5. Provide list and location of drainage or water issues with plant material.
6. Provide list of all plants replaced and the reason they were replaced.
1.6 SUMMARY LOG:
A. At the completion of the establishment period provide a summary log which compiles all
activities for the period. Include changes or modifications to planting and irrigation, list pest
infestation found and controls used as required for the proper maintenance of the landscape.
1.7 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTAL:
A. Include a binder with all the above schedules and records as well as the letter of final
acceptance from the landscape architect.
B. Binder may be provided with other landscape close out information and documentation.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Perform all establishment during hours mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
B. Work force shall be present at the project site at least once a week regardless of season and
more frequently as necessary to perform specified establishment in accordance with the
approved establishment schedule within the approved time or days per week.
C. It is preferable to complete maintenance on the entire project in one day.
A. Site Visit: At beginning of establishment period, visit and walk the site with the Owner's
representative to clarify scope of work and understand existing project/site conditions.
B. Documentation of Conditions: Document general condition of existing trees, shrubs, vines,
groundcovers and lawn recording all plant materials which are damaged or dying, if any.
1. Irrigation System: Document general condition of existing irrigation system, making sure
that faulty electrical controllers, broken or inoperable sprinkler heads (or emitters) are
reported.
1.10 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. The Contractor shall begin maintenance after any portion of the sprinkler irrigation, each plant
and lawn portion is installed.
B. The Contractor's Maintenance Period shall begin upon inspection and approval at Substantial
Completion and shall be for a minimum of ninety (90) days or until Final Acceptance, whichever
is longer.
C. The following are general requirements for maintenance:
1. Sprinkler Irrigation System:
a. The Contractor's maintenance of the sprinkler irrigation system shall consist of
monitoring and adjustment of controller times, valves, repair of leaks in both mains
and lateral lines and all other work required to establish a complete working
irrigation and quick coupler system.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 4

2. Trees, Shrubs, Groundcovers Perennials and Vines:
a. The Contractor's maintenance of new planting shall consist of watering, cultivating,
weeding, mulching, re-staking, tightening and repairing of guys, resetting plants to
proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing
and applying such sprays and invigorants as are necessary to keep the plantings
free of insects and disease and in thriving condition.
3. Turf:
a. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,
replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a
uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used
in the original installation.
b. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
4. Watering:
a. Automatic Irrigation:
1) Monitor soil moisture levels and adjust frequency of time or cycles to
maintain optimum moisture levels. Deep root watering is preferable to
shallow frequent watering except on erodible slopes.
b. Non-Irrigated Areas:
1) Hand watering as a part of the establishment period is required. Water may
utilize trucking or existing quick coupler system irrigation if available and
permitted. Maintain soil moisture levels at optimum moisture levels in the
root zone of planting.
c. Temporary Irrigation:
1) It is the contractors option to provide and install temporary irrigation for un
irrigated areas. Irrigation must be acceptable to the owner, be safe for the
public, and not overspray non-planted areas.
1.11 PROTECTION: Protect planting areas and lawns at all times against damage of all kinds for
duration of maintenance period. Maintenance includes temporary protection fences, barriers
and signs as required for protection. If any plants become damaged or injured, because
sufficient protection was not provided, treat or replace as directed by Owner at no additional
cost to Owner.
1.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Work under this Section will be accepted by Landscape Architect upon
satisfactory completion of all work, including maintenance, but exclusive of the required
guaranteed sprinkler irrigation obligations, replacement of plant materials and lawns under the
Warranty Period. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner will assume responsibility for
maintenance of the work.
1.13 WARRANTIES AND REPLACEMENTS: Refer to individual specification sections for
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All materials and equipment, unless otherwise indicated, shall be provided by the
Contractor.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 5

2. Materials shall match the items specified in related sections of the specifications.
B. Water: Clean, potable and fresh, furnished and paid for by the Owner.
C. Fertilizers:
1. Rapid and Slow-release fertilizers with a blend of coated prills which supply controlled-
release nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium, and uncoated, rapidly soluble prills
containing nitrogen and phosphorus.
2. Top Dress Fertilizer: Material to be based on the soils report and recommendations as
stated in Section 329113 Soil Preparation.
D. Herbicides, Insecticides, and Fungicides:
1. Obtain best quality materials with original manufacturers' containers, properly labeled
with guaranteed analysis.
2. Use non-staining materials.
E. Planting, Perennials and Sod: Match existing approved materials.
F. Replacement Tree Guys, Stakes, Ties and Wires: Match existing materials on the site (Provide
detail(s) in 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. format if necessary).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Duration: Continuously maintain each plant and each portion of groundcover area after
installation, during progress of work, and for a period of (60) (90) days after completion of all
planting work until Final Acceptance.
B. Protection:
1. Protect all planting areas from damage of all kinds from beginning of work until Final
Acceptance.
2. Establishment includes temporary protection fences, barriers and signs as required for
protection.
C. Replacements:
1. Immediately treat or replace all plants which become damaged or injured, as directed by
Landscape Architect at no additional cost to Owner.
2. Replacement plants shall be of a size, condition and variety acceptable to Landscape
Architect.
3.2 WATERING:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the correct watering of plant
materials is achieved by automatic and by hand or supplemental watering as required.
B. Contractor shall maintain optimum moisture levels throughout the root zone of all plantings.
1. Where there is no automatic irrigation and when ever rainfall is not providing adequate
water the contractor is responsible for supplemental watering until the end of the
establishment period.
C. Provide regular and supplemental deep watering to all landscape until the plant material has
established themselves and new growth is apparent. Deep watering shall be accomplished with
hoses and sprinklers as permitted.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 6

D. Frequent watering to the lawn areas to insure against drying. This may be accomplished as
above, by the existing automatic sprinkler system, hand watering or portable sprinklers.
Contractor shall monitor settings of automatic sprinkler controls and recommend necessary
adjustments according to climatic changes.
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for watering all new planting areas beyond the end of the
landscape establishment period.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to irrigation system and for repair costs caused by
operation of equipment or by mowing and other maintenance operations.
3.3 WEED CONTROL
A. GENERAL:
1. All planting, turf and grass areas shall be maintained in a weed free condition throughout
the landscape establishment period.
a. Apply pre-emergent weed control to shrub, groundcover and annual or perennial
plantings at the rates specified by the manufacturer. If plant types are not within
manufacturers label guidelines for safe pre-emergent application, weed by hand.
b. Apply selective and non-selective herbicides per manufacturers label to eliminate
weeds in lawn areas.
2. Reference other sections of this specification for additional weed control requirements.
3. Presence of an overabundant weed population in any area will extend the maintenance
period. Control of weeds is a critical component of the Landscape Establishment Period.
4. Replacements:
a. Replace dead and missing plants according to the warranty requirements.
b. Damages due to Contractor's negligence shall be paid for without charge to
Owner.
3.4 TREES, SHRUBS AND VINES
A. For supplemental hand watering, use a water wand to break the water force. Do not permit
crown roots to become exposed to air through dislodging of soil and mulch.
B. Maintain originally called for depth of mulch to reduce evaporation and frequency of watering.
C. Check for moisture penetration throughout the root zone at least once per week.
D. Resetting: Reset plants to proper grades or upright position.
E. Keep root flairs free of soil and mulch, maintain clear area at the trunk of newly planted trees.
F. Weed Control:
1. Control weeds, preferably with pre-emergent herbicides and with selective systemic
herbicides.
2. All areas between plants, including watering basins, shall be weed free.
3. Use only recommended and legally approved herbicides to control weed growth.
4. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots and breaks the seal of pre-
emergent herbicides.
G. Pruning:
1. Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that are smaller in
diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are attached, and which have vertical
spacing of 18 in. to 48 in. and radial orientation so as not to overlay one another.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 7

2. Prune trees to eliminate diseased or damaged growth, and narrow V-shaped branch
forks that lack strength. Reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns.
3. Prune trees to maintain growth within space limitations, maintaining a natural appearance
and balancing crown with roots.
4. No stripping of lower branches ("raising up") of young trees will be permitted.
5. Retain lower branches in a "tipped back" or pinched condition to promote caliper trunk
growth (tapered trunk). Do not cut back to fewer than six buds or leaves on such
branches. Only cut lower branches flush with the trunk after the tree is able to stand
erect without staking or other support.
6. Thin out and shape evergreen trees when necessary to prevent wind and storm damage.
Do primary pruning of deciduous trees during the dormant season. Do not permit any
pruning of trees prone to excessive "bleeding" during growth season.
7. Prune damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards at any time of year
as required.
8. Make all cuts clean and close to the trunk, without cutting into the branch collar.
"Stubbing" will not be permitted. Cut smaller branches flush with trunk or lateral branch.
Make larger cuts (1 in. in diameter or larger) parallel to shoulder rings, with the top edge
of the cut at the trunk or lateral branch.
9. Branches too heavy to handle shall be precut in three stages to prevent splitting or
peeling of bark. Make the first two cuts 18 in. or more from the trunk to remove the
branch. Make the third cut at the trunk to remove the resulting stub.
10. Do not prune or clip shrubs into balled or boxed forms unless specifically called for by
design.
11. Clip shrubs to be hedged when branches project 2 in. beyond limit of clipped hedge
shown on the Drawings.
H. Staking and Guying of Trees:
1. Inspect stakes and guys at least one a month to check for rubbing that causes bark
wounds.
2. Conform to the recommended procedures of staking and guying as outlined in the
University of California Publication AXT-311, "Staking Landscape Trees."
I. Establishment of Existing Trees to Remain:
1. Be alert to symptoms of construction damage to root systems of existing trees as
evidenced by wilting, browning or loss of leaves, and insect or disease infestation due to
declining vigor.
2. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all evidence of declining tree vigor
immediately upon discerning the problem. Take appropriate interim measures to mitigate
the severity of the problem as specified in this section.
3. Submit written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of all conditions before
proceeding with permanent correction work.
3.5 ANNUALS AND PERENNIALS
A. Watering:
1. Species, sizes of plants, container sizes and orientation shall dictate frequency of
watering.
B. Weed Control: All annuals and perennials shall be weed-free at all times.
C. Pruning:
1. Limit pruning to removal of damaged or dead twigs and foliage.
2. Remove spent flowers on a weekly basis.
D. Replacements of Annuals:

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 8

1. Replace annuals when materials exhibit a "spent" condition.
2. Thoroughly cultivate soil after removal of "spent" or "dead" plants prior to planting new
materials.
E. Fertilization: Incorporate slow release fertilizers per manufacturer's current specifications, and
rake smooth.
3.6 GROUNDCOVERS
A. Watering:
1. Check for moisture penetration throughout the root zone at least twice a month.
2. Water as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth of groundcovers.
B. Weed Control:
1. Control weeds, preferably with pre-emergent herbicides and with selective systemic
herbicides.
2. Minimize hoeing of weeds in order to avoid plant damage.
C. Fertilization:
1. Recently installed plant materials: Verify with installation forces the actual completion
date of planting installation and rate of prior application of fertilizers.
2. Refer to the soils report for maintenance fertilizer.
3. Generally, Install slow release 21-6-12 fertilizer except where high phosphorous has
been found through soil testing use 21-0-0 ammonium sulfate. Apply at 5 pounds per
1000 square feet.
D. Mowing and Edging:
1. Edge groundcovers to keep in bounds. Trim top growth as necessary to achieve an
overall even appearance.
3.7 LAWNS AND GRASSES
A. Watering:
1. Water lawns and grasses at such frequency as weather conditions require, to replenish
soil moisture to 6 in. below root zone. Use caution when watering within existing tree
areas.
2. Provide a total of 1-1/2 in. of water weekly during hot summer weather, in five (5)
applications per week.
3. Water at night or during the early morning..
B. Weed Control:
1. Control broadleaf weeds with selective herbicides.
2. In areas where crabgrass has infested the lawn, apply a selective post-emergent
herbicide as soon as possible, and prior to flowering.
3. Apply pre-emergent herbicides such as Dacthal, Balan, or Betasan prior to weedgrass
germination.
a. Do not irrigate for 48 hours after application of all herbicide sprays.
b. Coordinate application of herbicides with thatch control and reseeding schedule as
described below.
C. Mowing and Edging:
D. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, trucking with hoses and turf-watering
equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 9

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or
mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted
areas.
2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall
precipitation is adequate.
E. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified
height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf
growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and
become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to
maintain the following grass height:
1. Mow Bermuda grass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch
2. Trim edges at least two times per month or as required for neat appearance. Edging
shall be performed with a blade type mechanical edger, shovel or herbicide. String whips
shall not be permitted. Vacuum clippings.
3. A grass free clear space (edge) of eight (8") inches in width shall outline all trees and one
(1") inch in width shall outline all obstacles.
4. Do not mow meadow or ornamental grasses except as directed and seasonally.
F. Fertilization:
1. Top Dress Fertilizer: Applied 45 Days after sod installation.
a. Preparation: Immediately prior to top-dress application, cut lawn and remove
clippings.
b. Application: Apply as stated in the soils report.
G. Resodding of Lawn and Grass Areas: Match existing materials of adjacent areas.
3.8 INSECTS, PESTS, AND DISEASE CONTROL
A. Inspection: Inspect all plant materials for signs of stress, damage and potential trouble from the
following:
1. Presence of insects, moles, gophers, ground squirrels, snails and slugs in planting areas.
2. Discolored or blotching leaves or needles.
3. Unusually light green or yellowish green color inconsistent with normal green color of
leaves.
B. Personnel: Perform spraying for insect, pest and disease control only by qualified, trained
personnel.
C. Application: Spray with extreme care to avoid all hazards to any person or pet in the area or
adjacent areas.
3.9 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Repair without charge to Owner all damages to system caused by Contractor's
operations. Perform all repairs within one (1) watering period.
2. Report promptly to Owner all accidental damage not resulting from Contractor's
negligence or operations.
3. Do not run the irrigation system during rainy season. Set and program automatic
controllers for seasonal water requirements.
4. Weekly during every maintenance visit, use a probe or other acceptable tool to check the
rootball moisture of representative plants as well as the surrounding soil.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 10

B. Cleaning and Monitoring the System:
1. Continually monitor the irrigation systems to verify that they are functioning properly as
designed. Make program adjustments required by changing field conditions.
2. Clean any pump filter and/or strainer once a year and as often as necessary to keep the
irrigation systems free of sand and other debris.
3. Prevent spraying on windows, building walls, (game courts) by balancing the throttle
control on the remote control valves and the adjustment screws on the sprinkler heads.
Do not allow water to atomize and drift.
C. Winterization: Provide and drain system as required by manufacturer and local conditions.
Drain backflow preventer if it is expected damage could occur from freezing weather.
3.10 THE 90 DAY ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
A. Preliminary Review: As soon as all plantings are completed per Contract Documents, hold a
preliminary review to determine the condition of the work.
B. Date of Review: Submit a written request to the Landscape Architect at least five (5) working
days prior to anticipated date of review.
C. Beginning of the 90-Day Establishment Period: The date on which the Landscape Architect
issues a letter of Preliminary Acceptance to the Contractor.
A. Acceptance:
1. Work will be accepted by the Landscape Architect upon satisfactory completion of all
work, including establishment period, but exclusive of replacement of materials under the
Warranty Period.
2. Submit a written request to Landscape Architect for review for Final Acceptance at least
five (5) working days prior to anticipated Final Review date, which is at the end of the
Establishment Period.
B. Corrective Work:
1. Work requiring corrective action or replacement in the judgment of the Landscape
Architect shall be performed within ten (10) calendar days after the Final Review.
2. Perform corrective work and materials replacement in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications, and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
3. After corrective work is completed, the Contractor shall again request a Final Review for
Final Acceptance as outlined above.
4. Continue establishment of all landscaped areas until such time as all corrective measures
have been completed and accepted.
C. Conditions for Acceptance of Work at End of Establishment Period:
1. Each plant shall be alive and thriving, showing signs of growth and no signs of stress,
disease, or any other weaknesses.
2. All plants not meeting these conditions shall be replaced and a 90 Day Establishment
Period commenced for such plants.
D. Final Acceptance Date: The date on which the Landscape Architect issues a Letter of Final
Acceptance. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner will assume responsibility for establishment of
the work.

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
329350 - Page 11

3.12 WARRANTY PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Specific Requirements: Refer to the following sections:
1. Irrigation - Section 328400.
2. Lawns and Grasses - Section 329200.
3. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcover- Section 329300.
3.13 CLEAN-UP
A. All areas shall be kept neat and orderly at all times. Debris from maintenance operations shall
not be allowed to remain in excess of two (2) hours. Remove all such debris from the site at the
end of each day.
B. Dispose of all pruned materials, vacuum all lawn clippings and leaves, sweep all walkways and
rake smooth all mulched areas.
C. Remove from the site all containers and evidence of maintenance activities.
END OF SECTION
WALNUT AVENUE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 1
SECTION 334617
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes drainage and subdrainage systems, complete, as shown and as specified.

1. Items Included:
a. Trenching and backfilling.
b. Providing and installing all pipe, including joints and fittings, cutting pipe to conform
to structures and modifications to existing system.
c. Constructing or installing surface basins, area drains and other structures.
d. Area drains in paving and planting
e. Cleanouts in paving and planting
f. Underdrains and subsurface drainage.
g. Subdrainage pipes and fittings
h. Filter fabrics and drainage stone
i. Drainage Gravel
1. Earthwork and Drainage Reference Civil
2. Connections to Mechanical Systems Reference Civil
3. Finish Landscape Grading - Section 329119
4. Earthwork Reference Civil
5. Soil Preparation - Section 329113
7. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Annual Color - Section 329300
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Site Storm Drainage
1.4 UNIT PRICES:
specifications.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
C. PE: Polyethylene.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 2
A. Product Data: Submit labeled samples, manufacturer's latest catalog cuts and specifications for
each specified product. Include submittals for every different item specified in each category.
Submit as follows:
1. Solid and Perforated pipe: Provide manufacturers literature and data.
2. Pipe fabric covering: Provide 6 square sample. Provide manufacturers literature and
data.
3. Drain mat panels: Provide 6 square sample. Provide manufacturers literature and data.
4. Geotextile fabrics. Provide 6 square sample. Provide manufacturers literature and data.
5. Gravel: Provide 1-quart sample. Provide manufacturers literature, sieve analysis and
data for each type specified.
6. Area Drains: Provide manufacturers literature and data for each type specified.
7. Channel Drains and Trench Drains: Provide manufacturers literature and data for each
type specified.
B. Compatibility Tests: Verification of permitivity and compatibility of soils with geotextile required
for compatibility of filter fabric or drainage mat with soil, refer to Soil Preparation Section 329113
for soil types.
C. Test data: Submit all laboratory test data of all materials.
D. Submittal Schedule: All products in this section that is required for submittal shall be included in
one Division 2 submittal package.
1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. "ASTM" - American Society for Testing and Materials as follows:
a. D 1785-76 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic pipe.
b. F-405 Corrugated Polyethylene tubing and fittings.
c. C-76 Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe.
A. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain: See Section 329300 - Trees, Shrubs, Vines,
Groundcover and Annual Color.
B. Protection of Utilities:
1. Provide temporary support and protection of underground and surface utility structures,
drains, services and other improvements noted to remain.
2. Where grade or alignment of pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as
conduits, ducts or pipes, permanently support, relocate, remove or reconstruct the
obstruction.
3. Restore all damaged improvements to original condition at no additional cost to Owner.
1.9 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: All containerized products shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's original,
unopened, legibly labeled containers. All pipe to be delivered bound securely to prevent
damage. Supply items as required to protect and support the products.
B. Storage: Protect materials from damage, water and rust. Store pipes on beds that are full
length of pipe (Protect plastic materials from direct sunlight).
C. Pipe: Cap openings against entry by dust, debris and other foreign matter.
D. Damaged Materials: Remove all damaged materials and replace at no expense to Owner.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 3
1.10 COORDINATION SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Concealed Work: Verify locations of existing stubouts to receive landscape area drains. [Verify
and locate existing pipes and structures to be coordinated with landscape drainage work.]
[Review all available records and make all necessary explorations and excavations.]
B. Field Measurements for Lines and Levels: Confirm lines and levels for each drainage system
and coordinate with other systems to prevent conflicts and maintain proper clearances.
C. Notification: Submit to Landscape Architect written notification of all discrepancies in the
Drawings or existing conditions which preclude successful installation of landscape drainage
work as specified.
A. Plant Pit Drainage: Coordinate installation of sub-drainage systems and tree pit inspection tubes
with installer of plant materials. Reference Division 32.
A. Review Date: Make a written request for review for Final Acceptance at least five days in
advance.
B. Completion: Work will be accepted upon satisfactory completion of all landscape drainage
work.
C. Responsibility: Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of
the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings PVC 1120, conforming to ASTM D1785-76, sizes as shown
on the Drawings.
1. Type: ASTM D3034, SDR-35, solid and perforated, belled end, solvent weld.
2. Type: ASTM D1785, PVC 1120-1220, Schedule 40, pipes and fittings.
a. Perforations: 3/8 in. diameter, 4 in. apart center to center longitudinally, in two rows
120 degrees apart.
3. Manufacturer: Lasco, (714) 993-1220.
4. Fittings Manufacturer: Dura, Lasco, Sloan or approved equal
B. Storm Drain Pipe:
1. Type: ASTM D3034, SDR 35, Schedule 40.
2. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Section 65 "Reinforced Concrete Pipe" of the Standard
Specifications.
3. Pipe shall be Class III (2000 D).
2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND DEVICES
A. General:
1. Drainage structures shall be constructed where and as shown in Drawings. Reference
Civil for additional requirements.
2. Provide and install all fittings and adapters as required for Storm Sewer connections from
drainage devices and structures to the terminus of piping.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
1. Planted Areas:
2. Type: PVC plug (MIPT) Schedule 80; 4 inch.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 4
3. Manufacturer: Lasco or approved equivalent.
2.4 PRECAST CATCH BASINS
A. Lawn Areas:
1. Type: Brooks 12 x 12 concrete box and cast iron grate.
2. Reference the drawings.
2.5 AREA DRAINS
A. Planting Areas:
1. Type: Model NDS-90 "Atrium" 9 inch with required fittings..
2. Finish: Black ABS plastic.
3. Manufacturer: National Drain Supplies, Inc., "SPEE-D-BASIN", Sun Valley, California.
Tel (213) 883-5950 or accepted equal.
2.6 Groundcover Planting Areas:
A. Type: Model NDS black color atrium grate, diameter per Civil engineer.
B. Manufacturer: National Diversified Sales, Inc. (NDS), 3001 Mission Oads Blvd., P. O. Box
6038, Camarillo, CA 93011. Tel. (800) 726-1994.
2.7 UNDERDRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Standard and perforated PVC pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D2729 sewer piping or
D2665 DWV piping.
1. J oints: Solvent welded sockets.
2. Perforation: Two rows one-half (1/2") inch diameter holes, 120 degrees apart on five (5")
inch centers parallel with pipe axis.
B. Spun bonded nylon fabric shall be wrapped fully around tubing.
2.8 FILTER AND SOIL SEPARATION FABRIC:
A. Shall be equal to "Mirafi FW 403 as manufactured by TC by Mirafi, Inc., Box 240967, Charlotte,
NC 28224. Tel (800) 234-0484.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. SAND BACKFILL: Fine granular material naturally produced by the disintegration of rock,
sufficiently free of organic material, mica, loam, clay and other deleterious substances to be
thoroughly suitable for pipe bedding.
B. Drain Gravel:
1. Description: Clean, coarse sand and gravel or crushed stone free from injurious materials
or soil and all deleterious chemicals, 3/8" inch to 3/4" inch. Crushed stone shall be
rejected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 5
A. Existing Utilities: Where grade or alignment of pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures
such as conduits, ducts or pipes, permanently support, relocate, remove or reconstruct the
obstruction.
B. Deviations: Make no deviations from specified line or grade without written acceptance of
change by Landscape Architect.
C. Verification: Verify rim elevations of area drains relative to adjacent paving prior to beginning of
work.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify exact locations and quantity of all drains relative to planting
areas and adjacent to paving, prior to beginning of work. Identify required lines, levels, contours,
and datum. Immediately report to Landscape Architect all discrepancies found prior to
installation of drains.
B. Deviations: Make no deviations from specified line or grade without written acceptance of
change by Landscape Architect.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it
is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building or site storm drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
2. Install piping with 12 inch minimum cover or per the engineers requirements.
3. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by
tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.
3.4 PIPE J OINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: J oin and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. J oin pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
2. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
C. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
Use the following seals:
1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 6
2. Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C 877, Type I, sealing bands.
3. Arch Pipe: ASTM C 877, Type I, sealing bands.
4. System Piping J oints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless
5. J oin piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this
application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials
and dimensions.
3.5 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement and/or planting surface.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according Division 3 Concrete.
3.7 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Assemble and install stainless-steel drainage systems according to ASME A112.3.1 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
D. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives,
fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
E. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom
and sides.
F. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.
G. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.
H. Embed trench sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and
sides.
I. Make piping connections and install stainless-steel piping with gasketed joints between system
components.
3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil
pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions
to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches
deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 7
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.9 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:
A. General: Reference Civil Engineers Documents.
B. When trench excavated to line and grade indicated in drawings encounters hardpan, rock, mud,
quicksand, debris, or other unsuitable bedding material, trench shall be further excavated to a
suitable limit as directed by Landscape Architect. Excavation shall then be backfilled with
approved import material that will provide adequate pipe bedding. Import material will be
cement stabilized sand unless otherwise specified by Engineer.
C. Backfill:
1. Backfill the remaining trench with excavated material to 12 in. above the top of the pipe. If
excavated material is unsuitable for compaction, use imported suitable material.
2. Do not permit sand backfill material to mix with structural backfill within the subdrain area
3. All trench backfill shall be compacted to (ninety five (95%) percent) OR (eighty five (85%)
percent) relative density.
4. Compaction of Backfill: 95% relative density.
D. Obstructions and Debris: Remove hardpan, rock, mud, quicksand, debris or other unsuitable
bedding material. Further excavate the trench a suitable limit as directed by the Engineer.
Backfill with import material approved by the Engineer that will provide adequate pipe bedding.
E. Backfill:
1. Use for backfilling around the pipe and to 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Backfill
the remaining trench with excavated material. If excavated material is unsuitable for
compaction, use imported suitable material.
2. Do not permit sand backfill material to mix with structural backfill within the subdrain area.
3.10 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A. All pipe shall be installed and tested in accordance with Civil Engineers requirements.
B. PVC Pipe: Install as detailed in the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's current
printed specifications.
3.11 Area Drains Subsurface Drainage System
A. Install to locations and rim elevations as shown and detailed on the Drawings.
B. Connect to pipe stubouts in strict accordance with the manufacturer's current printed
specifications.
C. Preparation of Trench: Accurately excavate trench as shown on the Drawings.
D. Filter Fabric: Place fabric in bottom of trench and extend up sides and beyond trench. Overlap
12 in. at ends of roll.
E. Drain Rock and Pipe: Install bedding portion of drain rock and bed pipe in place. Do not damage
or displace filter fabric.
F. Review: Prior to installing remaining drain rock backfill, request review by Landscape Architect
for progress of the work.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 8
G. Closing: Upon acceptance, add remaining drain rock and lap over the ends of the filter fabric as
3.12 UNDERDRAIN:
A. Excavate trench to depths and widths shown on the Drawings.
B. Install subdrainage pipe permitting minor drift from side to side in trench and connect to PVC
pipe installed under a separate contract, where shown. Pitch tubing to connections, if possible,
at a gradient not less than 0.5 percent.
C. Fill trench with drainage gravel to correct elevation, as shown. Install filter fabric and
immediately follow with the installation of a 4 gravel layer.
D. Install planting soil mix and plant materials as specified in Section 02910.
3.13 MANHOLES:
A. Construction in accordance with the Civil Engineers drawings. Comply with Local Code.
3.14 PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE IN TRENCH
A. Preparation of Trench: Accurately excavate trench as shown on the Drawings.
B. Filter Fabric: Place fabric in bottom of trench and extend up sides and beyond trench. Overlap
12 inches at ends of roll.
C. Drain Rock and Pipe: Install bedding portion of drain rock and bed pipe in place. Do not
damage or displace filter fabric.
D. Review: Prior to installing remaining drain rock backfill, request review by Landscape Architect
for progress of the work.
E. Closing: Upon acceptance, add remaining drain rock and lap over the ends of the filter fabric as
F. Soil Backfill: Backfill with (imported structural backfill) (permeable planting soil mix) to a
minimum depth of 6 inches above filter fabric as shown on Drawings.
G. Protection: Be responsible for protection of trench drain installation until commencement of
work under Soil Preparation - Section 02920.
3.15 AREA DRAINS: Install as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's current specifications.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. General: Keep clean and protect drainage system until commencement of work under Division
32, Section Soil Preparation.
1. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
2. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
3. In small pipes, place a temporary plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and
when work stops.
4. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

TOCM HDR208-001 J UNE 9, 2010
334617 - Page 9
B. Sediments: Regularly inspect and clean all drain sediment buckets to prevent flooding. Sweep
or hose clean all trench drains as necessary.
C. Sub-drain: Monitor sub-drainage systems and immediately identify all problems with drainage.
Make adjustments as necessary to maintain proper sub-drainage.
A. Tests: Field density test for compaction.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Installation of drainage matting.
C. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
5. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended,
or repaired, for leaks and defects.
6. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
D. Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of pipe, test drain piping with water to ensure free
flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test
until results are satisfactory.
1. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
3. Submit separate reports for each test.
4. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as
follows:
a. PVC and ADS Piping: Test according to AWWA standards for Testing and
Maintenance and repair items as follows:
1) Leaks and pipes that do not completely drain constitute defects that must be
repaired.
a) Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until
leakage is within allowances specified.
b) Excavate and reinstall pipes that do not drain such that positive
drainage occurs within the drainage system.
3.18 CLEAN-UP
B. Upon completion of work, remove off the site all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish
and debris resulting from the work
END OF SECTION
N8U Water and Sewer Improvements
Spec|a| Spec|f|cat|ons

Item S10 - |pe
lor Lhls pro[ecL, n8u SpeclflcaLlon lLem 310 lpe" ls herby amended wlLh respecL Lo Lhe clauses slLed
below and no oLher clauses or requlremenLs of Lhls lLem are walved or changed hereby.
S10.3 - Construct|on Methods
ConLracLor may lnsLall Lemporary blowoffs per n8u speclflcaLlons Lo asslsL ln LesLlng new malns. Any
Lemporary blowoffs lnsLalled, buL noL called for on Lhe plans, wlll be consldered subsldlary Lo work
under lLem 310 - lpe, for Lhe slze and Lype shown ln Lhe plans and ConLracL documenLs.
ConLracLor shall lnsLall Lhe SLeel lpe as shown ln Lhe plans.
ConLracLor shall deLermlne Lhe exLenLs of all exlsLlng sewer malns prlor Lo beglnnlng new sewer maln
consLrucLlon. Mlnor ad[usLmenLs Lo Lhe locaLlon of Lhe proposed end of Lhe new sewer maln may be
requlred due Lo Lhe locaLlon of Lhe exlsLlng maln.
WaLer SysLem ConnecLlons - ConLracLor wlll be requlred Lo malnLaln waLer servlce LhroughouL Lhe
pro[ecL llmlLs for Lhe duraLlon of Lhe pro[ecL. 1emporary malns, exLenslons, Lles, eLc. may be requlred
due Lo Lhe phaslng of Lhe pro[ecL.
WasLewaLer ConnecLlons - ConLracLor wlll be requlred Lo malnLaln wasLewaLer servlce LhroughouL Lhe
pro[ecL llmlLs for Lhe duraLlon of Lhe pro[ecL. 1emporary malns, exLenslons, Lles, eLc. may be requlred
due Lo Lhe phaslng of Lhe pro[ecL.
S10.6 ayment
aymenL for Lhe lnsLallaLlon of Lemporary blowoffs noL shown on Lhe plans wlll noL be pald for dlrecLly
buL wlll be consldered subsldlary Lo lLem 310.01 (W), lpe, for Lhe slze and Lype shown ln Lhe plans.
aymenL for SLeel lpe shall lnclude all bends, flLLlngs, hangers, anchors, hardware, eLc. needed Lo hang
Lhe plpe on Lhe brldge as well as peneLraLe Lhe wlng walls. no separaLe paymenL wlll be made for lLems
shown on Lhe plans and requlred Lo lnsLall Lhe sLeel plpe, buL shall be consldered subsldlary Lo Lhe SLeel
lpe, lLem 310.01 (W), lpe, 12" ula. (SLeel) (8rldge).
CosL for deLermlnlng Lhe locaLlon of Lhe end of exlsLlng sewer malns wlll be consldered subsldlary Lo
lLem 310.01 (WW), lpe, for Lhe slze and Lype shown ln Lhe plans.
ConLracLor may be requlred Lo use pressure raLed sewer plpe aL waLer crosslngs per Lhls speclflcaLlon.
aymenL for pressure raLed sewer plpe wlll be pald under lLem 310.01 (WW) lpe, for Lhe slze and Lype
shown ln Lhe plans.
WaLer SysLem ConnecLlons - 1emporary connecLlons, exLenslons, Lles, eLc. requlred Lo malnLaln servlce
durlng Lhe duraLlon of Lhe pro[ecL wlll noL be pald for dlrecLly, buL wlll be consldered subsldlary Lo lLem
310, lpe.
Item S06 - Manho|es
lor Lhls pro[ecL, n8u SpeclflcaLlon lLem 306 Manhole" ls herby amended wlLh respecL Lo Lhe clauses
slLed below and no oLher clauses or requlremenLs of Lhls lLem are walved or changed hereby.
S06.7 ayment
aymenL for Lhe lnsLallaLlon of new manholes lncludes replaclng ln place. no separaLe paymenL wlll be
made for manholes replaced ln place, buL wlll be pald for under lLem 306.01 (WW), new Manhole.
aymenL for Abandon LxlsLlng Manholes" wlll be pald for as a Lump Sum for Lhe compleLe pro[ecL.
aymenL wlll be made under lLem 306.90 (WW), Abandon LxlsLlng Manholes and Sewer Llnes.
Item S11 - Va|ves
lor Lhls pro[ecL, n8u SpeclflcaLlon lLem 311 valves" ls herby amended wlLh respecL Lo Lhe clauses slLed
below and no oLher clauses or requlremenLs of Lhls lLem are walved or changed hereby.
ConLracLor wlll be requlred Lo use PydrasLops" aL varlous locaLlons where exlsLlng valves are
lnadequaLe or n8u lnspecLlons requlres Lhelr use. Conslder Lhls Lerm PydrasLop" or approved equal Lo
be equal Lo Lhe generlcally known Lerm of Llne SLopper. ConLacLor shall noL lnsLall a hydrasLop wlLhouL
n8u lnspecLlon's approval.
S11.6 ayment
aymenL for PydrasLops wlll be pald for under lLem 311.90 (W), PydrasLop for Lhe slze shown, lf
lnsLallaLlon was approved by n8u lnspecLlons. PydrasLops lnsLalled wlLhouL n8u approval wlll noL be
pald for under Lhls lLem buL wlll be consldered subsldlary Lo lLem 310, lpe.
Spec|a| Work Areas
ConLracLor ls made aware LhaL work wlLhln Lhe llmlLs of Lhe PL8 parklng loL wlll have speclal
requlremenLs and work hours. lL ls anLlclpaLed aL Lhls Llme LhaL work hours and Llme of year wlll be
llmlLed as follows:
Pours: 9:30pm Lo 8:00am.
MonLh: SLarL afLer !uly 31, 2010, compleLe prlor Lo CcLober 29, 2010.

All Lrenchlng musL be covered dally wlLh PMAC Lo provlde for unlnLerrupLed PL8 cosLumer Lrafflc. no
maLerlals, equlpmenL, or open Lrenches wlll be allowed on PL8 properLy durlng non worklng hours.

Cnce work beglns, all work wlLhln Lhe llmlLs of Lhe PL8 parklng loL musL be compleLed wlLhln 7 worklng
days. ConLracLor wlll pay llquldaLed damages per Lhe ConLracL for any Llme pasL Lhe 7 worklng day Llme
frame.

LxacL hours and monLhs of work wlll be deLermlned once Lhe ConLracLor ls selecLed and consLrucLlon
phaslng ls deLermlned. Cnce LhaL occurs, a meeLlng wlll be seL up for Lhe ConLracLor, n8u, ClLy and PL8
Lo dlscuss flnal work hours and schedules.

All work wlLhln Lhe PL8 parklng area wlll be pald for under Lhe parLlcular bld lLem for LhaL work. no
speclal bld lLems for Lhls work are lncluded ln Lhls conLracL.

Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Specifications Atlanta, Corpus Christi, Paris, Pharr, Yoakum

Tyler, Fort Worth and San Antonio Districts

You might also like